16625195-FDDRev02 (MANUAL)

Printed By: parambahk Printed On: 2016-07-31 01:11:56 GMT-0500
Driller's Wrap Around Console

User Manual
Customer References
Customer: Kuwait Drilling Company
Rig / Hull: KDC 29
Tag Number: N/A
National Oilwell Varco References:

SO Number / Project Number: 278251 / 7223 C03
Document Number: 16625195-FDD
Revision: 02
Volume:
www.nov.com
TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document number 16625195-FDD

Revision 02
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
02 24.06.2016 For information S. Peoples K. Martinez B. Fisher

01 04.05.2016 For information S. Peoples K. Martinez B. Fisher
Rev Date (dd.mm.yyyy) Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision Change Description

01 New Release
02 For information
www.nov.com

Document Number: 16625195-FDD TOC

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 02
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title Remarks

Section
1 1 General Information (Chapter Not Applicable)
1 2 Installation, Operation, & Maintenance
1 2.1 Procedures
1 2.2 Spare Parts List
1 3 Technical Documents & Drawings
1 3.1 General / Mechanical Drawings
1 3.2 System / Process Diagrams (Section Not Applicable)
1 3.3 Electrical / Instrument
1 3.4 Performance Data (Section Not Applicable)
1 4 Vendor Documentation (Chapter Not Applicable)
www.nov.com

Document Number: 16625195-FDD TOC 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

Section
1 1 General Information
(Chapter Not Applicable)
www.nov.com


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title

Section
1 2 Installation, Operation, & Maintenance
1 2.1 Procedures
www.nov.com

Document Number: 16625195-FDD TOC 2.1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
1 2.1 Procedures
Shipping & Handling Procedure - KDC 23, 28, 29, & 30 16599964-SHP 01
Driller's Console
Preservation & Storage Procedure - KDC 23, 28, 29, & 30 16599968-PRO 01
Driller's Console
Installation Procedure – KDC 23, 28, 29 & 30 Driller’s 16599969-PRO 01
Console
Commissioning Test - Drawworks & Cathead Controls 16595473-PRO 01
Operation Manual - Drawworks & Cathead Controls 16595463-MAN 01
Operation & Maintenance Manual – KDC 23, 28, 29 & 30 16599963-MAN 01

Driller’s Console
www.nov.com

Shipping
& Handling Procedure
KDC 23, 28, 29 & 30
Driller's Console
RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

KDC 23, 28, 29 & 30 7268, 6591, 7223, Driller's Console
7224
ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS This document contains proprietary and confidential
5 information which is the property of National Oilwell
Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively
REMARKS referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited National Oilwell Varco
purposes only and remains the property of NOV.
Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or
11000 Corporate Centre Dr.
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE
distribution of this information to others is not permitted Houston Texas 77041
without the express written consent of NOV. This Phone +1 281 854 0400
CLIENT PO NUMBER document is to be returned to NOV upon request or upon
completion of the use for which it was loaned. This
Fax +1 281 854 0607
document and the information contained and represented
herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.
 National Oilwell Varco
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
16599964-SHP 01

Document number 16599964-SHP

Revision 01
Page 2 of 5
REVISION HISTORY
01 05.02.2016 For Information JMD MEC MEC

Rev Date (mm.dd.yyyy) Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision Change description

01 For Information
02 Added shipping configurations
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 3 of 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 4
1.1 General ................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 Reference documents ............................................................................................. 4
2 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
3 RESPONSIBILITIES ......................................................................................................... 4
4 HANDLING OF DRILLER’S CONSOLE ........................................................................... 4
5 CHECK LISTS FOR SAFE HANDLING ............................................................................ 4
5.1 Before lifting ............................................................................................................ 5
5.2 During lifting/lowering .............................................................................................. 5
6 DIMENSIONS .................................................................................................................... 5
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 4 of 5
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 General
This document specifies how the driller’s console should be handled during transport and
lifting, and what precautions to take. The procedure describes in order what steps need to
be considered during handling and lifting.
1.2 Reference documents
 16542223-GAD KDC 23 Console GAD

 16542301-GAD KDC 28 Console GAD
 16574359-GAD KDC 29 & 30 Console GAD
2 SCOPE
This procedure covers handling of the driller’s console.
3 RESPONSIBILITIES
It is the shipping clerks responsibility to ensure that safe handling is performed by

qualified personnel and that approved procedures of the latest revision are being used.
4 HANDLING OF DRILLER’S CONSOLE
This procedure is made to achieve a secure lifting/handling of the driller’s console, and
to avoid the risk of injury and damage to the equipment. The console is not equipped
with lifting eyes, however, lifting straps should be used to lift the console. Multiple
straps will ensure safe lifting and maneuvering of the console.
5 CHECK LISTS FOR SAFE HANDLING
The checklist underneath is split into two parts. The first part describes the actions
before lifting. The second part describes the actions during lifting and transportation.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 5 of 5
5.1 Before lifting
Item Description
1 All openings and connections must be secured.
2 Check that equipment inside is secured for transportation.
3 Close and secure doors from opening.
4 Ensure bottom entry cables are properly stored to avoid damage.
5.2 During lifting/lowering
Item Description
1 Secure the driller’s console by attaching straps to the skid where required.
6 DIMENSIONS
The overall dimensions are described in the general arrangement drawing for the driller’s
console.
www.nov.com

Preservation
& Storage Procedure
KDC 23, 28, 29 & 30
Driller's Console

7224
ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS This document contains proprietary and confidential information
7.3 7 which is the property of National Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates
or subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It
is loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of
REMARKS NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or
distribution of this information to others is not permitted without National Oilwell Varco
the express written consent of NOV. This document is to be
returned to NOV upon request or upon completion of the use for
which it was loaned. This document and the information Houston Texas 77041
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE contained and represented herein is the copyrighted property of Phone +1 281 854 0400
NOV.
Fax +1 281 854 0607
CLIENT PO NUMBER
16599968-PRO 01
www.nov.com

Document number 16599968-PRO

Revision 01
Page 2 of 7
REVISION HISTORY

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 For Information
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 3 of 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 4
1.1 Definitions ............................................................................................................... 4
1.2 How to use the Preservation Checklist.................................................................... 4
1.3 References.............................................................................................................. 4
2 SCOPE .............................................................................................................................. 4
3 RESPONSIBILITIES ......................................................................................................... 5
4 DRILLER’S CONSOLE OPENINGS ................................................................................. 5
5 DRILLER’S CONSOLE INTERIOR ................................................................................... 5
6 MARKING FOR SHIPPING ............................................................................................... 5
7 DRILLER’S CONSOLE STORAGE, TEMPERATURE, AND HUMIDITY ......................... 6
8 DRILLER’S CONSOLE STORAGE (PREFERRED METHOD) ........................................ 6
9 UNPACKING ..................................................................................................................... 6
10 INSPECTION..................................................................................................................... 7
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 4 of 7
1 INTRODUCTION
This procedure covers preservation, packing and handling of National Oilwell Varco
control consoles from workshop to installation on site.
1.1 Definitions
Initial Preservation
 Preservation applied upon completion of fabrication before transport from the

storage facility to the assembly yard.
De-preservation
 In connection with the installation in the assembly yard, preservation materials are
removed before commissioning of the equipment.
1.2 How to use the Preservation Checklist
The tag number for each unit, which has been inspected, shall be noted on the
Preservation Checklist (attached). If the inspection has covered more than one tag
number, all inspected tag numbers may be noted on the same checklist.
Alternatively, one checklist could be generated for each tag number.
1.3 References
Document number Document Title

16542223-GAD KDC 23 Console GAD
16574359-GAD KDC 29 & 30 Console GAD
2 SCOPE
Tag No Description
TBA Console
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 5 of 7
3 RESPONSIBILITIES
It is the Package Lead’s responsibility to ensure that competent people are taking care
of the preservation and that they are equipped with and are using the latest revision of
relevant procedures for the task.
Furthermore, it is the Package Lead’s responsibility to ensure that insurance matters

are taken care of and that shipping is performed in accordance with standard
regulations.
4 DRILLER’S CONSOLE OPENINGS
The MCT’s in the base of the cabin should be sealed and both end door gland plates
should be secured in place. This will minimize dirt and debris from accumulating inside
the console.
5 DRILLER’S CONSOLE INTERIOR
Console interior spaces should at no time be subjected to salt spray or salt laden air.
All loose items should be secured.
6 MARKING FOR SHIPPING
The product shall be marked and clearly identified with relevant information such
as:
a) Client's name and address

b) Client's purchase order number
c) Delivery place, means of transport
d) National Oilwell Varco name, address and purchase order number
e) Weight of goods ex. tare
f) Lifting equipment certificate
g) "This side up"-signs
h) Minimum/maximum temperature under transport/storage
i) Parts list
j) Preservation/storage instructions
Shipping documentation shall be provided in sealed plastic pockets and securely

fastened onto the front wall.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 6 of 7
7 DRILLER’S CONSOLE STORAGE, TEMPERATURE, AND HUMIDITY
If the product is kept in intermediate storage, remove only sufficient packing

necessary to permit examination for possible damage in transit. The packing must
then be replaced to ensure protection against climatic conditions (ref. section 4.1 -
Packing).
Intermediate storage is preferable in dry rooms (e.g. warehouse) and for a

maximum period of 12 months. Outdoor storage is acceptable providing that the
following provisions are followed.
a) The equipment must be stored with the correct end up

b) Humidity must be kept lower than 70%, and no condensation must occur
c) Storage temperature must be in the range of + 10C to + 35C
d) Humidity absorbing means shall be inspected at regular interval, and replaced
when required
e) Equipment must remain packed and preserved
8 DRILLER’S CONSOLE STORAGE (PREFERRED METHOD)
It is preferable to store the equipment in a controlled heated and air conditioned building
that has adequate air circulation, and that protects the console from dirt, excessive
humidity and water. The console should be covered and secured with a plastic blanket
or canvas to minimize dirt accumulation on and inside the console.
9 UNPACKING
The following procedure for unpacking must be followed:
a) Cut steel stretching band

b) Remove cover (plastic, plywood etc.)
c) Remove temporary transport security.
d) Shipping documentation on crate to be relocated onto the equipment.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 7 of 7
10 INSPECTION
When receiving the equipment, an arrival inspection must immediately take place:
a) All parts in the crates must be checked/verified against the part list.
b) Any damage that has occurred during transport must be noted and reported to
National Oilwell Varco immediately.
c) Check that the lifting lugs (if applicable) are in condition for further lifting by
slings.
Event Events to be performed Event title. Detailed description is Preservatives to be used for
no. with intervals as found on the preservation check list the event
indicated below (ex. 4 = (form no. MC/PC/01)
every four weeks)
1 2 4 8 16 32
1 X Inspect doors & covers Denso tape
2 X Inspect units N/A
3 X Inspect covers for damage N/A
4 X Check external surfaces N/A
5 X Inspect preservatives Cortex VCI 100
6 X Inspect covers, caps & plugs N/A
7 X Check preservation labels N/A
8
9
10
Special information: Ensure that the unit is not energized! If energized and not labeled as such, report this fact
to the Maintenance Supervisor before proceeding with checks.
Event Period General check items Preservatives Status* Signature

no. (week)
Ensure that all covers or doors on units
1 1 Straps
are properly secured.
Inspect units. Report any abnormalities,
2 4 e.g. corrosion damage, moisture, etc. N/A
Clean and dry unit carefully.
Ensure that covers are not damaged.
3 4 Report any damage to Maintenance N/A
Supervisor immediately.
Check that external surfaces are not
4 4 damaged. Report any damage to N/A
Maintenance Supervisor immediately.
Ensure that all necessary covers, end
caps and plugs are in position on cables,
5 4 tubing ends and associated control N/A
equipment. Replace any missing covers,
plugs, caps, etc.
Ensure that preservation labels are in
6 4 N/A
position. Correct and update as required.
* Status is either OK (accepted) or N/A (not applicable)
www.nov.com

Installation Procedure
KDC 23, 28, 29 & 30
Driller's Console

7224
7.3 5 information which is the property of National Oilwell
REMARKS
Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively National Oilwell Varco
referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or Houston Texas 77041
distribution of this information to others is not permitted Phone +1 281 854 0400
without the express written consent of NOV. This
CLIENT PO NUMBER document is to be returned to NOV upon request or upon
Fax +1 281 854 0607
16599969-PRO 01


Revision 01
Page 2 of 5
REVISION HISTORY

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 Initial release
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 3 of 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 4
2 REFERENCE DRAWINGS................................................................................................ 4
3 INSTALLING DRILLER’S CONSOLE .............................................................................. 5
4 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC - DRILLER’S CONSOLE HOOK-UP ...................................... 5
4.1 Electrical Cables ..................................................................................................... 5
4.2 Hydraulic Hoses ...................................................................................................... 5
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 4 of 5
1 INTRODUCTION
This installation document covers the events for installing the Driller’s Console from
National Oilwell Varco to the site location.
2 REFERENCE DRAWINGS
Drawing number Document Title

16574359-GAD KDC 29 & 30 Console GAD
16561488-DIA 7268 System Interconnect Diagram, Drawworks
16558029-DIA 7268 System Interconnect Diagram, KEMS
16561487-DIA 7268 Termination Drawing, Drawworks
16577918-DIA 6591 System Interconnect Diagram, KEMS
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 5 of 5
3 INSTALLING DRILLER’S CONSOLE
Use the Cabin Layout drawing to properly place the console in the cabin. The console
should be secured to the cabin by welding or bolting the flange along the base perimeter of
the console. Be sure to paint over any welding to prevent corrosion.
4 ELECTRIC / HYDRAULIC - DRILLER’S CONSOLE HOOK-UP
4.1 Electrical Cables
The electrical cables provided by NOV are rolled back into the console sections for
shipping and then reconnection to equipment on site. Each section will have some wiring
that will go to other sections, this wiring needs to be run through the cabin sub-floor.
4.2 Hydraulic Hoses
The hydraulic hoses coming into the console for connection to the Tong Line and WOB
gauges need to run through the cabin penetrations and then into the appropriate bay.
www.nov.com

Commissioning Test
Drawworks & Cathead Controls

KDC RIG 29 J257223 Drawworks Controls
ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS
18 This document contains proprietary and confidential National Oilwell Varco
information which is the property of National Oilwell Rig Solutions – Western Hemisphere
REMARKS Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively
referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited 11000 Corporate Centre Drive Suite
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE purposes only and remains the property of NOV. #200
Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or Houston Texas 77041
distribution of this information to others is not permitted
CLIENT PO NUMBER without the express written consent of NOV. This
document is to be returned to NOV upon request or upon Phone +1 281 854 0400
completion of the use for which it was loaned. This Fax +1 281 854 0607
© National Oilwell Varco
16595473-PRO 01
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 2 of 18
REVISION HISTORY
01 12.02.2016 Issued for Construction CIG BKF BKF

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 First Issue
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 3 of 18
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 TEST PROCEDURE & RESULTS ...................................................................................... 5

2 CONSOLE CIRCUIT CHECK ............................................................................................. 6
2.1 Analog Meters ........................................................................................................... 6
2.1.1 Drawworks Inertia Brake ............................................................................... 6
2.1.2 Rotary Inertia Brake ...................................................................................... 6
2.1.3 Drawworks Lube Oil ...................................................................................... 6
2.1.4 Drawworks High Clutch ................................................................................. 6
2.1.5 Drawworks Low Clutch .................................................................................. 6
2.1.6 Disc Brake Hydraulic Supply ......................................................................... 6
2.1.7 Emergency Caliper ........................................................................................ 7
2.1.8 DS Supply Pressure ...................................................................................... 7
2.1.9 DS Service Caliper ........................................................................................ 7
2.1.10 ODS Supply Pressure ................................................................................. 7
2.1.11 ODS Service Caliper ................................................................................... 7
2.1.12 Drawworks Brake Cooling Water ................................................................ 7
2.1.13 Hydraulic Cathead Makeup/Breakout ......................................................... 7
2.1.14 Drawworks Air Supply ................................................................................. 8
2.1.15 Main Hydraulic Supply................................................................................. 8
2.1.16 Cathead Makeup Pressure N/A .................................................................. 8
2.1.17 Cathead Breakout Pressure N/A ................................................................. 8
2.2 Controls and Lights ................................................................................................... 8
2.2.1 Clutch Joystick .............................................................................................. 8
2.2.2 Drawworks Gears Low/High .......................................................................... 9
2.2.3 Drawworks Inertia Brake Selector ................................................................. 9
2.2.4 Rotary Table Inertia Brake Selector .............................................................. 9
2.2.5 Crown-O-Matic Reset .................................................................................... 9
2.2.6 Emergency Park Brake ............................................................................... 10
2.2.7 Hydraulic Cathead Joystick & Selector Switch ........................................... 10
2.2.8 Hydraulic Cathead Makeup Pressure ......................................................... 10
2.2.9 Drawworks Cathead Selector switch N/A ................................................... 10
2.2.10 Low Jaw Clutch N/A .................................................................................. 10
2.2.11 Drawworks Cathead Joystick N/A ............................................................. 11
2.2.12 Horn Pushbutton ....................................................................................... 11
2.2.13 HPU Alarm LED ........................................................................................ 11
2.2.14 Auxiliary Shift Cylinder LED ...................................................................... 11
3 SERVICE BRAKE JOYSTICK CONTROL ....................................................................... 12
3.1.1 Y-Axis Potentiometer................................................................................... 12
3.1.2 Discrete Controls ......................................................................................... 12
3.1.3 Hook Load Signal ........................................................................................ 12
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 4 of 18
4 CONTROL CHECKS......................................................................................................... 13

4.1 Disc Brake Control .................................................................................................. 13
4.2 Brake Response Tables ......................................................................................... 14
4.3 VAT ‘Setup’ ............................................................................................................. 15
4.3.1 Burn Values to the Memory Card ................................................................ 15
4.4 Alarms ..................................................................................................................... 16
4.4.1 Hook Load Failure Alarm ............................................................................ 16
4.4.2 Joystick Failure Alarm ................................................................................. 16
4.5 EDS Interface.......................................................................................................... 16
5 SYSTEM PUNCH LIST ..................................................................................................... 18
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 5 of 18
1 TEST PROCEDURE & RESULTS
Before power up, verify the system is connected as per the System Interconnection (SID)
and Termination (TER) Drawings.
NOTES:
1. Ohm check field wiring before power up.
2. Set all relevant dip switch settings i.e. I.S. barriers, Siemens Analog Input
module. Setting details are on INW’s.
3. Emulate as much field wiring and sensors as possible during this test.
4. Ensure the latest software backup is installed on PLC before starting test.
5. The Operation Manual must be used in conjunction with testing procedure.
6. Verify all the equipment that the console connects to is calibrated and functions
correctly (see the SID) including the Drawworks.
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS:

 PLC programmers device, PC
 Multimeter
 Current/voltage simulator, active and passive
 Arrangements for simulating digital inputs and outputs
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 6 of 18
2 CONSOLE CIRCUIT CHECK
2.1 Analog Meters
2.1.1 Drawworks Inertia Brake

Apply 0-200 PSI or if unavailable apply 4-20mA and verify 0-200 PSI range of meter.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.2 Rotary Inertia Brake

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.3 Drawworks Lube Oil

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.4 Drawworks High Clutch

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.5 Drawworks Low Clutch

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.6 Disc Brake Hydraulic Supply

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 7 of 18
2.1.7 Emergency Caliper

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.8 DS Supply Pressure

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.9 DS Service Caliper

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.10 ODS Supply Pressure

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.11 ODS Service Caliper

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.12 Drawworks Brake Cooling Water

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.13 Hydraulic Cathead Makeup/Breakout

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 8 of 18
2.1.14 Drawworks Air Supply

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.15 Main Hydraulic Supply

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.16 Cathead Makeup Pressure N/A

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.1.17 Cathead Breakout Pressure N/A

Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2 Controls and Lights
2.2.1 Clutch Joystick

Move the clutch joystick to select the low clutch. Verify that the low drum clutch
solenoid valve fires. Repeat the test for the high clutch. Verify both clutches are off
when joystick is in the center position.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 9 of 18
2.2.2 Drawworks Gears Low/High

Check that you cannot change gears when the Drawworks Inertia Brake is not engaged.
Check when the DW Inertia Brake is engaged you can change gears. Disconnect the
low & high gear proximity switches and set the console gear switch to low and high and
verify after 2 seconds the low and high gear console LED’s flash indicating a fault.
Reconnect the gear proximity switches and verify the flashing LEDs stop and the low &
high gear LEDs turn steady on when low or high gear is selected.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2.3 Drawworks Inertia Brake Selector

Check when the Drawworks Inertia Brake is turned on, the valve is on and the feedback
pressure transmitter sends a high pressure signal to the drawworks console meters.
Check when the brake is turned off, the pressure on the gauge is low.
Note: There is a pneumatic interlock between the Drawworks Inertia Brake and the
Transmission Shifter. The Gears cannot be changed when the DW Inertia Brake is not
engaged.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2.4 Rotary Table Inertia Brake Selector

Switch the Rotary Table inertia brake selector and verify that the Rotary Table inertia
brake solenoid valve fires.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2.5 Crown-O-Matic Reset

Push the Pushbutton and verify the solenoid valve turns on.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 10 of 18
2.2.6 Emergency Park Brake

Push the Emergency Park/Brake button and verify that the Emergency/Park Brake and
the Fire Axe solenoid valves fire and all brakes are set to full pressure (brakes on).
Verify any movement of the joystick results in no change in pressure on the system.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2.7 Hydraulic Cathead Joystick & Selector Switch

When the switch is set to Makeup or Breakout verify 12-6VDC for joystick center to pull
and 12-18VDC for joystick center to release is present at the Makeup or Breakout
solenoid valves and the valves operate correctly. Verify the valves are off when the
switch is set to off.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2.8 Hydraulic Cathead Makeup Pressure

Turn the Hydraulic Cathead Makeup Pressure Potentiometer to 0-100%, and verify that
0-400mA signal is present on –DAMP1 Coil A+ & Coil A- and the Makeup pressure
valve provides 0-100% pressure.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2.9 Drawworks Cathead Selector switch N/A

Verify when the switch is set to MAKEUP and the Drawworks Cathead Joystick is in the
0% top position, it activates PLC Digital Input address I1.3 (Ch.11) and Digital Output
address Q1.4 (Ch.12) and 24VDC on terminals X2-07: 58 & 67. Verify when the switch
is set to BREAKOUT and the Drawworks Cathead Joystick is in the 0% top position, it
activates PLC Digital Input address I1.4 (Ch.12) and the Digital Output address Q1.5
(Ch.13) and 24VDC on terminals X2-07: 59 & 68. Verify nothing happens when
MAKEUP or BREAKOUT is selected while the Drawworks Cathead Joystick is out of the
0% top position.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2.10 Low Jaw Clutch N/A

Verify the Low Jaw Clutch solenoid is activated when the Drawworks motor speed is
less than 5 RPM and the system is in low gear. Verify if the speed is above 5 RPM or
the system is no longer in low gear then the Low Jaw Clutch solenoid is deenergized.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 11 of 18
2.2.11 Drawworks Cathead Joystick N/A

With the selector switch in either makeup or breakout, verify minimum speed at the 0%
top position and full speed at the 100% bottom position.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2.12 Horn Pushbutton

Press the Horn pushbutton on the console and verify the air horn sounds while the
button is pressed. The horn should stop as soon as the button is released.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2.13 HPU Alarm LED

Simulate an alarm at the HPU Annunciator Panel and verify the HPU Alarm LED turns
on in the console.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
2.2.14 Auxiliary Shift Cylinder LED

Verify the Aux Brake Shift Cylinder LED turns on when the shift cylinder is engaged.
Verify the light turns off when the cylinder is disengaged. Verify the input lights on the
Aux Brake Shift Cylinder I.S. Barrier toggle on and off according to the cylinder being
engaged or disengaged.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 12 of 18
3 SERVICE BRAKE JOYSTICK CONTROL
3.1.1 Y-Axis Potentiometer

Verify PLC Channel PIW300 sees a 4-20mA signal when the joystick is moved from the
home position to the full forward position.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
3.1.2 Discrete Controls
This test is to be performed with the blocks secured.
Verify when the disc brake joystick trigger, top pushbutton or front pushbutton are
actuated (or any combination of the three), then JSR1 is energized and PLC Channel
I100.0 goes high (sees 24Vdc on the input). Verify JSR3 is also energized.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
Verify when the disc brake joystick is in the full forward + left position, then JSR2 is
energized and PLC Channel I100.1 goes high (sees 24Vdc on the input). Verify JSR3 is
also energized.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
Verify when JSR3 is energized, the Drawworks Main Brake is released.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
3.1.3 Hook Load Signal

Verify PLC Channel PIW302 sees a 4-20mA hook load signal.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 13 of 18
4 CONTROL CHECKS
This test is to be performed with the blocks secured.
4.1 Disc Brake Control

Simulate a small hook load signal (8 mA) into the EDS Cabinet, barrier ISB2-1. Verify
when the hook load signal is small, the joystick response is very sensitive in the first
25% of movement, meaning small movements in the joystick result in very large
pressure changes on the DS and ODS servo valves in the first quarter of joystick
movement. The pressure changes are smaller in the 25 – 100% range of movement.
See the graph in section 4.2 for a visual reference (information only, graph may be
slightly different from rig to rig) of the brake pressure response versus joystick positions
when operating at different hook loads.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
Simulate a large hook load signal (16 mA) into the EDS Cabinet, barrier ISB2-1. Verify
when the hook load signal is large, the joystick response is not very sensitive in the first
25% of movement, meaning large movements in the joystick result in small pressure
changes on the DS and ODS servo valves in the first quarter of joystick movement. The
pressure changes are smaller in the 25 – 100% range of movement. See the graph in
section 4.2 for a visual reference (information only, graph may be slightly different from
rig to rig) of the brake pressure response versus joystick positions when operating at
different hook loads.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
Simulate max hook load signal (20 mA) into the EDS Cabinet, barrier ISB2-1. Verify the
brake pressure changes linearly throughout the joystick travel (pressure response
should be the same throughout joystick travel). See the graph in section 4.2 for a visual
reference (information only, graph may be slightly different from rig to rig) of the brake
pressure response versus joystick positions when operating at different hook loads.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 14 of 18
4.2 Brake Response Tables
100
95
90
85
80 Load 16ma
75
Load 18ma
70
Load 20ma
65
Load 8ma
60
55 Load 10ma
50 Load 12ma
45 Load 14ma
40 Load 6ma
35 Load 7ma
30
Load 5ma
25
Load 4ma
20
15
10
5
0
0 25 50 75 100
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 15 of 18
4.3 VAT ‘Setup’

A VAT table has been added to the software named ‘Setup’. In here, the brake
response curves can be tweaked via changes in the sensitivity factor and transitions
points. The minimum hook load must also be entered at the time of commissioning (in
mA).
The default sensitivity factor is 1 (from a scale of 0.1 to 1). Decreasing the value of the
sensitivity decreases the effect of the hook load on the brake output curve, i.e. keeping
the sensitivity at 1 means the brake output curve is linear to the joystick movement at
maximum hook load (20mA).
The Brake Joystick Transition Point and the Brake Command Transition Point both
affect the slope of the brake output curve. As shown in the table in 3.2, the default
setting is (25%,25%), which means at 25% joystick movement, only 25% brake
command is given (at minimum hook load). Both of these values can be increased or
decreased from 20 – 30%, and both values do not have to match each other.
Once the system has been commissioned and signed off by the customer, all values
selected for this VAT table need to be written down in the commissioning procedure.
Minimum Hook Load __________ Hook Load Sensitivity Factor __________
Brake JS Trans. Point __________ Brake Command Trans. Point __________
4.3.1 Burn Values to the Memory Card
Ensure the values in the VAT are not lost due to a power loss, etc., by burning the
software onto the memory card. This is done by uploading the online software to the
PC, and then downloading it back to the memory card on the ET200S CPU.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 16 of 18
4.4 Alarms
4.4.1 Hook Load Failure Alarm

Remove the input wires to the ISB2-1 barrier in the EDS cabinet, terminals 1 and 3.
Verify relay –DR2 is energized, indicating a hook load failure.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
Verify that under these conditions the joystick linearly controls the service brakes (1:1).
The pressure changes should be the same throughout the y-travel of the joystick.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
4.4.2 Joystick Failure Alarm

Remove the wire lead from –DIS02:D+ leading to the Disc Brake PLC. Verify relay
–DR1 is energized, indicating a joystick failure alarm. Verify the PLC commands full
service brake pressure when this alarm condition exists, regardless of joystick position.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
4.5 EDS Interface
This test is to be performed with the EDS fully functional and in EDS Ready mode.
Verify when the EDS is in EDS Ready Mode that the Service Brake Joystick has control
of the service calipers when the joystick is moved from home to full forward while the
trigger or pushbuttons are depressed.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
Verify when the EDS E-Stop Pushbutton is activated, the Service Brake Joystick has no
control of the service calipers when the joystick is moved from home to full forward while
the trigger or pushbuttons are depressed all brakes are fully applied.
Circle Outcome
Pass / Fail
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 17 of 18
Tested By Date
Witnessed By Date
Accepted By Date
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 18 of 18
5 SYSTEM PUNCH LIST

.
INSPECTION & TEST RECORDS: SYSTEM PUNCH LIST
PACKAGE TITLE: Drawworks & Cathead P.O.NO.: NA Page no.: 1 of 1

Controls / Instrumentation
It is hereby certified that the plant/equipment referred to on this document has been inspected, tested and completed
in accordance with documents, relevant project drawings, specifications and procedures with the exception of those
items identified on the Suppliers Mechanical Completion Punch List(s) attached to this Certificate.
Verified by Name (block letters) Signature Date
Supplier:
National Oilwell Varco
Customer:
KDC
Item Descr. of inspection/test Status Status Ref. DOC./DWG. & comments.

IC FAT
Allowable status indicators: OK = acceptable, NA = not applicable, NP = transferable to next phase,

PA=punchlist item ('A'-category), PB=punchlist item ('B'-category).
NOTE! Indicate punch item references on Punch Lists as: "Page no."/"Item"
www.nov.com

Operation Manual
Drawworks & Cathead Controls

information which belongs to National Oilwell Varco, L.P., Rig Solutions - Western Hemisphere
REMARKS it is loaned for limited purposes only and remains the
property of National Oilwell Varco, L.P. Reproduction, in 11000 Corporate Centre Drive Suite
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE whole or in part, or use of this design or distribution of this #200
information to others is not permitted without the express Houston Texas 77041
written consent of National Oilwell Varco, L.P. This
CLIENT PO NUMBER document is to be returned to National Oilwell Varco, L.P.
upon request and in any event upon completion of the use Phone +1 281 854 0400
for which it was loaned. Fax +1 281 854 0607
© Copyright National Oilwell Varco, L.P. - 2016
16595463-MAN 01
www.nov.com

Document number 16595463-MAN

Revision 01
Page 2 of 11
REVISION HISTORY
01 02.12.2016 For Information CIG BKF BKF

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 Initial Release
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 3 of 11
Warranty Policy
National Oilwell Varco, L.P. guarantees that NOV products will be free of defects in
workmanship and materials for a period of 12 months from the date of shipment to the
customer. The warranty will guarantee that any defective parts will be replaced free of charge
by National Oilwell Varco, L.P., provided that the failure has not been caused by abuse or
misuse during the warranty period. Labor and travel will be charged at the normal service rate
at the time of the claim. This warranty is expressly limited to parts and no other costs incurred
will be met by National Oilwell Varco, L.P.
Product Liability Notice
National Oilwell Varco, L.P. accepts no responsibility for damage to equipment or injury to
personnel caused by misuse of this equipment. While in operation, this equipment should not
be left unattended and the calibration should not be set in such a way that the system be left
unattended. This equipment is designed as a back-up system to increase levels of safety and
on no account should be relied upon to provide means of automatic Traveling Block control.
Responsibility for safety lies with the rig operator; always observe good drilling practice.
About the Operating Manual
This Operating Manual has been written to provide a guide to the installation and operation of
the Drawworks & Cathead controls.
It is important to acquire a good understanding of this system prior to attempting installation or

operation of the system. Please study this manual carefully.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 4 of 11
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 DRAWWORKS OPERATION ............................................................................................. 5

1.1 Introduction to the system......................................................................................... 5
2 DRAWWORKS CONTROL CONSOLE DEVICES ............................................................. 5
2.1 Drawworks High/Low Clutch Switch ......................................................................... 5
2.2 Drawworks High/Low Gear Switch ........................................................................... 5
2.3 Drawworks/Rotary Inertia Brake Switches ............................................................... 5
2.4 Drawworks Inertia Brake Engaged LED N/A ............................................................ 5
2.5 Crown-O-Matic Reset Pushbutton ............................................................................ 6
2.6 Low Jaw Clutch Switch N/A ...................................................................................... 6
2.7 Drawworks Cathead Selector Switch N/A ................................................................ 6
2.8 Drawworks Cathead Joystick N/A ............................................................................ 6
2.9 Catshaft Shifter Selector Switch N/A ........................................................................ 6
2.10 Emergency/Park (E/P) Brake Pushbutton ................................................................ 7
2.11 Swivel Selector Switch N/A ...................................................................................... 7
2.12 HPU Alarm LED ........................................................................................................ 7
2.13 Auxiliary Brake Shift Cylinder LED ........................................................................... 7
2.14 Horn Pushbutton ....................................................................................................... 7
2.15 DW Disc Brake Cooling Water Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI) ........................... 7
2.16 DW Lube Oil Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI) ....................................................... 7
2.17 DW Air Supply Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI) .................................................... 8
2.18 DW Inertia Brake Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI) (N/A for 110 Drawworks) ....... 8
2.19 Rotary Table Inertia Brake Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI).................................. 8
2.20 DW Cathead Makeup Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI) N/A................... 8
2.21 DW Cathead Breakout Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI) N/A ................. 8
2.22 DW High Clutch Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI)................................... 8
2.23 DW Low Clutch Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI) ................................... 8
2.24 DW Disc Brake Hydraulic Supply Analog Display Meter (0-2000PSI) ..................... 8
2.25 DW Emergency Caliper Analog Display Meter (0-2000PSI) .................................... 8
2.26 DW DS Supply Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-1500PSI) .................................. 8
2.27 DW ODS Supply Analog Display Meter (0-1500PSI) ............................................... 9
2.28 DW DS Service Caliper Analog Display Meter (0-1500PSI) .................................... 9
2.29 DW ODS Service Caliper Analog Display Meter (0-1500PSI) ................................. 9
2.30 Main Hydraulic Supply Analog Display Meter (0-3000PSI) ...................................... 9
2.31 Hydraulic Cathead Makeup/Breakout Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-
3000PSI) .............................................................................................................................. 9
3 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD OPERATION .............................................................................. 9
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 5 of 11
1 DRAWWORKS OPERATION
1.1 Introduction to the system

The Drawworks controls are much different from the “standard” air controls. This system
of controls was designed to integrate into an enclosed driller’s cabin, positioned well away
from the Drawworks to a position where the driller has superior visibility of all the drill floor
operations.
NOTE: It is essential that the equipment operators have the required knowledge,
education and training before using the system.
2 DRAWWORKS CONTROL CONSOLE DEVICES

This section describes the various drawworks control devices available on the driller’s
console.
2.1 Drawworks High/Low Clutch Switch

A 3 position momentary spring return to center joystick LOW – OFF – HIGH switch is
used to select the clutch. The low or high clutch valve is only energized when the
drawworks is in gear. Both clutch valves are de-energized when the switch is in the off
position.
2.2 Drawworks High/Low Gear Switch

A 2 position maintained HIGH – LOW switch is used to select the gear with console
LED’s to confirm what gear is engaged. The gear confirmation LED’s get their signal
from field proximity sensors located on the drawworks gear mechanism.
2.3 Drawworks/Rotary Inertia Brake Switches

Two 2 position maintained OFF – ON switches are used to select the drawworks (N/A
for 110 drawworks) or rotary inertia brakes. The mechanical inertia brake is used to stop
the rotating drawworks motors once they are declutched. The Drawworks Inertia Brake
is pneumatically tied to the Transmission Shifter. The drawworks cannot change gears
unless the Drawworks Inertia Brake is activated.
2.4 Drawworks Inertia Brake Engaged LED N/A

There is a mechanical interlock pin on the Drawworks Inertia Brake. When the
Drawworks inertia brake is selected, and 80 psi is released, the interlock pin comes out
and then the Inertia Brake is engaged. The pressure switch sends an on signal to the
Drawworks console engaged LED confirming that the interlock pin is out. With the
Drawworks Inertia Brake is engaged, the Gears can be shifted (provided that the
Drawworks motor speed is below 5RPM) and the clutches can be changed.
Note: The Drawworks Inertia Brake Engaged LED may not be present on the console
when a Drawworks Inertia Brake Analog Meter is installed.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 6 of 11
2.5 Crown-O-Matic Reset Pushbutton

A momentary push button on the console is used to allow the driller to bypass the upper
mechanical limit by toggling the crown-o-matic solenoid valve.
2.6 Low Jaw Clutch Switch N/A

A 2 position maintained ON – OFF switch is used to select the low jaw clutch for
emergency hoisting situations to set to a safe position. Low jaw clutch can only be used
when in low gear and the drawworks speed (provided by the inertia brake proximity
sensor) is below 5 RPM. (N/A for 110 Drawworks)
2.7 Drawworks Cathead Selector Switch N/A

A 3 position maintained MAKEUP – OFF – BREAKOUT switch is used to select the
drawworks cathead. When the Makeup position is selected, the makeup cathead
solenoid valve is energized. When the Breakout position is selected, the breakout
cathead solenoid valve is energized. When the OFF position is selected, neither
solenoid is energized.
2.8 Drawworks Cathead Joystick N/A

The Drawworks Cathead Joystick is a single axis joystick that spring returns to the full
forward position. It is being used to control an “I/P” transducer that applies 0-120 PSI air
proportionally to the selected makeup or breakout cathead clutch drum when the
joystick is pulled from the full forward position to the full back position. The driller must
first select either the make-up or break-out cathead with the cathead selector switch on
the driller’s console.
2.9 Catshaft Shifter Selector Switch N/A

A 2 position maintained ON – OFF switch is used to select the catshaft. When the “ON”
position is selected, the catshaft solenoid valve energizes causing the catshaft to
disengage and the console LED is ON. When the “OFF” position is selected, the
solenoid valve de-energizes and the catshaft engages and the console LED is OFF.
There is a proximity switch on the catshaft that is being used to sense when the catshaft
is disengaged. (N/A for 110 Drawworks)
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 7 of 11
2.10 Emergency/Park (E/P) Brake Pushbutton

A maintained twist release type pushbutton is used to operate the Emergency/Park
(E/P) brake. There are three N/C contacts, one for the park brake solenoid that’s inside
the drawworks interface control panel and the second for the emergency brake fire axe
solenoid valve that’s inside the disc brake HPU. These contacts are connected in series
with the KEMS main brake function when fitted. Pushing the E/P button down applies
the disc brake emergency and service calipers. The third contact is used for feedback
to the IAD SCU. The Emergency/Park Brake pushbutton can be applied at any time the
Driller wishes to “Park” or hold the load for an extended period. It is also to be utilized in
emergency situations, such as when a load appears to be out of control.
2.11 Swivel Selector Switch N/A

A 3 position maintained Counter Clockwise CCW – off – Clockwise CW switch is used
to select the rotation of the swivel. When the switch is set to CW the direction of rotation
solenoid valve is left at the default 0VDC = Clockwise, then the swivel on/off solenoid
valve is energized to ON. When the switch is set to CCW the rotation valve is energized
first to change the rotation from clockwise to counter clockwise. After this happens the
swivel on/off solenoid valve is energized to ON.
2.12 HPU Alarm LED

A Red LED for the HPU Annunciator Panel Alarm is used to monitor the Alarm Status of
the HPU Annunciator Panel. This is a common alarm notifying the driller of multiple
alarms that may be triggered by the HPU Annunciator Panel.
2.13 Auxiliary Brake Shift Cylinder LED

A Green LED for the Auxiliary Brake Shift Cyliner is used to monitor the position of the
manual linkage for the auxiliary brake. The light is on when the linkage is engaged.
2.14 Horn Pushbutton

A momentary pushbutton is included on the console to activate the air horn on the rig
floor.
2.15 DW Disc Brake Cooling Water Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI)

A 4” square safe area 4-20mA electrical meter is used. This meter receives a 4-20mA
signal from a pressure transmitter that’s inside the drawworks interface control panel.
2.16 DW Lube Oil Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI)

www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 8 of 11
2.17 DW Air Supply Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI)

2.18 DW Inertia Brake Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI) (N/A for 110 Drawworks)
2.19 Rotary Table Inertia Brake Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI)

2.20 DW Cathead Makeup Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI) N/A

2.21 DW Cathead Breakout Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI) N/A

2.22 DW High Clutch Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI)

2.23 DW Low Clutch Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-200PSI)

2.24 DW Disc Brake Hydraulic Supply Analog Display Meter (0-2000PSI)

signal from a pressure transmitter that’s inside the drawworks HPU enclosure.
2.25 DW Emergency Caliper Analog Display Meter (0-2000PSI)

2.26 DW DS Supply Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-1500PSI)

www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 9 of 11
2.27 DW ODS Supply Analog Display Meter (0-1500PSI)

2.28 DW DS Service Caliper Analog Display Meter (0-1500PSI)

signal from a pressure transmitter that’s inside the drawworks HPU enclosure. With a
series connection for Ideal Auto Driller feedback when fitted.
2.29 DW ODS Service Caliper Analog Display Meter (0-1500PSI)

signal from a pressure transmitter that’s inside the drawworks HPU enclosure. With a
series connection for Ideal Auto Driller feedback when fitted.
2.30 Main Hydraulic Supply Analog Display Meter (0-3000PSI)

signal from a pressure transmitter that’s inside the hydraulic cathead control panel.
2.31 Hydraulic Cathead Makeup/Breakout Pressure Analog Display Meter (0-3000PSI)

signal from a pressure transmitter that’s inside the hydraulic cathead control panel.
3 HYDRAULIC CATHEAD OPERATION

The cathead is controlled by a cathead joystick, makeup and breakout selector switch and
hand throttle (potentiometer) to setup the makeup pressure.
The hand throttle sends 0-400mA to the field coils for cathead torque from DAMP1 amplifier
module inside the console for 0-100% pot position. A 3 position maintained MAKEUP –
OFF – BREAKOUT switch is used to select the hydraulic cathead. When the makeup or
breakout position is selected, the respective cathead proportional valve will be energized. In
makeup or breakout position when the joystick is pulled down it sends 6-12VDC (25-50%)
pull signal to the proportional valve and when the joystick is pushed up it sends 12-18VDC
(50-75%) release signal to the proportional valve. When the OFF position is selected
neither valve are energized.
The pressure feedback sensor on the cathead cylinder sends a 4-20mA signal to an
analog electric meter on the cabin console to monitor the cathead makeup pressure.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 10 of 11
4 DISC BRAKE JOYSTICK
The Drawworks disc brake joystick upgrade provides scaled sensitivity of the
Drawworks disc brakes based on the hook load. The joystick is hardwired into a
dedicated PLC which scales the output signal to each disc brake proportional valve
based on a weight on hook signal.
4.1 Equipment
A Siemens ET200S CPU equipped with a 512kB memory card is being used as the
dedicated PLC for the disc brake joystick. The I/O rack includes Analog In, Analog Out,
Digital In and Digital Out modules. Equipment necessary for the interface to the disc
brakes and alarm monitoring is also included.
A new hydraulic control panel with disc brake and cathead controls is also provided. It
is equipped with pressure control valves, pressure transmitters and solenoid valves that
interface with the Drawworks controls.
4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Disc Brake Joystick
The disc brake joystick in the Driller’s Console controls the pressure output to the disc
brake calipers. The signal from the joystick is sent to the PLC, which then processes an
analog output signal based on the hook load being seen by the system.
At low hook loads, small movements in the low half of the joystick travel result in large
pressure changes on the disc brake calipers. These pressure changes then become
much smaller as the travel of the joystick continues, allowing for finer control at lower
hook loads. As the hook load increases, the slope of the pressure changes becomes
less and less drastic. At maximum high hook load (which is rarely, if ever, reached) the
joystick response is linear throughout travel, i.e. the pressure changes evenly
throughout the full sweep of the joystick. The joystick is still able to be locked in the full
forward and left position while operating the autodriller.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 11 of 11
4.2.2 Alarm Monitoring
The joystick and hook load signals are monitored by the PLC. If an error is detected,
the PLC will send an output to a relay to indicate the error. Relay DR2 is activated if a
hook load failure is detected and DR1 is activated in the event of a joystick failure. In
the event of a hook load failure, the joystick signal will revert back to a 1:1 signal (linear
response) from the joystick to the disc brakes. In the event of a joystick failure, the
service brakes will be fully applied until the error is resolved.
4.2.3 EDS
The EDS interface to the Drawworks controls remains virtually unchanged. The EDS
shares hook load and standpipe signals with the Drawworks and equipment monitoring
systems. There is an additional interface to the Emergency Brake valve located in the
HPU. This valve is wired in parallel with the Main Park Brake Solenoid Valve. Both of
these valves must be energized to allow the blocks to move.
www.nov.com

Operation
& Maintenance Manual
KDC 23, 28, 29 & 30
Driller's Console

7224
5.3 7 information which is the property of National Oilwell
Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively National Oilwell Varco
REMARKS
referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited 11000 Corporate Centre Dr.
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or
Houston Texas 77041
distribution of this information to others is not permitted Phone +1 281 854 0400
CLIENT PO NUMBER without the express written consent of NOV. This Fax +1 281 854 0607
document is to be returned to NOV upon request or upon
16599963-MAN 01
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 2 of 7
REVISION HISTORY

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 First Issue
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 3 of 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 4
2 WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 4
3 CONSOLE INTERIOR MAINTENANCE ........................................................................... 5
4 CONSOLE SUPPORT RODS ........................................................................................... 6
5 DRILLERS CONSOLE MAINTENANCE........................................................................... 7
6 PERIODIC/ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................. 7
7 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .................................................................... 7
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 4 of 7
1 INTRODUCTION
This document describes the necessary precautions and activities for operation of the
console. Since the console package does not have any machinery or equipment control
this document describes the normal use of the console.
2 WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM
To start the wiper system, turn the wiper switch.
The washer system can be used before or during wiper operation. Press wiper switch and
release when the necessary washer fluid is applied on the window.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 5 of 7
3 CONSOLE INTERIOR MAINTENANCE
When the interior of the console needs to be accessed the console tops must be raised
and lowered in a specific sequence. To open the console tops start with the left console
top and move in a clockwise motion around the console. To close the console tops simply
reverse the order in which they were raised starting with the right side moving counter-
clockwise around the console. This sequence is set in place to avoid damaging the
console instrumentation which has been strategically placed with tight margins. Please see
figure below.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 6 of 7
4 CONSOLE SUPPORT RODS
To access the internal electrical, hydraulic, or pneumatic systems, first unfasten the
console spring-latch. Lift the console top slowly, until the console support rod locks into
position, then insert locking safety pin. To lower the console top back down into the
operating position, remove the locking safety pin, lift the console top until the support rod
releases. Lower the console top slowly. Refasten the console spring-latch.
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 7 of 7
5 DRILLERS CONSOLE MAINTENANCE
This document describes the measures and activities necessary to maintain the driller’s
console in the optimum condition, minimize downtime and maximize system performance.
6 PERIODIC/ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Description NA A CKD By
Cleaning
The driller’s console is a high standard workstation with a high
quality surface finish. Cleaning of the driller’s console should be
done once a week.
Stainless steel surfaces should be cleaned with soap and water or
with stainless steel cleaner.
The glass on gauges and assorted instruments should be cleaned
with glass cleaner.
Switches, lamps, joysticks, potentiometers, valves, meters and
push buttons must be cleaned with a propriety surface cleaner.
The console interior may accumulate dirt and debris. The interior
should be cleaned periodically. Use high pressure air hose or
hand wash with damp cloth.
Instrumentation
Check that all instruments are in good condition.
7 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Event Performed with Component Procedure

No. intervals as indicated
below
D W M 3 6 Y
Check instrumentation for function
1 X Instrumentation
and/or damage.
Clean the console panels to maintain
2 X Cleanliness
the high quality of the panels.
3 X Corrosion Check all items for corrosion
4 X Console Interior Clean with air hose or hand wash.
D = Daily W = Weekly M = Monthly 3 = Every 3 months 6 = Every 6 months Y = Yearly
www.nov.com


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
Electrical Spares List ,DW Controls, KDC Rig 29 16595465-SPL 01
Mechanical Spares List - Square Wrap-Around Console 16600067-SPL 01

Driller's Console
www.nov.com

ELECTRICAL SPARES LIST
DRAWWORKS CONTROLS,
KDC RIG 29
NOTES:
1. 16595465-1 Recommended Commissioning Spares
2. 16595465-2 Recommended Operational Spares
3. 16595465-3 Recommended Insurance Spares
NEXT ASSY PRODUCT
DWWKS CONTROLS
This document contains proprietary and confidential information which is the property of
National Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively referred to
hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of
NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or distribution of this
information to others is not permitted without the express written consent of NOV. This
document is to be returned to NOV upon request or upon completion of the use for which
it was loaned. This document and the information contained and represented herein is the TITLE
copyrighted property of NOV. © National Oilwell Varco
CURRENT INITIAL
ELECTRICAL SPARES LIST,
DW CONTROLS, KDC RIG 29
DRAWN C. GARCIA SCALE: WT LBS: SIZE: SHT:
CHECKED B. FISHER NONE A 1 OF 4
DWG NO.: REV:
APPVD B. FISHER
16595465-SPL 01
DATE 02/12/2016
D811000567-GEN-001/03
-1 -2 -3
Commission Operational Insurance Where Description

Part Number Description Spare Spare Spare Used Where Used
METER ANALOG‐ DRAWWORKS
10547585‐001 - 1 1 DM16
MAIN HYDRAULIC SUPPLY CONSOLE
METER ANALOG‐HYD DRAWWORKS
10547586‐001 - 1 1 DM17
CATHEAD MU/BO CONSOLE
10547487‐001 - 1 1 DM10
DISC BRAKE HYD SUPPLY CONSOLE
METER‐ANALOG‐ DRAWWORKS
11405050‐001 - 1 1 DM12
DS SUPPLY PRESSURE CONSOLE
11405052‐001 - 1 1 DM14
DS SERVICE CALIPER CONSOLE
11405051‐001 - 1 1 DM13
ODS SUPPLY PRESSURE CONSOLE
11405053‐001 - 1 1 DM15
ODS SERVICE CALIPER CONSOLE
10547488‐001 - 1 1 DM11
EMERGENCY CALIPER CONSOLE
10547502‐001 - 1 1 DM9
DW LOW CLUTCH CONSOLE
10547503‐001 - 1 1 DM8
DW HIGH CLUTCH CONSOLE
10547492‐001 - 1 1 DM5
RT INERTIA BRAKE CONSOLE
10547490‐001 - 1 1 DM4
DW INERTIA BRAKE CONSOLE
10547584‐001 - 1 1 DM3
DW AIR SUPPLY CONSOLE
10547500‐001 - 1 1 DM2
DW LUBE OIL CONSOLE
10547583‐001 - 1 1 DM1
DW BRAKE COOLING WATER CONSOLE
DRAWWORKS HYDRAULIC
10043675‐001 JOYSTICK‐SINGLE AXIS 1 1 1
CONSOLE CATHEAD
3‐POSITION SWITCH, DRAWWORKS DWKS. CATHEAD,
10042711‐001 - 1 1
MAINTAINED CONSOLE DW GEAR
DRAWWORKS DW CATSHAFT,
2‐POSITION SWITCH, CONSOLE DW LOW JAW
10042713‐001 - 1 1
MAINTAINED CLUTCH, DW AND
RT INERTIA BRAKE
PUSHBUTTON OPERATOR, DRAWWORKS C.O.M. RESET,
10043280‐001 - 1 1
BLACK CONSOLE HORN
SCALE: WT LBS: SIZE: SHT:

NONE A 2 of 4
DWG NO.: REV:
16595465-SPL 01
D811000567-GEN-001/03
-1 -2 -3

DRAWWORKS EMERGENCY
10043698‐001 CONTACT; SINGLE 1 NC - 5 5
CONSOLE PARK BRAKE
EMERGENCY STOP TURN TO DRAWWORKS EMERGENCY
10043725‐001 - 1 1
RELEASE SWITCH CONSOLE PARK BRAKE
PILOT LIGHT‐MODULE; DRAWWORKS HPU COMMON
10049802‐001 - 1 1
24VDC; RED CONSOLE ALARM
DRAWWORKS DRAWWORKS
PILOT LIGHT‐LENS;JEWELED
10049783‐001 - 1 1 CONSOLE CATSHAFT, LOW
GREEN;LED
GEAR, HIGH GEAR
DRAWWORKS DRAWWORKS
PILOT LIGHT‐MODULE ONLY
10049804‐001 - 1 1 CONSOLE CATSHAFT, LOW
24V GREEN BRIT
GEAR, HIGH GEAR
DRAWWORKS ALL PUSHBUTTON
1 NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT
10041206‐001 - 5 5 CONSOLE AND SELECTOR
BLOCK
SWITCHES
JOYSTICK‐SW 22MM 2 DRAWWORKS
10065731‐001 1 1 1 DWKS CLUTCH
POSITION CONSOLE
PLC‐SIEMENS;226 CPU;24VDC DRAWWORKS
10044997‐001 - 1 1 A1A1
POWERED CONSOLE SCU
PLC‐SIEMENS;EM222 MODUL; DRAWWORKS
10066760‐001 - 1 1 A1A2
DO 8X24VDCPL CONSOLE SCU
CONV‐POT;VDC;MA DRAWWORKS DIS01, DIS02,
10050899‐001 - 1 1
IN/VDC;MA OUT CONSOLE SCU ISO01, ISO02
VALVE‐AMP DRAWWORKS
10065498‐001 - 1 1 DAMP1
MODULE;WANDFLUH CONSOLE SCU
SW‐ISOLATOR W/RELAY DRAWWORKS
10121799‐001 - 1 1 DN1, DN2
OUTPUT CONSOLE SCU
BARRIER‐IS DRAWWORKS
10066430‐001 - 1 1 DN3
FREQUENCY/CUR;W/LCD CONSOLE SCU
DRAWWORKS
10044170‐001 POWER‐SUPPLY,24V/10A - 1 1 DU1, DU2
CONSOLE SCU
POWER‐SUPPLY REDUNDANT DRAWWORKS
10044673‐001 - 1 1 DU3
MODULE CONSOLE SCU
CIRCUIT BREAKER‐ DRAWWORKS
10045083‐001 - 1 1 DB1, DB2
10AT,2P,480Y/277VAC,6KIC CONSOLE SCU
FUSE‐3A,250V,5X20MM, DRAWWORKS
10064194‐024 5 5 5
M.TIME DLY CONSOLE SCU
FUSE‐2A,250V,5X20MM, DRAWWORKS
10064194‐022 5 5 5
M.TIME DELAY CONSOLE SCU
DRAWWORKS
10043520‐001 RELAY INTERFACE 24V - 1 1 DR1, DR2
CONSOLE SCU
DRAWWORKS JSR1, JSR2,
10044937‐001 RELAYS, 24VDC 2 2 2
CONSOLE SCU JSR3
NONE A 3 of 4
DWG NO.: REV:
16595465-SPL 01
D811000567-GEN-001/03
-1 -2 -3

SOLID STATE RELAY DRAWWORKS
10524886‐001 2 2 2 SSR1, SSR2
ASSEMBLY CONSOLE SCU
DRAWWORKS SERVICE BRAKE
10065542‐001 JOYSTICK, FWD STAY LEFT 1 1 1
CONSOLE SCU JOYSTICK
DRAWWORKS
10641946‐001 ET200S CPU 1 1 1 B1A0
CONSOLE SCU
DRAWWORKS
10602939‐146 MICRO MEMORY CARD 1 1 1 B1A0
CONSOLE SCU
DRAWWORKS
10050945‐001 POWER SUPPLY 1 1 1 B1A1
CONSOLE SCU
DRAWWORKS
10050947‐001 DIGITAL INPUT, 8 CHANNEL 1 1 1 B1A2
CONSOLE SCU
DRAWWORKS
10602939‐161 DIGITAL OUTPUT, 8 CHANNEL 1 1 1 B1A3
CONSOLE SCU
DRAWWORKS
10602939‐154 ANALOG INPUT, 2 CHANNEL 1 1 1 B1A4, B1A5
CONSOLE SCU
ANALOG OUTPUT, 2 DRAWWORKS
10602939‐156 1 1 1 B1A6
CHANNEL CONSOLE SCU
SIGNAL 3‐WAY ISOLATION DRAWWORKS
10516586‐001 2 2 2 DIS03
AMPLIFIER CONSOLE SCU
DRAWWORKS JSDR1, JSDR2,
10043807‐001 RELAY 2 2 2
CONSOLE SCU JSDR3, JSDR4

NONE A 4 of 4
DWG NO.: REV:
16595465-SPL 01
D811000567-GEN-001/03
MECHANICAL
SPARES LIST
SQUARE WRAP-AROUND CONSOLE
Driller’s Console
NOTES:
1. 16600067-1
Recommended Commissioning Spares
2. 16600067-2
Recommended Operational Spares
3. 16600067-3
Recommended Insurance Spares
RIG/PLANT
RIG/PLANT REFERENCE PRODUCT
General Console Spare Parts General Driller’s Console
ADDITIONAL CODE
ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE
SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS PGS
TOTAL
This document contains proprietary and confidential information
3 which is the property of National Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or National Oilwell Varco
REMARKS subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is
REMARKS loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV. 11000 Corporate Centre Dr.
Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or distribution Houston, Texas 77041
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE of this information to others is not permitted without the express
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE
Phone +1 281-854-0400
written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to NOV
CLIENT PO NUMBER upon request or upon completion of the use for which it was loaned. Fax +1 281-854-0607
This document and the information contained and represented
CLIENT PO NUMBER herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER  National Oilwell Varco
DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER
Client Document Number 16600067-SPL 01
www.nov.com

Document number 16600067-SPL

Revision 01
Page 2 of 3
REVISION HISTORY

CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision Change Description

01 Initial Release
www.nov.com

Document number 16600067-SPL

Revision 01
Page 3 of 3
-1 -2 -3
Recom. Recom. Recom.
Part No. Description Spare Spare Spare Used Where Used
CONSOLE MECHANICAL
Keeps console tops
10066215-001 HDWR-MANUAL DOOR PROP;14-3/4” - 1 - -
opened safely
Locks manual door
10066805-001 PIN-DETENT LOCKING;5/16”X1” - 1 - -
prop in open position
Console tops, access
10065575-001 GSKT-SELF GRIPPING;EPDM 65 DEG - 5 METER - -
panels edge seal
10040328-001 LATCH-CMPRSN,2.20-1.81,1.02-0 - 2 - - Access panels latch
Rigsense & SCR
OZ BUSHING KIT-0.50”, FEMALE &
11470474-001 - 1 - - assembly boxes thru
MALE
cabling
OZ BUSHING KIT-2.00”, FEMALE & SCR assembly box
11470390-001 - 1 - -
MALE thru cabling
On the fronts of each
10060492-001 N/P – CAUTION, CONSOLE TOPS - 1 - -
section
Console top hold
10050237-001 FASTENER-CATCHES,S/S,MDL 425 - 2 - -
down latch
Console top hinge
10042360-001 PIN-CLEVIS;.25DIA;S/S;4”LG - 2 - -
pivot pin
End door securing
10052568-001 BOLT-1/4-20 X 0.50; HEX HD; S/S - 10 - -
bolts
End door securing
10052618-001 NUT-1.4-20; HEX LOCK; S/S ES - 10 - -
bolts
www.nov.com


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 02
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title

Section
1 3 Technical Documents & Drawings
1 3.2 System / Process Diagrams (Section Not Applicable)
1 3.4 Performance Data (Section Not Applicable)
www.nov.com


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 02
Page: 1

Section
Driller’s Console 7223 / 7224 – KDC 29 & 30 16574359-GAD 02
Model 201 - Foot Throttle General Arrangement Drawing D250001-1467-38-GAD-001 01
Assembly Drawing Bill of Materials 10683506-ASM 02
Assembly Drawing Drawworks Console SCU 16570929-ASM 03
General Arrangement Drawing KDC Rigs 16570931-ASM 05
www.nov.com








8 6 5 4 3 1
38
2. 0.50 DIAMETER
(4 PLACES)
.
1
2
7
0
5
.
0
1
11.75
1.00
8
3
.
2
5
.
7
1
.
1
12.75
0
0
0
11.75
10.80 9.80
.0
0
0
0.
0
0
.
1
1
7
5
.
1
0
5
0
.
7
2
1
0.50
9.80 0.50
07
8.
10.80
1.00
C 0.00 C
RECOMMENDED CUT-OUT
FOR FLUSH MOUNTING
7
0
SCALE: 1/4
0.00
12.75
.0
.0
8
0
3 FOR DRY AIR SUPPLY PRESSURE NOT TO EXCEED 150 P.S.I.
B 2.38
2. THE EQUIPMENT IS CONSTRUCTED OF 304 STAINLESS STEEL. THE FOOT B
2.38
THROTTLE CIRCUIT IS INTRINSICALLY SAFE BY VIRTUE OF A LIMITED POWER

SOURCE, 8.2 VOLTS. IT IS PRESSURIZED TO REDUCE CONTAMINATION.
0.00
12
0
.
.
00
75
0. 0.
1.0
1.75
12.75
1
11
.
00
.
75
1. APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 55 LBS.
12
0
.
.
00
75
0.
1.0
1.75
12.75
1
11
.
00
.
75
8.07
8.07
DRY AIR SUPPLY 0.50 TERMINAL TUBE

3 BULKHEAD FITTING (0.62 OPENING)
1/4 FNPT
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO NATIONAL-
OILWELL, L.P.. IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-
OILWELL, L.P.. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR USE OF THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS
INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL,
L.P.. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. UPON REQUEST AND IN ANY EVENT
UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION
CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED HEREIN IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.
Project Logo:
RIG SOLUTIONS
1530 WEST SAM HOUSTON PKWY NORTH A
HOUSTON, TEXAS 77043
TITLE:
MODEL 201 - FOOT THROTTLE

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING
Material:
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED:

Reference DWG:
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
SCALE: PROJECTION: SIZE: SHEET:
D
TOLERANCE First Used On:
1/4 1 of 1
INCHES .X±.1 .XX±.02 .XXX±.005 FRAC±1/8 ANG±1/2%
01 06/02/09 ISSUED FOR MECHANICAL FABRICATION RDS MAM KAC
Certified Correct for Project Noted: DRAWING NUMBER: REVISION:
MILLIMETERS .X±2.5 .XX±.51 .XXX±.127 ANG±1/2%
Rev. Date: Reason for issue: MadeChk'dAppr. By: Date: D250001-1467-38-GAD-001 01
06-02-09/1:08pm 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 STD3422D REV0
















TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
1 3.2 System / Process Diagrams

(Section Not Applicable)
www.nov.com


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 02
Page: 1

Section
System Interconnection Diagram - Drawworks Disk Brake 16588104-DIA 02

Control
Termination Drawing – Drillfloor Console to Drawworks 16588102-DIA 02
Control Panel
Internal Wiring Diagram – Drawworks Console Power 16588100-SCH 01
Distribution – 120VAC
Technical Document - Documentation of Standard 16595468-DSO 01

Equipment - Drawworks Controls
Technical Document - Hazardous Area Certificates – 16595471-DOS 01
Drawworks Controls
www.nov.com




























Technical Document
Documentation of Standard Equipment -
Drawworks Controls

This document contains proprietary and confidential National Oilwell Varco
information which belongs to National Oilwell Varco, it is Rig Solutions - Western Hemisphere
REMARKS loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property
of National Oilwell Varco. Reproduction, in whole or in 11000 Corporate Centre Drive
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE part, or use of this design or distribution of this information Suite # 200
to others is not permitted without the express written Houston, Texas 77041 USA
consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is to be
CLIENT PO NUMBER returned to National Oilwell Varco upon request and in Phone +1 281 854 0400
any event upon completion of the use for which it was Fax +1 281 854 0607
loaned.
© Copyright National Oilwell Varco
16595468-DOS 01

Document number 16595468-DOS

Revision 01
Page 2 of 7
REVISION HISTORY
01 12.02.2016 Issued for Information CIG BKF BKF

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 Initial Release
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 3 of 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 JOYSTICK / CONVERTER / RELAY / BUZZER / POTENTIOMETER ............................. 4

2 SIEMENS S7 200 MODULES ........................................................................................... 5
3 POWER SUPPLY & CIRCUIT BREAKER ........................................................................ 6
4 METERS ........................................................................................................................... 7
www.nov.com



Revision 01
Page 4 of 7
1 JOYSTICK / CONVERTER / RELAY / BUZZER / POTENTIOMETER
NOV Part No. Description Manufacturer

10065731-001 JOYSTICK-SW 22MM 2 POSITION clutch Telemecanique
10043675-001 JOYSTICK-SINGLE AXIS hyd cathead OEM Controls, Inc.
CONV-POT,VDC,MA IN/VDC,MA OUT cat js,
10050899-001 ABB
cat press pot
10065498-001 VALVE-AMP MODULE,WANDFLUH WANDFLU
cat makeup pot
10121799-001 SW-ISOLATOR W/RELAY OUTPUT Pepperl & Fuchs
10066430-001 BARRIER-IS FREQUENCY/CUR,W/LCD Pepperl & Fuchs
10043520-001 RLY- 24DC/21-21,2 PC,RSC PHOENIX CONTACT INC.
10044937-001 RELAYS, 24VDC PHOENIX CONTACT INC.
10043807-001 RELAY PHOENIX CONTACT INC.
10516586-001 SIGNAL 3-WAY ISOLATION AMPLIFIER PHOENIX CONTACT INC.
10524886-001 SOLID STATE RELAY ASSEMBLY PHOENIX CONTACT INC.
10067722-001 BUZZER, PANEL MOUNT MALLORY
10049953-001 1K POTENTIOMETER cathead Clarostat
www.nov.com

NOV PART NO.:

10065731-001


Product data sheet XD4PA22

Characteristics joystick controller Ø22 2-direction spring return
1NO per direction
Main
Range of product Harmony XB4
Product or component Complete joystick controller
type
Device short name XD4
Bezel material Chromium plated metal
Fixing collar material Zamak
Mounting diameter 22 mm
Sale per indivisible 1
quantity
Type of operator Spring return to 0 position
Operator profile 54 mm long operating shaft
Operator position 3 positions
It is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof.
information
Operator direction 2 directions
information
Contacts type and 1 NO
composition
Contacts operation Slow-break
Connections - terminals Screw clamp terminals : <= 2 x 1.5 mm² with cable
end conforming to EN 60947-1
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics of the performance of the products contained herein.
This documentation is not intended as a substitute for and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications.
Screw clamp terminals : >= 1 x 0.22 mm² without
Neither Schneider Electric Industries SAS nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information contained herein.
cable end conforming to EN 60947-1
Complementary
Product weight 0.116 kg
Resistance to high pressure washer 7000000 Pa at 55 °C ,distance: 0.1 m
Shape of signaling unit head Round
Notch per direction 1
Contacts usage Standard
Positive opening Without positive opening
Mechanical durability 1000000 cycles
Tightening torque 0.8...1.2 N.m conforming to EN 60947-1
Shape of screw head Cross head compatible with pozidriv No 1 screwdriver
Cross head compatible with Philips no 1 screwdriver
Slotted head compatible with flat Ø 4 mm screwdriver
Slotted head compatible with flat Ø 5.5 mm screwdriver
Contacts material Silver alloy (Ag/Ni)
Short circuit protection 10 A cartridge fuse type gG conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
[Ith] conventional free air thermal current 10 A conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
[Ui] rated insulation voltage 600 V (degree of pollution: 3) conforming to EN 60947-1
[Uimp] rated impulse withstand voltage 6 kV conforming to EN 60947-1
[Ie] rated operational current 0.1 A at 250 V , DC-13 , R300 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
0.22 A at 125 V , DC-13 , R300 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
10/1/2011
TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 1 REV: 02
Latest
Electrical durability 1000000 cycles , AC-15 , 4 A at 24 V , operating rate: 3600 cyc/h , load factor:
0.5 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 appendix C
1000000 cycles , AC-15 , 3 A at 120 V , operating rate: 3600 cyc/h , load factor:
1000000 cycles , AC-15 , 2 A at 230 V , operating rate: 3600 cyc/h , load factor:
1000000 cycles , DC-13 , 0.5 A at 24 V , operating rate: 3600 cyc/h , load factor:
1000000 cycles , DC-13 , 0.2 A at 110 V , operating rate: 3600 cyc/h , load factor:
Electrical reliability IEC 60947-5-4 Λ < 10exp(-6) at 5 V , 1 mA in clean environment conforming to EN/IEC
60947-5-4
Λ < 10exp(-8) at 17 V , 5 mA in clean environment conforming to EN/IEC
60947-5-4
Environment
Protective treatment TH
Ambient air temperature for storage -40...70 °C
Ambient air temperature for operation -25...70 °C
Class of protection against electric shock Class I conforming to IEC 60536
IP degree of protection IP66 conforming to IEC 60529
NEMA degree of protection NEMA 13
NEMA 4X
IK degree of protection IK03 conforming to IEC 50102
Standards CSA C22-2 No 14
EN/IEC 60947-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-1
EN/IEC 60947-5-4
EN/IEC 60947-5-5
JIS C 4520
UL 508
Product certifications BV
CSA
DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
GL
LROS (Lloyds register of shipping)
RINA
UL listed
Vibration resistance 5 gn (f = 2...500 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance 30 gn for 18 ms half sine wave acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
50 gn for 11 ms half sine wave acceleration conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
RoHS EUR conformity date 0727
RoHS EUR status Compliant
2 16625195-FDD
TC Number: Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Dimensions Drawings
Dimensions of Potentiometer and Sticks
Heads and Mounting Base for Potentiometer

ZB4 BD9•2
e: panel thickness: 1 to 6 mm / 0.04 to 0.24 in.

(1) Potentiometer not included
Wobblestick Head
ZB4 BB•
Joystick Controllers
XD4 PA•2

XD4 PA•4
TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 3 REV: 02

Latest

Mounting and Clearance
Panel Cut-out for Pushbuttons, Switches and Pilot Lights (Finished Holes, Ready for Installation)
Connection by Screw Clamp Terminals or Plug-in Connectors or on Connection by Faston Connectors

Printed Circuit Board
(1) Diameter on finished panel or support

(2) 40 mm min. / 1.57 in. min.
(3) 30 mm min. / 1.18 in. min.
(4) Ø 22.5 mm / 0.89 in. recommended (Ø 22.3 mm 0
+0.4
/ 0.88 in. 0
+0.016
)
(5) 45 mm min. / 1.78 in. min.
(6) 32 mm min. / 1.26 in. min.
4 16625195-FDD
TC Number: Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02
NOV PART NO.:

10043675-001


NOV PART NO.:

10050899-001



NOV PART NO.:

10065498-001















































NOV PART NO.:

10121799-001




NOV PART NO.:

10066430-001


NOV PART NO.:

10043520-001






NOV PART NO.:

10044937-001

INSPIRING INNOVATIONS
PLC-Relay, 24 V dc, DPDT

For use in Hazardous Locations
PLC-RSC-24DC/21-21/ATEX
P/N 29 80 46 1
Data Sheet 2051C
March 2006
Description
The PLC-RSC-24DC/21-21/ATEX relay, shown in Fig-
ure 1, is a space saving, pluggable, compact interface
relay for use in Class I, Division 2 and ATEX Zone 2
applications. The completely assembled relay con-
sists of a base terminal block and pluggable, compact
DPDT relay. ZONE 2
The device is both certified for ATEX Zone 2 as well
as UL/cUL Listed as process control equipment for use
in Class I, Zone 2 and Class I, Division 2 Hazardous
Locations.
This PLC-Relay can help eliminate the need for expen-

sive explosion proof/purged enclosures and further ex-
2051A001
pands Phoenix Contact’s role in the hazardous location
control industry.
Figure 1. 24 V dc, DPDT, PLC Relay
Features
• Listed for Class I, Division 2
• Certified for ATEX Zone 2
• 24 V dc coil A2 A1 12 11 14 22 21 24
• 6 amp continuous contact current rating 21
• DIN-rail mountable A2 Bridge
Socket
Bridge
• Only 14 mm (.55 in.) wide Socket 24
Bridge
• Polarity protected A1 Socket
22
• Inductive kickback protection
11
• LED status indicators Bridge
1676A002
Socket
• Time saving plug-in jumper system
14
• Flexible, modular design Bridge
Socket
12
Figure 2. PLC-RSC-24DC/21-21/ATEX Wiring Diagram
PHOENIX CONTACT • P.O. Box 4100 • Harrisburg, PA 17111-0100 • Phone: 1-800-888-7388 717-944-1300
Fax: 717-944-1625 • Web site: www.phoenixcon.com
1 Data Sheet 2051C

PLC-RSC-24DC/21-21/ATEX Technical Information

Input Data Output Data
Table 1. Input Specifications Table 2 Output Specifications
General Data Dimensions

80 mm
Table 3. General Specifications 14 mm (3.15 in.)
(0.55 in.)
11/21 A2-
1CO: 250VAC/6A
94 mm
(3.7 in.)
24V
14/24 A1+
14 11 12 A1 A2
UIN: 24V ...

Artt.-Nr.: 29 67 015
PLC-BSC-24DC/21-21
12/22
PA 66-FR
1676C004
Figure 3. PLC-RSC-24DC/21-21/ATEX Dimensions

Ordering Information
Description Type Part Number
Class I, Div. 2/ATEX PLC relay, DPDT, 24 V dc coil PLC-RSC-24DC/21-21/ATEX 29 80 46 1
Power distribution block PLC-ESK GY 29 66 50 8
Partition plate PLC-ATP BK 29 66 84 1
2 position snap-in jumper (Red) FBST 6-PLC RD 29 66 23 6
2 position snap-in jumper (Blue) FBST 6-PLC BU 29 66 81 2
2 position snap-in jumper (Grey) FBST 6-PLC GY 29 66 82 5
19" snap-in jumper (Red) FBST-500-PLC RD 29 66 78 6
19" snap-in jumper (Blue) FBST-500-PLC BU 29 66 69 2
19" snap-in jumper (Grey) FBST-500-PLC GY 29 66 83 8
19" snap-in jumper (Brown FBST-500-PLC BN 29 67 97 6
Marker strip, 10-section, un-printed ZB:10 UNPRINTED 10 53 00 1
The information given herein is based on data believed to be reliable, Headquarters, Canada Headquarters,U.S.
but Phoenix Contact makes no warranties expressed or implied as to
PHOENIX CONTACT Ltd. PHOENIX CONTACT
its accuracy and assumes no liability arising out of its use by others.
This publication is not to be taken as a license to operate under, or 235 Watline Avenue P.O. Box 4100
recommendation to infringe, any patent. Mississauga, Ontario L4Z 1P3 Harrisburg, PA 17111-0100
Phone: 905-890-2820 Phone: 800-888-7388
Fax: 905-890-0180 717-944-1300
Technical Service Fax: 717-944-1625
Phone: 800-890-2828 Email: info@phoenixcon.com
Web site: www.phoenixcon.com
Technical Service
Phone: 800-322-3225
PHOENIX CONTACT • P.O. Box 4100 • Harrisburg, PA 17111-0100 • Phone: 1-800-888-7388 717-944-1300
Fax: 717-944-1625 • Web site: www.phoenixcon.com
Data Sheet 2051C 2

NOV PART NO.:

10043807-001

Extract from the online

catalog

PLC-RSC- 24DC/21
Order No.: 2966171
The illustration shows the version PLC-RSC-24DC/21
http://eshop.phoenixcontact.de/phoenix/treeViewClick.do?UID=2966171

PLC relay, consisting of base terminal block PLC-BSC.../21 with screw
connection and pluggable miniature relay with power contact, for
assembly on DIN rail NS 35/7.5, 1 PDT, input voltage 24 V DC
Product notes
WEEE/RoHS-compliant since:
Commercial data 12/01/2005
EAN 4017918130732
Pack 10 pcs.
Customs tariff 85364190
Weight/Piece 0.03457 KG
Catalog page information Page 76 (IF-2009) http://
www.download.phoenixcontact.com
Please note that the data given
here has been taken from the
online catalog. For comprehensive
information and data, please refer
to the user documentation. The
General Terms and Conditions of
Use apply to Internet downloads.
Technical data
Coil side
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V DC
Nominal input current at UIN 9 mA
Typical response time 5 ms
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA Page 1 / 6

http://www.phoenixcon.com Oct 22, 2009

PLC-RSC- 24DC/21 Order No.: 2966171

Typical release time 8 ms

Operating voltage display Yes
Name of protection Polarity protection
Protective circuit/component Polarity protection diode
Contact side
Contact type Single contact, 1-PDT
Contact material AgSnO
Maximum switching voltage 250 V AC/DC (The separating plate PLC-ATP should be installed
for voltages larger than 250 V (L1, L2, L3) between identical
terminal blocks in adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then
carried out with FBST 8-PLC... or ...FBST 500...)
Minimum switching voltage 12 V AC/DC
Maximum inrush current (on request)
Min. switching current 10 mA
Limiting continuous current 6A
Interrupting rating (ohmic load) max. 140 W (for 24 V DC)
20 W (for 48 V DC)
18 W (for 60 V DC)
23 W (for 110 V DC)
40 W (for 220 V DC)
1500 VA (for 250 V AC)
General data
Width 6.2 mm
Height 94 mm
Depth 80 mm
Test voltage relay winding/relay contact 4 kV AC (50 Hz, 1 min)
Ambient temperature (operation) -25 °C ... 60 °C
Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C
Operating mode 100% operating factor
Service life mechanical 7
2 x 10 cycles
Inflammability class in acc. with UL 94 (housing) V0
Standard designation Standards/regulations



Standards/regulations IEC 60664

IEC 60664 A
DIN VDE 0110
DIN EN 50178/DIN VDE 0160 (in relevant parts)
DIN EN 50178/VDE 0160
IEC 60255/DIN VDE 0435 (in relevant parts)
Pollution degree 3
Surge voltage category III
Mounting position Any
Assembly instructions In rows with zero spacing
Connection data
Type of connection Screw connection
Conductor cross section solid min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded min. 0.14 mm²
Conductor cross section stranded max. 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil min. 26
Conductor cross section AWG/kcmil max 14
Stripping length 8 mm
Screw thread M3
Certificates / Approvals
Certification CUL, CUL Listed, GL, GOST, UL, UL Listed
Accessories
Item Designation Description
Assembly
0801762 NS 35/ 7,5 CU UNPERF DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35
2000MM mm, length: 2 m
0801733 NS 35/ 7,5 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, galvanized and passivated with a thick
layer, perforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m



0801681 NS 35/ 7,5 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 7.5 mm, width 35
mm, length: 2 m
0801377 NS 35/ 7,5 V2A UNPERF DIN rail, Width: 35 mm, Height: 7.5 mm, Length: 2000 mm,
2000MM Color: silver
1201756 NS 35/15 AL UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, deep-drawn, high profile, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick,
material: Aluminum, height 15 mm, width 35 mm, length 2 m
1201895 NS 35/15 CU UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Copper, unperforated, 1.5 mm thick, height 15
mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
1201730 NS 35/15 PERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, perforated, height 15 mm, width 35 mm,
length: 2 m
1201714 NS 35/15 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, height 15 mm, width 35
mm, length: 2 m
1201798 NS 35/15-2,3 UNPERF 2000MM DIN rail, material: Steel, unperforated, 2.3 mm thick, height 15
mm, width 35 mm, length: 2 m
2966841 PLC-ATP BK Separating plate, 2 mm thick, required at the start and end of a
PLC terminal strip. Furthermore, it is used for: visual separation
of groups, safe isolation of different voltages of neighboring PLC
relays in acc. with DIN VDE 0106-101, isolation
Bridges
2966812 FBST 6-PLC BU Single plug-in bridges, Length: 6 mm, Number of positions: 2,
Color: blue
2966825 FBST 6-PLC GY Single plug-in bridges, Length: 6 mm, Number of positions: 2,
Color: gray
2966236 FBST 6-PLC RD Single plug-in bridges, Length: 6 mm, Number of positions: 2,
Color: red
2967688 FBST 8-PLC GY Single plug-in bridges, Length: 8 mm, Number of positions: 2,
Color: gray
2966692 FBST 500-PLC BU Continuous plug-in bridge, Length: 500 mm, Color: blue
2966838 FBST 500-PLC GY Continuous plug-in bridge, Length: 500 mm, Color: gray
2966786 FBST 500-PLC RD Continuous plug-in bridge, Length: 500 mm, Color: red
General
2966508 PLC-ESK GY Power terminal block, for the input of up to four potentials, for
mounting on NS 35/7.5
2296061 PLC-V8/D15B/OUT V8-OUTPUT adapter for eight 6.2 mm PLC interfaces (1 PDT,
etc./see "Additional Products"). 15-pin D-SUB female connector,
control logic: Positive switching
2296058 PLC-V8/D15S/OUT V8-OUTPUT adapter for eight 6.2 mm PLC interfaces (1 PDT,
etc./see "Additional Products"). 15-pin D-SUB male connector,
control logic: Positive switching
2295554 PLC-V8/FLK14/OUT V8-OUTPUT adapter for eight 6.2 mm PLC interfaces (1 PDT,
etc./see "Supplementary Products"). 14-pos. flat-ribbon cable
connection for the PLC system cabling, control logic: Plus
switching



2304102 PLC-V8/FLK14/OUT/M V8-OUTPUT adapter for eight 6.2 mm PLC interfaces (1 PDT,
etc./see "Supplementary Products"). 14-pos. flat-ribbon cable
connection for the PLC system cabling, control logic: Minus
switching
Marking
1051016 ZB 6,LGS:FORTL.ZAHLEN Zack strip, 10-section, printed horizontally: with the numbers,
1-10, 11-20 etc. up to 991-1000, color: white
1051003 ZB 6:UNBEDRUCKT Zack strip, unprinted, strips with 10 labels for individual labeling
with M-PEN or CMS system, for terminal block width: 6.2 mm,
color: white
Tools
1204517 SZF 1-0,6X3,5 Screwdriver, blade: 0.6 x 3.5 x 100 mm, length 180 mm
Drawings
Diagram
Circuit diagram



Address
PHOENIX CONTACT Inc., USA

586 Fulling Mill Road
Middletown, PA 17057,USA
Phone (800) 888-7388
Fax (717) 944-1625
http://www.phoenixcon.com
© 2009 Phoenix Contact

Technical modifications reserved;


NOV PART NO.:

10516586-001









NOV PART NO.:

10524886-001

Printed By:PHOENIX
parambahkCONTACT Page
Printed On: 2016-07-31 1 of 2GMT-0500
01:11:56
2982100 OPT-24DC/ 24DC/ 5
Information on this item

Back to navigation
Item homepage PDF version Show comparison
Additional Products Drawings
Technical data Downloads
Certificates / Approvals
Note
Technical data
Input data
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V DC
Input voltage range in reference to UN 0.8 ... 1.2
Switching threshold "0" signal, voltage ≤ 10 V

Switching threshold "1" signal voltage ≥ 16 V
Typical input current at UN 7 mA
Typical response time 20 µs

Typical turn-off time 400 µs
Transmission frequency 300 Hz
Output data
Output nominal voltage 24 V DC

Output nominal voltage range 3 V DC ... 33 V DC
Limiting continuous current 5 A (see derating curve)
Maximum inrush current 15 A (10 ms)
Surge voltage protection > 33 V DC
Voltage drop at max. limiting continuous current ≤ 200 mV
Output circuit 2-conductor floating
Surge protection

http://eshop.phoenixcontact.com/phoenix/assets.do?action=techdata&artnr=2982100 11/4/2009
Printed By:PHOENIX
parambahkCONTACT Page
Printed On: 2016-07-31 2 of 2GMT-0500
01:11:56
General data
Width 12.7 mm
Height 15.7 mm
Depth 29 mm
Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -25 °C ... 7 0 °C
Degree of protection IP67
Inflammability class acc. to UL 94 V0
Name Air and creepage distances between the power circuits
Standards/regulations DIN EN 50178
Rated surge voltage / insulation Basic insulation
Rated insulation voltage 100 V DC
Pollution degree 2
Surge voltage category III

http://eshop.phoenixcontact.com/phoenix/assets.do?action=techdata&artnr=2982100 11/4/2009
https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2967772
Relay socket - PLC-BSC- 24DC/21HC - 2967772

Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's
documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid
(http://phoenixcontact.com/download)
14 mm PLC basic terminal block for high continuous currents with screw connection, without relay or solid-state
relay, for mounting on DIN rail NS 35/7,5, 1 PDT, input voltage 24 V DC
Figure shows PLC-

BSC-120UC/21-21/SO46 version
Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 pc
Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 66.0 g
Custom tariff number 85364190
Country of origin Germany
Technical data
Note
EMC: class A product, see manufacturer's declaration in the download
Utilization restriction
area
Dimensions
Width 14 mm
Height 80 mm
Depth 94 mm
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C
Input data
Nominal input voltage UN 24 V AC/DC
Status display LED
04/27/2016 Page 1 / 4


Technical data
Input data
Protective circuit Damping diode, polarity protection diode
Damping diode
Output data
Miniature relay, REL-MR-24DC/1IC/ACT; miniature optocoupler,
Compatible components
OPT-24DC/24DC/5, OPT-24DC/230AC/2
Connection data, input side

Connection name Input side
Connection method Screw connection
Screw thread M3
Conductor cross section solid 0.14 mm² ... 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible 0.14 mm² ... 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG 26 ... 14
Connection data, output side

Connection name Output side
Connection method Screw connection
Screw thread M3
Conductor cross section solid 0.14 mm² ... 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section flexible 0.14 mm² ... 2.5 mm²
Conductor cross section AWG 26 ... 14
General
Protective circuit Damping diode, polarity protection diode
Color green
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
Mounting position any
Standards and Regulations

Connection in acc. with standard CUL
Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0
04/27/2016 Page 2 / 4


Classifications
eCl@ss
eCl@ss 4.0 27371102

eCl@ss 4.1 27371102
eCl@ss 5.0 27371603
eCl@ss 5.1 27371603
eCl@ss 6.0 27371603
eCl@ss 7.0 27371603
eCl@ss 8.0 27371603
eCl@ss 9.0 27371603
ETIM
ETIM 2.0 EC001456

ETIM 3.0 EC001456
ETIM 4.0 EC001456
ETIM 5.0 EC001456
UNSPSC
UNSPSC 6.01 30211917

UNSPSC 7.0901 39121516
UNSPSC 11 39121516
UNSPSC 12.01 39121516
UNSPSC 13.2 39121516
Approvals
Approvals
Approvals
UL Recognized / cUL Recognized / GL / EAC / EAC / cULus Recognized
Ex Approvals
Approvals submitted
Approval details
04/27/2016 Page 3 / 4


Approvals
UL Recognized
cUL Recognized
GL
EAC
EAC
cULus Recognized
Phoenix Contact 2016 © - all rights reserved

http://www.phoenixcontact.com
04/27/2016 Page 4 / 4

NOV PART NO.:

10067722-001

Part #
Mallory Sonalert Products Inc. SC110NJR
Revision
Sales Outline Drawing B
Specifications:
Sound level Category Loud Sound Level
Mode of Operation Slow Pulse
Mounting Panel (see note B)
Voltage Rating 30 to 120 Vac/dc
Frequency 2900 Hz ±500 Hz
Loudness (Min. Voltage) 80 dB(A) min. @ 2 FT and 30 Vac/dc
Loudness (Max Voltage) 95 dB(A) min. @ 2FT and 120 Vac/dc
Current Draw 6 mA Max @ 30 Vac/dc
Current Draw 24 mA Max @ 120 Vac/dc
Min Pulse Rate (PPS) 0.5 @ 30 Vac/dc
Max Pulse Rate (PPS) 2.0 @ 120 Vac/dc
Duty Cycle (%) 50 (Approx)
Storage Temperature -40°C to +85°C
Operating Temperature -30°C to +65°C
Weight (Typical) 2.1 oz (59 g)
Housing 6/6 Nylon, Color Black
Options For other options contact factory
Dimensions: Inches (mm) UL Recognized RoHS Compliant
4411 South High School Road, Indianapolis, Indiana 46241 U.S.A • Phone: (317)612-1000 Fax: (317)612-1010 • www.mallory-sonalert.com
NOV PART NO.:

10049953-001

Potentiometers
Resistive Resistance
Resistive Power Range Taper Body
Element (watts) (ohms) Tolerance (Law) Dimension Shaft Bushing Terminals
POTENTIOMETERS ■ INDUSTRIAL
Conductive plastic 0.5 150-5 meg ±10%, ±20% Linear 15/16" dia. Plain, Slotted Plain PC
Non-Linear Flatted Locking Solder lug
470 Knurled 3/8" dia. Wire-wrap
1/4" dia. Metal
Metal
Conductive plastic 2.0 50-5 meg ±10%, ±20% Linear 1" dia. Plain, Slotted Plain Solder lug
Non-Linear Flatted Locking
53 Knurled 3/8" dia.
1/4 " dia. Metal
Metal
Note: 53 Series available with rotary switches.
Carbon composition 2.25 50-5 meg ±10, ±20% Linear 1.156" dia. Plain, Slotted Plain Solder lug
J (RV4) Non-Linear Flatted Locking
(2RV7) 1/4" dia. Watertight
Metal 3/8 " dia.
Metal
Note: J Series available as Bridged-T, Bridged-H, L and Straight-T attenuators.
EJ
Extra long life version of J, with single or dual configurations.
Conductive plastic 2.0 50-5 meg ±10%, ±20% Linear 1" dia. Plain, Slotted Plain Solder lug
380 Non-Linear Flatted Locking
Knurled 3/8" dia.
1/4" dia. Metal
Metal
Note: 380 Series available with rotary switches. 100,000 cycle life.
Conductive plastic 1.0 100-5 meg ±10, ±20% Linear 5/8" dia. Plain, Slotted Plain Solder lug
Non-Linear Flatted Locking Wire wrap
1/8" dia. Metal
Metal
Note: 381 Series available with rotary momentary and alternate action switches.
Conductive plastic 2.0 50-5 meg ±10, ±20% Linear 1" dia. Plain, Slotted Plain Solder lug
Non-Linear Flatted Locking
1/4" dia. Metal
Metal
Note: 485 Series has rotational life of +1,000,000 cycles.
Clarostat provides Mil-spec products including, but not limited to the following
Military units displayed in this catalog:
Industrial Board Washable Wirewound Trimmer Resistor
Series 53(RV4) Series 392 (RV6 & RV8) Series 43 (RA20) Series R(RJ11) Series RW
Series J(RV4) Series 382(RV6) Series 58(RA30)
Series 382(RV6), 392(RV6) G (RV6)
G (RV6) and W(RV6) W(RV6)
Consult factory for specific tapers

Tolerances not included
5
Call 800-874-1874 or Fax 800-223-5138


Revision 01
Page 5 of 7
2 SIEMENS MODULES

10044997-001 226 CPU DC/DC/RELAY,24 KB VERSION Siemens
(24DI & 16DO)
10066760-001 PLC-SIE,EM222 MODUL,DO 8X24VDC Siemens
10641946-001 ET200S CPU Siemens
10050945-001 POWER SUPPLY Siemens
10050947-001 DIGITAL INPUT, 8 CHANNEL Siemens
10602939-161 DIGITAL OUTPUT, 8 CHANNEL Siemens
10602939-154 ANALOG INPUT, 2 CHANNEL Siemens
10602939-156 ANALOG OUTPUT, 2 CHANNEL Siemens
www.nov.com

NOV PART NO.:

10044997-001







NOV PART NO.:

10066760-001




NOV PART NO.:

10641946-001

IM151-7 CPU Interface Module ___________________

Preface
___________________
Description 1
Operating and display
___________________
elements 2
SIMATIC
___________________
Communication 3
ET 200S Distributed I/O
IM151-7 CPU Interface Module ___________________
Memory concept 4
___________________
Mounting and connecting 5
Operating Instructions
___________________
Addressing 6
___________________
Commissioning 7
___________________
Service and maintenance 8
___________________
Functions 9
Debugging functions,
___________
10
diagnostics and
troubleshooting
___________________
Technical data 11
___________________
Appendix A
10/2011
A5E00058783-05

Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the relevant information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E02049034-05 Copyright © Siemens AG 2011.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 09/2011 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY

Preface
Purpose of the operating instructions

These operating instructions are intended to supplement the ET 200S Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) Operating Instructions. It
contains a description of all the functions performed by the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
The operating instructions do not include functions that relate generally to ET 200S. These
can be found in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System Operating Instructions.
The information contained in these operating instructions and the ET 200S Distributed I/O
System Operating Instructions allows you to commission ET 200S with the IM 151-7 CPU
interface module and to run it as an I slave on the PROFIBUS DP or in an MPI network.
You will also find information on how the IM 151-7 CPU interface module can be operated
together with the DP master module on the PROFIBUS DP.
Basic knowledge required

To understand these operating instructions you should have general experience in the field
of automation engineering.
Range of validity of these operating instructions

These Operating Instructions are valid for
● the IM 151-7 CPU interface module (order number 6ES7151-7AA21-0AB0)
● the DP master module (order number 6ES7138-4HA00-0AB0)
● the components of the ET 200S distributed I/O system specified in the ET 200S
Distributed I/O System Operating Instructions.
Note
A description of the special features of the interface module IM151-7F CPU
(6ES7151-7FA21-0AB0) can be found in the product information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/11669702/133300).
These operating instructions contain a description of the components that was valid at the
time of publication. We reserve the right to issue a Product Information which contains up-to-
date information about new components and new versions of components.
IM151-7 CPU Interface Module

Operating Instructions, 10/2011, A5E00058783-05 3

Preface
Changes since the previous version

Compared to the previous version of this operating instructions ET 200S, IM151-7 CPU
Interface Module, Edition 11/2003, A5E00058783-04, this edition is a new revision with a
completely updated structure. The major changes are:
● Increased work memory
● Increased performance due to shorter instruction processing times
● Number of blocks that can be monitored using the status block increased from 1 to 2
● Effective from STEP 7 V5.5, increase in the status information that can be monitored
using the status block
● Number of breakpoints increased from 2 to 4
● Local data stack size increased (32 KB per execution level/2 KB per block)
● Configurable process image
● Expansion of the block number range
● DB sizes: Max. 64 KB
● Time-delay interrupts: uniform OB 21 / OB 22
● Cyclic interrupts: uniform OB 32 - OB 35
● Increase of GD circles for global data communication
● Number of displayed diagnostic buffer entries in CPU RUN mode is configurable
● Extension of the diagnostic buffer entries in the event of problems on the local I/O bus of
the IM151-7 CPU
● Reading service data
● Extension of SFC 12 with 2 new modes to trigger the OB 86 during enabling/disabling of
PROFIBUS slaves
● Supports the status byte for power modules
● Encryption of blocks using S7 Block Privacy
● Copying of 512 bytes with SFC 81
● Increase of number of block-related messages (Alarm_S) to 300
Guide
The operating instructions contain the following guides which provide quick access to the
specific information you need:
● At the beginning of the documentation you will find a comprehensive table of contents.
● Important terms are explained in the glossary.
● Navigate to the most important topics in our documents using the index.

4 Operating Instructions, 10/2011, A5E00058783-05

Preface
Recycling and disposal

The IM 151-7 CPU interface module is recyclable due to its non-toxic materials. For
environmentally compliant recycling and disposal of your electronic waste, please contact a
company certified for the disposal of electronic waste.
Further support
If you have any questions relating to the products described in these operating instructions,
and do not find the answers in this document, please contact your Siemens partner at our
local offices.
You will find information on who to contact on the Web
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner).
A guide to the technical documentation for the various SIMATIC products and systems is
available in the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/simatic/portal).
The online catalog and ordering systems are available on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall).
Training center
We offer courses to help you get started with the ET 200S and the SIMATIC S7 automation
system. Please contact your regional training center or the central training center in
D -90327, Nuremberg, Germany.
You will find more information on the Web (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain).
Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
There you will find:
● Our Newsletter, which constantly provides you with the latest information about your
products.
● The right documentation for you using our Service & Support search engine.
● The bulletin board, a worldwide knowledge exchange for users and experts.
● Your local contact partner for Industry Automation products in our Contact Partners
database.
● Information about on-site service, repairs, spare parts, and much more is available under
"Repairs, spare parts, and consulting".


Preface


Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Description............................................................................................................................................... 11
1.1 Function of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module..........................................................................11
1.2 Properties of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module .......................................................................12
1.3 Properties of the DP master module............................................................................................14
1.4 Example configurations................................................................................................................15
2 Operating and display elements .............................................................................................................. 17
2.1 Operating and display elements of the IM151-7 CPU interface module .....................................17
2.2 Status and error displays of the IM151-7 CPU interface module ................................................19
2.3 Display elements of the DP master module.................................................................................20
3 Communication........................................................................................................................................ 21
3.1 Interfaces .....................................................................................................................................21
3.1.1 Multi-Point Interface (MPI) ...........................................................................................................21
3.1.2 PROFIBUS DP.............................................................................................................................22
3.2 Configuring MPI and PROFIBUS subnets ...................................................................................24
3.2.1 Basic information relating to MPI and PROFIBUS subnets.........................................................24
3.2.2 Network components of MPI/DP and cable lengths ....................................................................26
3.2.3 Examples for MPI and PROFIBUS subnets ................................................................................31
3.3 Communication services..............................................................................................................36
3.3.1 Overview of communication services ..........................................................................................36
3.3.2 PG communication.......................................................................................................................37
3.3.3 OP communication.......................................................................................................................37
3.3.4 S7 basic communication ..............................................................................................................38
3.3.5 S7 communication .......................................................................................................................38
3.3.6 Global data communication (via MPI only) ..................................................................................39
3.3.7 Routing.........................................................................................................................................40
3.3.8 Data set routing............................................................................................................................42
3.3.9 Clock synchronization ..................................................................................................................44
3.3.10 Data consistency..........................................................................................................................46
3.4 S7 connections ............................................................................................................................47
3.4.1 S7 connection as communication path ........................................................................................47
3.4.2 Assignment of S7 connections.....................................................................................................48
3.4.3 Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources .............................................................49
3.4.4 Connection resources for routing.................................................................................................50
3.5 DPV1............................................................................................................................................51


Table of contents
4 Memory concept ...................................................................................................................................... 53

4.1 Memory areas and retentive memory ......................................................................................... 53
4.1.1 Memory areas of the IM151-7 CPU interface module ................................................................ 53
4.1.2 Retentivity of load memory, system memory and RAM.............................................................. 54
4.1.3 Retentivity of memory objects ..................................................................................................... 55
4.1.4 Address areas of system memory .............................................................................................. 57
4.1.5 Properties of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card ......................................................................... 61
4.2 Memory functions........................................................................................................................ 62
4.2.1 General: Memory functions ......................................................................................................... 62
4.2.2 Downloading user programs via SIMATIC Micro Memory Card to the IM 151-7 CPU
interface module.......................................................................................................................... 63
4.2.3 Handling blocks........................................................................................................................... 64
4.2.3.1 Encryption of blocks .................................................................................................................... 64
4.2.3.2 Download of new blocks or delta downloads .............................................................................. 65
4.2.3.3 Uploading blocks......................................................................................................................... 65
4.2.3.4 Deleting blocks............................................................................................................................ 66
4.2.3.5 Compressing blocks.................................................................................................................... 66
4.2.3.6 Promming (RAM to ROM) ........................................................................................................... 66
4.2.4 CPU memory reset and restart ................................................................................................... 67
4.2.5 Recipes ....................................................................................................................................... 68
4.2.6 Measured value log files ............................................................................................................. 70
4.2.7 Backup of project data to SIMATIC Micro Memory Card............................................................ 72
5 Mounting and connecting......................................................................................................................... 73
5.1 Content........................................................................................................................................ 73
5.2 Installing the IM151-7 CPU interface module ............................................................................. 73
5.3 Connecting the IM151-7 CPU interface module ......................................................................... 74
5.4 Installing and connecting the DP master module ....................................................................... 76
6 Addressing............................................................................................................................................... 79
6.1 Addressing the I/O modules........................................................................................................ 79
6.1.1 Slot-oriented addressing of the centralized I/O modules ............................................................ 79
6.1.2 User-oriented addressing of the I/O Modules ............................................................................. 82
6.2 Addressing on PROFIBUS DP.................................................................................................... 83
7 Commissioning ........................................................................................................................................ 85
7.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 85
7.2 Commissioning procedure .......................................................................................................... 85
7.2.1 Procedure: Commissioning the hardware................................................................................... 85
7.2.2 Procedure: Software commissioning .......................................................................................... 87
7.3 Commissioning check list............................................................................................................ 88
7.4 Commissioning the modules ....................................................................................................... 90
7.4.1 Inserting/Replacing a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.................................................................. 90
7.4.2 Initial power on ............................................................................................................................ 92
7.4.3 Memory reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module using the mode selector switch ............... 93
7.4.4 Formatting the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card............................................................................. 96
7.4.5 Resetting to the as-delivered state ............................................................................................. 98


Table of contents
7.4.6 Connecting the programming device (PG) ................................................................................100

7.4.6.1 Connecting the PG to a node.....................................................................................................100
7.4.6.2 Connecting the PG to several nodes .........................................................................................101
7.4.6.3 Using the PG for commissioning or maintenance......................................................................102
7.4.6.4 Connecting a PG to ungrounded MPI nodes .............................................................................104
7.4.7 Starting SIMATIC Manager........................................................................................................105
7.4.8 Monitoring and modifying I/Os ...................................................................................................106
7.5 Commissioning PROFIBUS DP .................................................................................................110
7.5.1 Commissioning the PROFIBUS DP network .............................................................................110
7.5.2 Commissioning the IM151-7 CPU as DP slave .........................................................................112
7.5.3 Commissioning the IM 151-7 CPU with DP master module as a DP master ............................119
7.5.4 Direct data exchange .................................................................................................................123
8 Service and maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 125
8.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................125
8.2 Backing up firmware on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card..........................................................125
8.3 Updating the firmware................................................................................................................127
8.3.1 When should you update the IM151-7 CPU interface module? ................................................127
8.3.2 Firmware update using a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card ...........................................................128
8.3.3 Updating the firmware online (via networks)..............................................................................129
8.4 Backing up project data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.....................................................130
8.5 Replacing the IM151-7 CPU interface module ..........................................................................132
8.6 Replacing the DP master module ..............................................................................................134
9 Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 135
9.1 Assigning parameters of the reference junction for the connection of thermocouples..............135
9.2 Removal and insertion of modules during operation .................................................................136
9.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................136
9.2.2 What happens when modules are removed during operation ...................................................137
9.2.3 Procedure when modules are inserted during operation...........................................................137
9.3 Switching power modules off and on during operation..............................................................139
9.4 Power module with status byte ..................................................................................................140
10 Debugging functions, diagnostics and troubleshooting .......................................................................... 141
10.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................141
10.2 Reading/saving service data......................................................................................................141
10.3 Identification and maintenance data of the IM151-7 CPU interface module .............................142
10.4 Debugging functions ..................................................................................................................144
10.4.1 Overview: Debugging functions .................................................................................................144
10.4.2 Overview: Diagnostics ...............................................................................................................146
10.4.3 Diagnostic functions available in STEP 7 ..................................................................................149


Table of contents
10.5 Diagnostics using status and error LEDs.................................................................................. 150

10.5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 150
10.5.2 Status and error displays of the IM151-7 CPU interface module.............................................. 150
10.5.3 Evaluating the SF LED in case of software errors .................................................................... 152
10.5.4 Evaluating the SF LED in case of hardware errors................................................................... 154
10.5.5 Status and error displays of the MPI/DP interface as DP slave................................................ 155
10.5.6 Status and error displays of the DP master module (parameterizaton as DP master)............. 156
10.6 Diagnostics on the PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................... 158
10.6.1 Diagnostics of the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a DP master ......................................... 158
10.6.2 Reading out slave diagnostic data ............................................................................................ 161
10.6.3 Interrupts on the DP Master ...................................................................................................... 167
10.6.4 Structure of the slave diagnostics when the CPU is operated as I-slave ................................. 168
10.7 Defective configuration statuses of the ET 200S...................................................................... 177
10.8 Failure of the load voltage from the power module................................................................... 177
11 Technical data ....................................................................................................................................... 179
11.1 General technical data .............................................................................................................. 179
11.2 IM151-7 CPU Interface Module ................................................................................................ 180
11.2.1 Block diagram IM 151-7 CPU with DP master module ............................................................. 180
11.2.2 Technical specifications IM151-7 CPU ..................................................................................... 181
11.3 DP master module .................................................................................................................... 191
11.3.1 Technical specifications - DP master module ........................................................................... 191
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 193
A.1 Order numbers .......................................................................................................................... 193
A.1.1 Module order numbers .............................................................................................................. 193
A.1.2 Order numbers of accessories.................................................................................................. 194
A.2 Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 196
A.2.1 IM151-7 CPU Interface Module ................................................................................................ 196
A.2.2 DP master module .................................................................................................................... 197
A.3 Cycle and response times......................................................................................................... 197
A.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 197
A.3.2 Cycle time.................................................................................................................................. 198
A.3.2.1 Overview: Cycle time ................................................................................................................ 198
A.3.2.2 Calculating the cycle time ......................................................................................................... 200
A.3.2.3 Communication load ................................................................................................................. 202
A.3.2.4 Cycle time extension as a result of test and commissioning functions..................................... 204
A.3.3 Response time .......................................................................................................................... 205
A.3.3.1 Overview: Response time ......................................................................................................... 205
A.3.3.2 Shortest response time ............................................................................................................. 207
A.3.3.3 Longest response time.............................................................................................................. 208
A.3.4 Interrupt response time ............................................................................................................. 209
A.3.4.1 Overview: Interrupt response time ............................................................................................ 209
A.3.4.2 Reproducibility of time-delay and watchdog interrupts ............................................................. 210
A.4 Additional documentation.......................................................................................................... 211
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 213
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 233


Description 1
1.1 Function of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module
The IM 151-7 CPU interface module is a component of the ET 200S distributed I/O system
with degree of protection IP20. The IM 151-7 CPU interface module is an "intelligent
preprocessor" (I slave). It enables you to decentralize control tasks.
Therefore, an ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU can exercise full and, if necessary, independent
control over a process-related functional unit and can be used as standalone CPU. An
IM151-7 CPU can:
● be operated with MPI interface
● either be a DP slave or together with the optional DP master module, a DP master at the
PROFIBUS DP.
The use of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module leads to further modularization and
standardization of process-related functional units and simple, clear machine concepts.


Description
1.2 Properties of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module
Properties of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module

The IM 151-7 CPU interface module has the following special properties:
● The interface module has PLC functionality (integrated CPU component with 128 KB
work memory).
● The interface module can only be used with the load memory inserted (SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card).
● The interface module can be enhanced with up to 63 I/O modules from the ET 200S
range.
● The maximum bus length is 2 m.
● Down times are minimized thanks to the integrated diagnostics.
● It is possible to update the firmware via SIMATIC Micro Memory Card or online via the
network.
● The interface module has a mode selector with positions for RUN, STOP and MRES.
● There are 6 LEDs on the front of the interface module to indicate the following:
– ET 200S faults (SF)
– Bus faults (BF)
– Supply voltage for electronic components (ON)
– Force jobs (FRCE)
– Operating mode of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module (RUN and STOP)
● Connection to PROFIBUS DP or MPI using a combined MPI / DP interface (RS 485)
● The IM 151-7 CPU interface module can be expanded by one DP master module. This
also lends it the functionality of a DP master.
Integration of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module in ET 200S

The IM 151-7 CPU interface module is integrated in ET 200S just like any other module,
which means the same configuration concept, installation and expansion capability.
Information on this can be found in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) Operating Instructions.


Description
How do I configure and program the ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU?

You need the configuration software STEP 7 as of V5.2 + SP1 + HSP219 or V5.5 + SP1 to
configure the ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU (configuration and parameter assignment) and to
program the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
If you want to operate IO-Link modules with the IM151-7 CPU interface module, you need
STEP 7 as of V5.5 + SP1 or
● STEP 7 as of V5.4 + SP5 + Hotfix 8 + HSP180 for IO-Link electronic modules + HSP219
for the IM151-7 CPU interface module
● STEP 7 as of V5.4 + SP5 + Hotfix 8 + HSP181 for SIRIUS electronic modules + HSP219
for the IM151-7 CPU interface module
The procedure for configuration of the ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU is described in section
Commissioning (Page 85) of these operating instructions. In the S7-300 CPUs and ET 200
CPUs Instruction List you will find the STEP 7 instruction set for programming the IM151-7
CPU interface module. The instruction list is available as a download from the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/31977679).
Constraints on using motor starters and ET 200S modules

With central use in an ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU the following motor starters and ET 200S
modules can cause disturbing responses. The product versions specified of these motor
starters and ET 200S modules should not be used in an ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU.
Table 1- 1 Constraints on using motor starters and ET 200S modules
Motor starter / module Order number Up to and

including product
version
DS1e-x direct-on-line starter; HF 3RK1301-0❑B10-❑AA2 E06
RS1e-x reversing starters; HF
F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starters; HF 3RK1301-0❑B13-❑AA2 E06
F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starters; HF
DS1e-x direct-on-line starter; HF 3RK1301-0❑B❑0-❑AA3 E03
DSS1e-x direct soft starters; HF
DS1e-x direct-on-line starter; HF 3RK1301-0❑B❑❑-❑AA4 E02
DSS1e-x direct soft starters; HF
F-DS1e-x fail-safe direct starters; HF
F-RS1e-x fail-safe reversing starters; HF
2AI I 2WIRE HS analog electronic module 6ES7134-4GB52-0AB0 E03
2 AI I 4WIRE HS analog electronic module 6ES7134-4GB62-0AB0 E01
Analog electronic module 2AI U HS 6ES7134-4FB52-0AB0 E01
2AO I HS analog electronic module 6ES7135-4GB52-0AB0 E01
2AO U HS analog electronic module 6ES7135-4FB52-0AB0 E03


Description
1.3 Properties of the DP master module
1.3 Properties of the DP master module

Together with the DP master module you can operate the IM 151-7 CPU interface module as
a DP master.
Note
The IM 151-7 CPU interface module can be expanded by no more than one DP master
module.
Properties of the DP master module

The DP master module has the following special features:
● The PROFIBUS DP address is saved alongside the HW Config configuration on the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
● There is 1 LED on the front of the DP master module to indicate bus faults on the
PROFIBUS DP (BF).
● Connection to PROFIBUS DP via the DP interface (RS 485) on the DP master module
Integration of the DP master module in ET 200S

The DP master module is connected to the IM 151-7 CPU from the right and hence
integrated in the ET 200S.
How do I configure and program the ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU and DP master module?
To configure an ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU and DP master module (configuration and
parameter assignment) and to program the IM 151-7 CPU interface module you will need the
STEP 7 configuration software as of V5.2 + SP1 + HSP219 or V5.5 + SP1.
The procedure for configuring the ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU and DP master module is
described in the section Commissioning (Page 85) of these operating instructions.


Description
1.4 Example configurations
Example configuration of an ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU

The figure below shows an example configuration of an ET 200S with IM 151-7 CPU.

Figure 1-1 View of the ET 200S distributed I/O system with IM 151-7 CPU
① IM151-7 CPU interface module ④ Terminating module

② PM-E power module for electronic ⑤ TM-E terminal modules for electronic
modules modules
③ Electronic modules ⑥ TM-P terminal modules for PM-E power
modules


Description
Example configuration of an ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU and DP master module

The figure below shows an example configuration of an ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU and DP
master module.

Figure 1-2 View of the ET 200S distributed I/O system with IM151-7 CPU and DP master module
① IM151-7 CPU interface module ⑦ Reversing starter

② DP master module ⑧ Terminating module
③ PM-E power module for electronic ⑨ Power bus
modules
④ Electronic modules ⑩ TM-P terminal module for PM-D power
modules
⑤ PM-D power module for motor starters ⑪ TM-E terminal modules for electronic
modules
⑥ Direct starters ⑫ TM-P terminal modules for PM-E power
modules


Operating and display elements 2

2.1 Operating and display elements of the IM151-7 CPU interface
module

Number Designation
① Combined MPI / DP interface (RS 485) for connection to PROFIBUS DP or MPI
② Mode selector switch
③ Status and error displays of the IM151-7P CPU interface module
④ Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
⑤ Connection for supply voltage
Slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

Memory module is a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. You can use MMCs as load memory and
as portable storage media. The slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be accessed
from the front of the interface module. Detailed information on inserting the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card is available in the section Inserting/Replacing a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
(Page 90).
Note
The IM151-7 CPU interface module does not have an integrated load memory, so you will
need to connect a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card to the IM 151-7 interface module in order to
use it.


Operating and display elements

2.1 Operating and display elements of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Mode selector switch

You can use the mode selector switch to set the current operating mode of the
IM151-7 CPU.
Table 2- 1 Mode selector switch settings
Position Meaning Description

RUN RUN mode The IM151-7 CPU interface module processes the user program.
STOP STOP mode The IM151-7 CPU interface module does not process the user
program.
MRES Memory reset Mode selector switch setting for
 Memory reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
 Backing up the firmware to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
 Resetting to the as-supplied state
A memory reset using the mode selector requires a number of
steps to be carried out in a set order.
Reference
● Operating modes of the IM151-7 CPU interface module: STEP 7 Online Help
● Information on memory reset of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module: Section Memory
reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module using the mode selector switch (Page 93)
● Backing up the firmware to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card: Section Backing up
firmware on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (Page 125)
● Resetting to factory settings: Section Resetting to the as-delivered state (Page 98)
● Evaluation of the LEDs for errors or diagnostics: Section Diagnostics using status and
error LEDs (Page 150)



2.2 Status and error displays of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
2.2 Status and error displays of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Status and error LEDs
Table 2- 2 Status and error displays of the IM151-7P CPU interface module
LED designation Color Meaning

SF Red Group fault for hardware or software error
BF Red Bus fault at PROFIBUS DP
ON Green Supply voltage for the IM151-7 CPU
FRCE Yellow LED is lit: Active force job
LED flashes at 2 Hz: Node flash test function.
RUN Green IM151-7 CPU in RUN
The LED flashes during STARTUP at a rate of 2 Hz, and in HOLD
state at 0.5 Hz.
STOP Yellow IM151-7 CPU in STOP or in HOLD or STARTUP mode
The LED flashes at 0.5 Hz when the CPU requests a memory reset,
and during the reset at 2 Hz.
Reference
● Operating modes of the IM151-7 CPU interface module: STEP 7 Online Help
● Information on memory reset of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module: Section Memory
reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module using the mode selector switch (Page 93)
● Evaluation of the LEDs for errors or diagnostics: Section Diagnostics using status and
error LEDs (Page 150)



2.3 Display elements of the DP master module
2.3 Display elements of the DP master module
Display elements
'3
0DVWHU
%)
;
352),%86'3
(6
+$
$%
Figure 2-1 Display elements of the DP master module
The figure shows ... the following elements of the DP master module
① Status and error displays
② 9-pin sub D socket for PROFIBUS DP


Communication 3
3.1 Interfaces
3.1.1 Multi-Point Interface (MPI)
Availability
The IM151-7 CPU interface module has a combined MPI / DP interface (X1) with DP slave
functionality. This RS 485 interface is configured as an MPI interface when the unit is first
supplied.
Properties
The MPI (Multi-Point Interface) is the interface of the IM151-7 CPU interface module for
PG/OP connections or for communication on an MPI subnet.
The typical (default) baud rate is 187.5 Kbps. You can also set 19.2 Kbps for communication
with a S7-200. Baud rates up to 12 Mbps are possible.
The IM151-7 CPU interface module automatically broadcasts its bus configuration via the
MPI interface (the transmission rate, for example). A programming device, for example, can
thus receive the correct parameters and automatically connect to a MPI subnet.
Devices capable of MPI communication

● Programming device / PC
● OP/TP
● S7-300 / S7-400 with MPI interface
● S7-200 (only at 19.2 Kbps)
NOTICE
You may only connect programming devices to an MPI subnet which is in RUN mode.
Do not connect nodes (for example, OP, TP) to the MPI subnet while the system is
running. Otherwise, transferred data might be corrupted as a result of interference, or
global data packages may be lost.
Time synchronization
Time synchronization is possible if the MPI / DP interface is programmed as an MPI interface
on the IM151-7 CPU interface module. For information on time synchronization via MPI,
please refer to the section Time synchronization (Page 44).


Communication
3.1 Interfaces
3.1.2 PROFIBUS DP
Availability
The IM151-7 CPU interface module has a combined MPI / DP interface (X1) with DP slave
functionality. This RS 485 interface is configured as an MPI interface when the unit is first
supplied. If you want to use the DP interface, you have to reconfigure it in STEP 7 as DP
interface.
Together with the optional DP master module, the IM 151-7 CPU interface module has an
RS 485 interface (X2) with DP master functionality.
Properties of the PROFIBUS DP interfaces

PROFIBUS DP interface at IM151-7 CPU
The PROFIBUS DP interface (X1) with DP slave functionality is mainly used to connect the
IM151-7 CPU interface module to a PROFIBUS DP subnet (use of CPU as I slave).
The PROFIBUS DP interface offers a transmission rate of up to 12 Mbps.
You can configure the DP slave interface as active or passive by using the "Test,
Commissioning, Routing" checkbox in the properties of the DP interface in STEP 7.
● Active DP slave interface ("Test, Commissioning, Routing" checkbox is activated):
– The PROFIBUS DP interface broadcasts its bus configuration (the transmission rate,
for example). A programming device, for example, can thus receive the correct
parameters and automatically connect to a PROFIBUS subnet. In your configuration
you can specify to disable bus parameter broadcasting.
– Routing/data set routing in other subnets that can be accessed by an additionally
connected DP master module is possible.
– PG/OP functions (e. g. for testing and commissioning) are possible without
restrictions.
– Do not operate a DP slave with active DP interface in an isochronous subnet.
● Passive DP slave interface ("Test, Commissioning, Routing" checkbox is deactivated):
– The configured transmission rate is ignored and set automatically to the transmission
rate of the master (automatic transmission rate search)
– Routing/data set routing is no longer possible via a passive DP slave interface.
– PG/OP functions are possible but with less performance than with active interface.
– If you want to operate the CPU as I slave in a subnet in which isochronous DP slaves
are used, the DP slave interface of the I slave CPU must be operated passively (the
CPU as I slave does not support isochronous slave operation itself)


Communication
3.1 Interfaces
DP master interface on the DP master module

The DP master interface on the DP master module (X2) is mainly used to connect distributed
I/O (slaves). PROFIBUS DP allows you to create large subnets.
The DP master interface offers a transmission rate of up to 12 Mbps.
You can configure the DP master interface as DP master or to be inactive.
● The interface needs a configuration as DP master.
– Slaves can be operated with loaded configuration; PG/OP functions and routing are
possible.
– The CPU sends its set bus parameters (the baud rate, for example) via the
PROFIBUS DP interface if master mode is set. This functionality automatically
provides the correct parameters for online operation of a programming device, for
example. In your configuration you can specify to disable bus parameter broadcasting.
● The interface is always inactive without configuration.
Devices capable of PROFIBUS DP communication

Devices that can be connected via PROFIBUS DP:
● Programming device / PC
● OP/TP
● DP slaves
● DP master
● Actuators/Sensors
● S7-300/S7-400 with PROFIBUS DP interface
Time synchronization using PROFIBUS

Time synchronization is possible if the MPI / DP interface is programmed as a DP interface
on the IM151-7 CPU interface module and via the DP interface on the DP master module.
For information on time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP, please refer to the section Time
synchronization (Page 44).
Reference
Additional information on PROFIBUS: "PROFIBUS (http://www.profibus.com)"


Communication
3.2 Configuring MPI and PROFIBUS subnets
3.2.1 Basic information relating to MPI and PROFIBUS subnets
Convention: device = node

All devices you interconnect on the MPI or PROFIBUS network are referred to as nodes.
Segment
A segment is a bus line between two terminating resistors. A segment may contain up to 32
nodes. It is also limited with respect to the permitted line length, which is determined by the
transmission rate.
Baud rate
Maximum transmission rates:
● MPI:
– 12 Mbps
– Default: 187,5 Kbps
● PROFIBUS DP: 12 Mbps
Number of nodes
Maximum number of nodes per subnet.
Table 3- 1 Subnet nodes
Parameters MPI PROFIBUS DP

Number 127 126 1
Addresses 0 to 126 0 to 125
Comment Default: 32 addresses of those:
Reserved addresses:  1 master (reserved)
 Address 0 for PG  1 PG connection (address 0 reserved)
 Address 1 for OP  124 1 slaves or other masters
1 Note that the IM151-7 CPU interface module as DP master (with DP master module) can only
operate up to 32 slaves.


Communication
MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses
You need to assign an address to all nodes in order to enable intercommunication:
● On the MPI network: an "MPI address"
● On the PROFIBUS DP network: "a PROFIBUS DP address"
You can use the PG to set the MPI/PROFIBUS addresses for each one of the nodes (some
of the PROFIBUS DP slaves are equipped with a selector switch for this purpose).
Default MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses

The table below shows you the default setting of the MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses, and the
factory setting of the highest MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses for the nodes.
Table 3- 2 MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses
Node Default MPI/ Default highest MPI Default highest PROFIBUS

(device) PROFIBUS DP address address DP address
PG 0 32 126
OP 1 32 126
CPU 2 32 126
Rules: Assignment of MPI/PROFIBUS DP addresses

Note the following rules before assigning MPI/PROFIBUS addresses:
● All MPI/PROFIBUS subnet addresses must be unique.
● The highest MPI/PROFIBUS address must be greater than or equal to the actual MPI/
PROFIBUS address and must be identical for each node. (Exception: Connecting the PG
to several nodes).
Recommendation for MPI addresses

Reserve MPI address "0" for a service PG, or "1" for a service OP, for temporary
connections of these devices to the subnet. You should therefore assign different MPI
addresses to PGs/OPs operating on the MPI subnet.
Recommended MPI address of the CPU for replacement or service operations:
Reserve MPI address "2" for the CPU. This prevents duplication of MPI addresses after you
connect a CPU with default settings to the MPI subnet (for example, when replacing a CPU).
You should assign an MPI address greater than "2" to CPUs in the MPI subnet.
Recommendation for PROFIBUS addresses

Reserve PROFIBUS address "0" for a service PG that you can subsequently connect briefly
to the PROFIBUS subnet as required. You should therefore assign unique PROFIBUS
addresses to PGs integrated in the PROFIBUS subnet.


Communication
PROFIBUS DP: Electrical cables or fiber-optic cables?

Use fiber optic cables on a field bus with greater length, rather than copper conductors, in
order to be independent on the transmission rate, and to exclude external interference.
3.2.2 Network components of MPI/DP and cable lengths
MPI subnet segment

You can install cables with a length of up to 50 m in an MPI subnet segment. This length of
50 m is the distance between the first and the last node of the segment.
Table 3- 3 Permissible cable length of a segment on the MPI subnet
Baud rate Maximum cable length of a segment

19,2 Kbps 1000 m
187,5 Kbps
1,5 Mbps 200 m
3,0 Mbps 100 m
6,0 Mbps
12,0 Mbps
Segment on the PROFIBUS subnet

The maximum cable length of a segment on the PROFIBUS subnet is determined by the set
transmission rate.
Table 3- 4 Permissible cable length of a segment on the PROFIBUS subnet
Baud rate Maximum cable length of a segment

9,6 Kbps to 187.5 Kbps 1000 m
500 Kbps 400 m
1,5 Mbps 200 m
3 Mbps to 12 Mbps 100 m
Longer cable lengths via RS485 repeater/RS485 diagnostic repeater

You need to install RS485 repeaters for segments requiring cable lengths longer than the
allowed length. For additional information about the RS485 Repeater, refer to the RS 485
Repeater Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/48598071).


Communication
Stub cables
Make allowances for the maximum stub cable length when you connect bus nodes to a
segment by means of stub cables, for example, a PG via standard PG cable.
For transmission rates up to 3 Mbps, you can use a PROFIBUS bus cable with bus
connector as stub cable for connecting. For transmission rates of 3 Mbps and higher, use the
PG patch cord to connect the PG or PC. You can use multiple PG connecting cables in one
bus structure. Other types of stub cables are not permitted.
Length of stub cables

The table below shows the maximum permitted lengths of stub cables per segment:
Table 3- 5 Lengths of stub cables per segment
Baud rate Max. length of stub Number of nodes with stub cable length of ...
cables per segment 1.5 m or 1.6 m 3m
9,6 Kbps to 93.75 Kbps 96 m 32 32
187,5 Kbps 75 m 32 25
500 Kbps 30 m 20 10
1,5 Mbps 10 m 6 3
3 Mbps to 12 Mbps 1 1 1
1To connect PGs or PCs for operation at transmission rates starting at 3 Mbps, use the PG patch
cord with order number 6ES7901-4BD00-0XA0. In a bus configuration, you can use multiple PG
patch cords with this order number. Other types of stub cables are not permitted.
PG connecting cable
Table 3- 6 PG connecting cable
Type Order number

PG connecting cable 6ES7901-4BD00-0XA0


Communication
PROFIBUS cables
For PROFIBUS DP or MPI networking we offer you the following bus cables for diverse fields
of application:
Table 3- 7 Available bus cables
Bus cable Order number

PROFIBUS cable 6XV1830-0AH10
PROFIBUS cable, halogen-free 6XV1830-0LH10
PROFIBUS underground cable 6XV1830-3FH10
PROFIBUS trailing cable 6XV1830-3BH10
PROFIBUS cable with PUR sheath for environments subject to chemical and 6XV1830-0JH10
mechanical stress
PROFIBUS cable with PE sheath for the food and beverages industry 6XV1830-0GH10
PROFIBUS cable for festooning 6XV1830-3GH10
Properties of PROFIBUS cables

The PROFIBUS bus cable is a 2-wire, shielded twisted pair cable with copper conductors. It
is used for hardwired transmission in accordance with US Standard EIA RS485.
The table below lists the characteristics of these cables.
Table 3- 8 Properties of PROFIBUS cables
Properties Values
Wave impedance approx. 135 Ω to 160 Ω (f = 3 MHz to 20 MHz)
Loop resistance ≤ 115 Ω/km
Effective capacitance 30 nF/km
Attenuation 0.9 dB/100 m (f = 200 kHz)
Permitted conductor cross-sections 0.3 mm2 to 0.5 mm2
Permitted cable diameter 8 mm ± 0.5 mm


Communication
Installation of bus cables

When you install PROFIBUS bus cables, you must not
● twist,
● stretch
● or compress them.
When wiring indoor bus cables, also maintain the following marginal conditions (dA = outer
cable diameter):
Table 3- 9 Marginal conditions for wiring interior bus cables
Characteristics Condition
Bending radius (one-off) ≥80 mm (10 x dA)
Bending radius (multiple times) ≥160 mm (20 x dA)
Permitted temperature range during installation -5 °C to +50 °C
Shelf and static operating temperature range -30 °C to +65 °C
Reference
For information on the use of fiber-optic cables for PROFIBUS bus cables, refer to the
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591)
Networks Manual.
RS 485 bus connector

Suitable bus connectors are listed in the section Order numbers of accessories (Page 194).
Field of application
You need bus connectors to connect the PROFIBUS bus cable to an MPI or PROFIBUS DP
interface.
You do not require a bus connector for:
● DP slaves with degree of protection IP 65 (ET 200pro, for example)
● RS 485 repeater


Communication
RS 485 repeater
Type Order number

RS 485 repeater 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0
RS 485 Diagnostic Repeater 6ES7972-0AB01-0XA0
Note
SFC 103 "DP_TOPOL" can be used to initiate identification of the bus topology of a DP
master system by way of the interconnected diagnostic repeaters.
Purpose
RS485 repeaters are used to amplify data signals on bus lines and to couple bus segments.
You require an RS 485 Repeater in the following situations:
● more than 32 network nodes
● when interconnecting a grounded with an ungrounded segment
● when exceeding the maximum line length in a segment
Longer cable lengths

If you want to implement cable lengths above those permitted in a segment, you must use
RS485 repeaters. The maximum cable lengths between two RS 485 repeaters correspond to
the maximum cable length of a segment. Please note that these maximum cable lengths
only apply if there is no additional node interconnected between the two RS 485 repeaters.
You can connect up to nine RS 485 repeaters in series. Note that you have to include the RS
485 repeater when counting the number of subnet nodes, regardless of whether or not it was
assigned its own MPI/PROFIBUS address.
Reference
For additional information about the RS485 Repeater, refer to the RS 485 Repeater Manual


Communication
3.2.3 Examples for MPI and PROFIBUS subnets
Example: Installation of an MPI subnet

The figure below shows you the block diagram of a MPI subnet.
6 6 6

3*
36 &38 36 &38 36 &38

23 23
03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb

(76 (76 6
,0&38 ,0&38 36 &38

23 23
03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb
03,DGGUb
3*
Number Description
① Terminating resistor enabled
② S7-300 and OP 277 have subsequently been connected to the MPI subnet using their
default MPI address.
③ Connected via stub cable using the default MPI address only for
commissioning/maintenance.


Communication
Example: Maximum distances in the MPI subnet

The figure below shows you:
● a possible MPI subnet configuration
● maximum distances possible in an MPI subnet
● the principle of "Line extension" using RS 485 repeaters
6 (76 6
3*
36 &38 ,0&38 36 &38 56
23 UHSHDWHU
03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb

PD[P
3*
03,DGGUb
PD[P
(76 (76

,0&38 ,0&38
23 23 56
UHSHDWHU
03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb

PD[P
Number Description
② PG connected by means of stub cable for maintenance purposes


Communication
Example: Terminating resistor in the MPI subnet

The figure below shows you an example of an MPI subnet and where to enable the
terminating resistor.
The figure below illustrates where the terminating resistors must be enabled in an MPI
subnet. In this example, the programming device is connected via a stub cable only for the
duration of commissioning or maintenance.
6
3*
36 &38
(76 (76 6

56
UHSHDWHU
,0&38 ,0&38 36 &38
23 23

3*

Number Description
WARNING
Disturbance of data traffic might occur on the bus. A bus segment must always be
terminated at both ends with the terminating resistor. This, for example, is not the case if
the last slave with bus connector is de-energized. Because the bus connector takes its
voltage from the station, this terminating resistor is ineffective. Please make sure that
power is always supplied to stations on which the terminating resistor is active.
Alternatively, the PROFIBUS terminator can also be used as active bus termination.


Communication
Example: Installation of a PROFIBUS subnet

The figure below shows you the basic principles of a PROFIBUS subnet installation.
(76 (76
'3 ,0&38
,0&38 PDVWHU 36 (70 36 (70 36 (70
,VODYH (7SUR

03,DGGUb 352),%86 352),%86 352),%86 352),%86 352),%86 352),%86
$GGU $GGU $GGU $GGU $GGU $GGU
03,DGGUb
3*
36 (70 (76 (76 (76 (76

352),%86
352),%86 352),%86 352),%86 352),%86
$GGU $GGU $GGU $GGU $GGU
Number Description


Communication
Example: IM151-7 CPU as MPI and PROFIBUS node

The figure below shows you an assembly with the IM151-7 CPU interface module integrated
in an MPI subnet and also operated as DP master in a PROFIBUS subnet.
6
3*
(7SUR
36 &38
'3DGGUb
03,DGGUb
03,DGGUb

(7SUR
'3DGGUb
6
36 &38
(7SUR
03,DGGUb '3DGGUb
6 (76
'3
36 &38 ,0&38 PDVWHU 56UHSHDWHU
23 (70 (70
03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb '3DGGUb '3DGGUb '3DGGUb

6 03,DGGUb
36 &38 (70 (70

23
'3DGGUb '3DGGUb
03,DGGUb 03,DGGUb
(76 (76

'3DGGUb '3DGGUb
03,VXEQHW 352),%86VXEQHW
Number Description
② PG connected via a stub cable for maintenance or commissioning purposes


Communication
3.3 Communication services
3.3.1 Overview of communication services
Selecting the communication service

You need to decide on a communication service, based on functionality requirements. Your
choice of communication service will have no effect on:
● The functionality available
● Whether an S7 connection is required or not
● The time of connecting
The user interfaces can vary considerably (SFC, SFB, etc.) and is also determined by the
hardware used (IM151-7 CPU, PC, etc.).
Overview of communication services

The table below provides an overview of the communication services provided by the
IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
Table 3- 10 Communication services of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Communication service Functionality Time at which the S7 connection is via MPI via DP
established ...
Programming device Commissioning, test, From the programming device, X X
communication diagnostics starting when the service is used
OP communication Control and monitoring From the OP at Power ON X X
S7 basic communication Data exchange Programmed to take place via blocks X I
(SFC parameters) communic
ation
(I_PUT /
I_GET) 1
S7 communication Data exchange in server and from the active partner at power on. Only in Only in
client mode: Configuration of server server
communication required mode mode
Global data communication Cyclic data exchange (for Does not require an S7 connection X –
example, bit memory)
Routing programming for example testing, From the programming device, X1 X1
device functions diagnostics on other networks starting when the service is used
also
Data set routing for example, parameterization From the programming device, X1 X1
and diagnostics of field starting when the service is used
devices on the PROFIBUS DP
by an engineering system
operated on an MPI interface
(e.g. PDM)


Communication
Communication service Functionality Time at which the S7 connection is via MPI via DP
established ...
PROFIBUS DP Data exchange between Does not require an S7 connection – X2
master and slave
Clock synchronization Broadcast telegrams Does not require an S7 connection X X3
1 with inserted DP master module only
2 at the integrated MPI/DP interface as DP slave or with inserted DP master module also as DP master
3 Clock synchronization is only possible as time slave at the integrated MPI/DP interface (DP slave functionality only). with
inserted DP master module: Clock synchronization is possible as time slave as well as time master with DP master
functionality.
See also
Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources (Page 49)
Connection resources for routing (Page 50)
3.3.2 PG communication
Properties
Programming device communication is used to exchange data between engineering stations
(programming device, PC, for example) and SIMATIC modules which are capable of
communication. The service is possible via the MPI and PROFIBUS subnets. Transition
between subnets is also supported.
Programming device communication provides the functions needed to download / upload
programs and configuration data, to run tests and to evaluate diagnostic information. These
functions are integrated in the operating system of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
An IM 151-7 CPU interface module can maintain several simultaneous online connections to
one or multiple programming devices.
3.3.3 OP communication
Properties
OP communication is used to exchange data between operator CPUs (OP, TP, WinCC, for
example) and SIMATIC modules which are capable of communication. The service is
possible via the MPI and PROFIBUS subnets.
OP communication provides functions you require for monitoring and modifying. These
functions are integrated in the operating system of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
An IM 151-7 CPU interface module can maintain several simultaneous connections to one or
multiple OPs.


Communication
3.3.4 S7 basic communication
Properties
Use the S7 basic communication to exchange data between different S7-CPUs (e. g.
IM151-7 CPU) on a MPI subnet or with distributed SIMATIC modules that can communicate
within an S7 station (e. g. with a FM354 positioning module that is used in an ET 200M slave
operated on a DP master module).
The data is exchanged across non-configured S7 connections. The service is available via
the MPI subnet or via a DP subnet (only I communication at the inserted DP master module
to a distributed function module).
S7 basic communication provides the functions you need to exchange data. These functions
are integrated in the operating system of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module. The user can
utilize this service by means of "System function" (SFC) user interface.
Reference
Additional information
● to SFCs can be found in the S7300-CPUs and ET 200-CPUs Instruction List
A detailed description is available in the STEP 7 online help or in the System and
standard functions for S7-300/400
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1214574) Reference Manual.
● On communication is available in the Communication with SIMATIC
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/25074283) System Manual.
3.3.5 S7 communication
Properties
The IM151-7 CPU interface module can only be server in the S7 communication. The
connection is always established by the communication partner. The service is possible via
the MPI and PROFIBUS subnets.
The services are handled by the operating system without explicit user interface.
Reference
For additional information on communication, refer to the Communication with SIMATIC
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/25074283) manual.


Communication
3.3.6 Global data communication (via MPI only)
Properties
Global data communication is used for cyclic exchange of global data via MPI subnets (for
example, I, Q, M) between SIMATIC S7 CPUs (data exchange without acknowledgement).
One CPU broadcasts its data to all other CPUs on the MPI subnet. The function is integrated
in the operating system of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
Reduction ratio
The reduction ratio specifies the cyclic intervals for GD communication. You can set the
reduction ratio when you configure global data communication in STEP 7. For example, if
you set a reduction ratio of 7, global data are transferred only with every 7th cycle. This will
reduce the load on the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
Send and receive conditions

Conditions which should be satisfied for GD communication:
● The transmitter of a GD packet must meet the following requirement:
Reduction ratiotransmitter x cycle timetransmitter ≥ 60 ms
● The receiver of a GD packet must meet the following requirement:
Reduction ratioreceiver x cycle timereceiver
< reduction factortransmitter x cycle timetransmitter
Information on cycle time is available in the Appendix Cycle and response times (Page 197).
A GD packet may be lost if these requirements are not met. The reasons being:
● The performance of the "smallest" CPU in the GD circuit
● Asynchronous transmitting / receiving of global data at the stations
When setting in STEP 7 : "Transmit after each CPU cycle" and the IM151-7 CPU has a short
CPU cycle time (< 60 ms), the operating system might overwrite a GD package of the
IM151-7 CPU before it is transmitted. The loss of global data is indicated in the status box of
a GD circuit, if you set this function in your STEP 7 configuration.
GD resources of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Table 3- 11 GD resources of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Parameters IM151-7 CPU

Number of GD circuits per CPU Max. 8
Number of GD packets transmitted per GD circuit Max. 1
Number of GD packets transmitted by all GD circuits Max. 8
Number of GD packets received per GD circuit Max. 1
Number of GD packets received by all GD circuits Max. 8
Data length per GD packet Max. 22 bytes
Consistency Max. 22 bytes
Min. reduction ratio (default) 1 (8)


Communication
3.3.7 Routing
Properties
Using STEP 7 you can use the PG / PC via your IM151-7 CPU interface module (with DP
master module) to reach a CPU in a different subnet, for example, to
● download user programs
● download a hardware configuration or
● perform tests and diagnostics functions.
Routing network nodes: MPI - PROFIBUS

Gateways between subnets are routed in a SIMATIC station that is equipped with interfaces
to the respective subnets. The figure below shows the access from MPI to PROFIBUS. The
CPU 1 (IM 151-7 CPU with DP master module) is the router between subnet 1 and subnet 2.
&38 &38
,0&38 ,0&38
'3PDVWHUPRGXOH
03, '3 '3

0DVWHU VODYH
DFWLYH
6XEQHW03, 6XEQHW352),%86
3*
Number of connections for routing

For the routing function (only relevant with inserted DP master module) you have up to four
connections available with the IM151-7 CPU interface module.


Communication
Requirements
● The station modules are "capable of routing" (CPUs or CPs).
● The network configuration does not exceed project limits.
● The modules have loaded the configuration data containing the latest "knowledge" of the
entire network configuration of the project.
Reason: All modules participating in the network transition must receive the routing
information defining the paths to other subnets.
● In your network configuration, the programming device/PC you want to use to establish a
connection via network node must be assigned to the network it is physically connected
to.
● The DP master module must be inserted at the IM151-7 CPU interface module and the
CPU must be configured as DP master.
● If the MPI/DP interface is configured as DP slave, the routing function is only available
when the DP interface is set active. In STEP 7, activate the "Test, Commissioning,
Routing" checkbox in the properties of the DP interface. More information is available in
the Programming with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18652056) manual or directly in the
STEP 7 Online Help.
Reference
● About configuring with STEP 7 can be found in the Configuring Hardware and
Connections in STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/45531110)
manual
● On communication is available in the Communication with SIMATIC
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/25074283) System Manual.
● to SFCs can be found in the S7300-CPUs and ET 200-CPUs Instruction List
A detailed description is available in the STEP 7 Online Help or in the System and


Communication
3.3.8 Data set routing
Availability
The IM151-7 CPU interface module supports data set routing if a DP master module is
inserted.
Routing and data set routing

Routing is the transfer of data beyond network boundaries. You can send information from a
transmitter to a receiver across several networks.
Data record routing is an expansion of the "standard routing" and is used, for example, by
SIMATIC PDM. The data sent through data set routing includes the parameters for the
participating field devices (slaves) as well as device-specific information (e.g. setpoint
values, limit values, etc.). The structure of the target address for data record routing depends
on the data contents, i.e. the slave to which the data is to be sent.
With the PG, e.g. a parameter set that already exists on the field device can be read, edited
and then sent back to the field device if the PG is not connected to the same PROFIBUS DP
subnet as that of the field device.
The field devices themselves do not have to support data set routing, since they do not
forward the information received.


Communication
Data set routing

The following figure shows the access of the PG to a variety of field devices. In doing so, the
PG is connected via MPI to the IM 151-7 CPU interface module. The IM151-7 CPU interface
module communicates via PROFIBUS with the field devices.
3*3&
ZLWK6,0$7,&3'0
03,
(76
352),%86'3
'33$OLQN
(70
WRP$ 352),%863$
+$57
6,02&2'(
Figure 3-1 Data set routing with 151-7 CPU
See also
You can find additional information on SIMATIC PDM in the The Process Device Manager
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21407212) Manual.


Communication
3.3.9 Clock synchronization
Introduction
The IM151-7 CPU interfaces support clock synchronization. The interface module can be
parameterized for operation as time master (with default synchronization intervals) or as time
slave.
Default: No clock synchronization
Setting the synchronization mode

The synchronization mode is set in HW Config in the properties dialog box of the
IM151-7 CPU interface module or of the interface ("Clock" tab).
Interfaces
Clock synchronization is supported at the following interfaces:
● Combined MPI / DP interface, configured as MPI interface
You can configure the interface module as
– Time master or
– Time slave or
– "not synchronized".
● Combined MPI / DP interface, configured as DP interface (DP slave functionality)
– Time slave or
● With inserted DP master module (DP master functionality)
– Time master or
– Time slave or
Note
The IM 151-7 CPU interface module may be the time slave on only one of these
interfaces.
IM151-7 CPU as time slave

As a time slave, the IM151-7 CPU interface module receives synchronization frames from
exactly one time master and accepts this time as its own internal time of the IM151-7 CPU.


Communication
IM151-7 CPU as time master

As time master, the IM151-7 CPU interface module broadcasts clock synchronization frames
at parameterized synchronization intervals to synchronize other stations on the connected
subnet.
Requirement: The clock of the IM151-7 CPU interface module is no longer in default state.
The clock must have been set at least once.
Clock synchronization as time master starts:
● As soon as you initialize the time by means of SFC 0 "SET_CLK", or programming device
function.
● Using another time master, if the IM151-7 CPU interface module is also parameterized
via MPI/DP interface for operation as time slave.
Note
The clock of the IM151-7 CPU interface module is not set:
 in factory state
 after reset to factory settings by means of the mode selector switch
 after firmware updates
Example 1
If a DP master module is inserted and the IM151-7 CPU is configured as time slave at this
interface, clock synchronization cannot be operated at the combined MPI / DP interface if it
is configured as DP interface (because only time slave functionality could be set there, but
time slave is only possible at one interface).
Example 2
If a DP master module is inserted and the IM151-7 CPU is configured as time slave at this
interface, the IM151-7 CPU can be time master at the combined MPI / DP interface if the
interface is configured as MPI interface.


Communication
3.3.10 Data consistency
Properties
A data area is consistent if it can be read or written to from the operating system as a
consistent block. Data exchanged collectively between the stations should belong together
and originate from a single processing cycle, that is, be consistent. If the user program
contains a programmed communication function, for example, access to shared data with "X-
SEND" / "XRCV", access to that data area can be coordinated by means of the "BUSY"
parameter itself.
With PUT/GET functions

For S7 communication functions, such as PUT / GET or write / read via OP communication,
which do not require a block in the user program on the IM151-7 CPU interface module
(acting as a server), allowances must be made in the programming for the extent of the data
consistency. The PUT / GET functions for S7 communication, or for read / write variables via
OP communication, are executed at the IM151-7 CPU interface module´s cycle control point.
In order to ensure a defined process interrupt reaction time, communication variables are
copied consistently in blocks of up to 240 bytes to/from the user memory at the operating
system's cycle control point. Data consistency is not guaranteed for larger data areas.
Note
If defined data consistency is required, the length of the communication variables in the user
program of the IM151-7 CPU interface module must not exceed 240 byte.


Communication
3.4 S7 connections
3.4 S7 connections
3.4.1 S7 connection as communication path

An S7 connection is established when S7 modules communicate with one another. This S7
connection is the communication path.
Note
Global data communication as well as communication via PROFIBUS DP does not require
S7 connections.
Each communication link requires S7 connection resources on the IM151-7 CPU interface
module for the entire duration of this connection.
Thus, each IM151-7 CPU interface module is provided with a specific number of S7
connection resources. These are used by various communication services (PG / OP
communication, S7 communication or S7 basic communication).
Connection points
An S7 connection between modules with communication capability is established between
connection points. The S7 connection always has two connection points: The active and
passive connection points:
● The active connection point is assigned to the module that establishes the S7 connection.
● The passive connection point is assigned to the module that accepts the S7 connection.
Any module that is capable of communication can thus act as an S7 connection point. At the
connection point, the established communication link always uses one S7 connection of the
module concerned.
Transition point
If you use the routing functionality, the S7 connection between two modules capable of
communication is established across a number of subnets. These subnets are
interconnected via a network transition. The module that implements this network transition
is known as a router. The router is thus the point through which an S7 connection passes.
Each IM 151-7 CPU interface module (with DP master module) can be a router for an S7
connection. You can establish a certain maximum number of routing connections. This does
not limit the data volume of the S7 connections.
See also
Connection resources for routing (Page 50)


Communication
3.4 S7 connections
3.4.2 Assignment of S7 connections

There are several ways to allocate S7 connections on a communication-capable module:
● Reservation during configuration
● Assigning connections in the program
● Allocating connections during commissioning, testing and diagnostics routines
● Allocating connections for OCM services
Reservation during configuration

One connection resource each is automatically reserved on the IM151-7 CPU interface
module for programming device and OP communication. Whenever you need more
connection resources (for example, when connecting several OPs), configure this increase in
the IM151-7 CPU interface module properties dialog box in STEP 7.
Assigning connections in the program

The user program establishes the connection with S7 basic communication. The connection
is established by the operating system of the IM151-7 CPU interface module and the
corresponding S7 connections are assigned.
Using connections for commissioning, testing and diagnostics

An active online function on the engineering station (programming device /PC with STEP 7)
assigns S7 connections for programming device communication:
● An S7 connection resource for programming device communication which was reserved
in your IM151-7 CPU interface module hardware configuration is assigned to the
engineering station, that is, it just needs to be allocated.
● If all reserved S7 connection resources for programming device communication are
allocated, the operating system automatically assigns a free S7 connection resource
which has not yet been reserved. If no more connection resources are available, the
engineering station cannot communicate online with the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
Allocating connections for OCM services

An online function on the HMI station (OP/TP/... with WinCC) is used for assigning S7
connection resources for the OP communication:
● An S7 connection resource for OP communication which was reserved in your IM151-
7 CPU interface module hardware configuration is assigned to the HMI station, that is, it
just needs to be allocated.
● If all reserved S7 connection resources for OP communication are allocated, the
operating system automatically assigns a free S7 connection resource which has not yet
been reserved. If no more connection resources are available, the HMI station cannot
communicate online with the IM151-7 CPU interface module.


Communication
3.4 S7 connections
Chronological order in which S7 connection resources are assigned

When you program your project in STEP 7, the system generates parameter assignment
blocks which are read by the modules in the startup phase. This allows the module's
operating system to reserve or assign the relevant S7 connection resources. This means, for
example, that OPs cannot access an S7 connection resource that has been reserved for
programming device communication. If the IM151-7 CPU interface module has S7
connection resources that have not been reserved, these can be used freely. These S7
connection resources are allocated in the order they are requested.
Example
If there is only one free S7 connection left on the IM151-7 CPU interface module, you can
still connect a programming device to the bus. The programming device can then
communicate with the IM151-7 CPU interface module. However, the S7 connection will
always be used if the PG is communicating with the IM151-7 CPU interface module. If you
connect an OP to the bus while the programming device is not communicating, the OP can
establish a connection to the IM151-7 CPU interface module. Since an OP maintains its
communication link at all times, in contrast to the PG, you cannot subsequently establish
another connection via the PG.
3.4.3 Distribution and availability of S7 connection resources
Distribution of connection resources
Table 3- 12 Distribution of connections
Communication service Distribution

Programming device communication In order to avoid allocation of connection resources being dependent only on
OP communication the chronological sequence in which various communication services are
requested, connection resources can be reserved for these services.
S7 basic communication
For PG and OP communication, at least one connection resource is reserved
by default.
The following table and the technical specifications for the IM151-7 CPU
interface module contain the configurable S7 connections and the default
setting. You "redistribute“ the connection resources by setting the relevant
IM151-7 CPU interface module parameters in STEP 7.
S7 communication Available connection resources that are not specially reserved for a service
(programming device / OP communication, S7 basic communication) are used
for this.
Routing PG functions Together with the DP master module, the IM 151-7 CPU interface module has
a number of connection resources available for routing purposes.
These connections are available in addition to the connection resources.
The subsection below shows the number of connection resources.
Global data communication This communication service requires no S7 connection resources.
PROFIBUS DP This communication service requires no S7 connection resources.


Communication
3.4 S7 connections
Availability of connection resources
Table 3- 13 Availability of connection resources
Interface module Total number Reserved for Free

connection S7 connections
Programming OP S7 basic
resources device communication communication
communication
IM151-7 CPU 12 1 to 11 1 to 11 0 to 10 Displays all non-
default 1 default 1 default 0 reserved S7
connections as free
connections.
3.4.4 Connection resources for routing
Number of connection resources for routing

In addition to the S7 connection resources, a maximum of four connection resources are
available on the DP master module of the IM151-7 CPU interface module for the routing
function. Routing is only possible if the DP master module is connected and configured.
Example for IM151-7 CPU

The IM 151-7 CPU interface module makes available 12 connection resources:
● Reserve two connection resources for programming device communication.
● Reserve two connection resources for OP communication.
● Reserve 3 connection resources for S7 basic communication.
This leaves 5 S7 connections available for any communication services, e.g. S7
communication, OP communication, etc.
In addition, 4 routing connections via the CPU are possible.


Communication
3.5 DPV1
3.5 DPV1
New automation and process engineering tasks require the range of functions performed by
the existing DP protocol to be extended. In addition to cyclical communication functions,
acyclical access to non-S7 field devices is another important requirement of our customers,
and was implemented in the EN 50170 standard. In the past, acyclic access was only
possible with S7 slaves. The standard concerning distributed I/Os (EN 50170) has been
further developed. All the changes concerning new DPV1 functions are included in IEC
61158/ EN 50170, volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Definition DPV1
The term DPV1 is defined as a functional extension of the acyclic services (to include new
interrupts, for example) provided by the DP protocol.
Availability
Together with the DP master module you can operate the IM 151-7 CPU interface module as
a DP master via the expanded DPV1 functionality.
Requirement for using the DPV1 functionality with DP slaves

For DPV1 slaves from other vendors, you will need a GSD file conforming to EN 50170,
revision 3 or later.
Extended functions of DPV1

● Use of any DPV1 slaves from external vendors (in addition to the existing DPV0 and S7
slaves, of course).
● Selective handling of DPV1-specific interrupt events by new interrupt blocks.
● Reading/writing SFBs that conform to standards to the data record (although this can only
be used for centralized I/O modules).
● User-friendly SFB for reading diagnostics.


Communication
3.5 DPV1
Interrupt blocks with DPV1 functionality
Table 3- 14 Interrupt blocks with DPV1 functionality
OB Functionality
OB 40 Process interrupt
OB 55 Status interrupt
OB 56 Update interrupt
OB 57 Vendor-specific interrupt
OB 82 Diagnostic interrupt
Note
You can now also use organization blocks OB40 and OB82 for DPV1 interrupts.
System blocks with DPV1 functionality
Table 3- 15 System function blocks with DPV1 functionality
SFB Functionality
SFB 52 Read data record from DP slave or centralized I/O module
SFB 53 Write data record to DP slave or centralized I/O module
SFB 54 Read additional alarm information from a DP slave or a centralized I/O module in
the relevant OB
SFB 75 Set any interrupts for intelligent slaves
Note
You can also use SFB 52 to SFB 54 for centralized I/O modules.
Reference
For additional information on the above blocks can be found in the System and Standard
Functions for S7-300/400 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1214574)
reference manual, or in the STEP 7 Online Help


Memory concept 4
4.1 Memory areas and retentive memory
4.1.1 Memory areas of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
The three memory areas of your IM 151-7 CPU interface module
,0&38 /RDGPHPRU\
6,(0(16
6,0$7,&
0HPRU\
LVDYDLODEOHRQWKH6,0$7,&
0LFUR
&DUG
0LFUR0HPRU\&DUG
6\VWHPPHPRU\
:RUNPHPRU\
Load memory
The load memory is located on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. The size of the load
memory corresponds exactly to the size of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. It is used to
store code blocks, data blocks and system data (configuration, connections, module
parameters, etc.). Blocks that are identified as non runtime-related are stored exclusively in
load memory. You can also store all the configuration data for your project on the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card.
Note
User programs can only be downloaded and the IM151-7 CPU interface module can only be
used if the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is inserted in the interface module.
System memory
The system memory is integrated in the IM151-7 CPU interface module and cannot be
extended.
It contains
● The address areas for address area memory bits, timers and counters
● The process image of the I/Os
● Local data


Memory concept
Work memory
The work memory is integrated in the IM151-7 CPU interface module and cannot be
extended. It is used to run the code and process user program data. Programs only run in
work memory and system memory.
4.1.2 Retentivity of load memory, system memory and RAM

Your IM151-7 CPU interface module is equipped with a maintenance-free retentive memory,
i.e. its operation does not require a back-up battery. Data is kept in retentive memory across
POWER OFF and restart (warm start).
Retentive data in load memory

Your program in the load memory is always retentive. It is stored on the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card, where it is protected against power failure or CPU memory restart.
The configuration data for the interface of the IM151-7 CPU interface module will be stored
retentively in the load memory of an SDB.
Retentive data in system memory

In your configuration (Properties of IM151-7 CPU, Retentivity tab), specify which part of
memory bits, timers and counters should be kept retentive and which of them are to be
initialized with "0" on restart (warm restart).
The diagnostic buffer, MPI address (and transmission rate), and runtime meter data are
generally stored in the retentive memory area on the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
Retentivity of the MPI address and transmission rate ensures that your IM151-7 CPU
interface module can continue to communicate, even after a power loss, memory reset, or
loss of communication parameters (e.g. due to removal of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
or deletion of communication parameters).
Only the last 100 entries in the diagnostics buffer are retentive with POWER OFF / POWER
ON.
Retentive data in RAM

Therefore, the contents of retentive DBs are always retentive at restart and POWER OFF /
POWER ON. Retentive data blocks can be uploaded to the work memory in accordance with
the maximum limit allowed by the work memory.
The IM 151-7 CPU interface module also supports non-retentive DBs. Non-retentive DBs are
initialized from the load memory with their initial values whenever a restart is performed or
with POWER OFF / POWER ON. Non-retentive data blocks and code blocks can be loaded
in accordance with the maximum work memory limit.
64 KB of RAM can be used for retentive data blocks in the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.


Memory concept
See also
Properties of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (Page 61)
4.1.3 Retentivity of memory objects
Retentive behavior of the memory objects

The table below shows the retentive behavior of memory objects during specific operating
state transitions.
Table 4- 1 Retentive behavior of the memory objects
Memory object Operating state transition

POWER OFF / STOP Memory reset
POWER ON → RUN
User program / data (load memory) X X X
 Retentive behavior of the DBs for Can be set in the Properties of the –
the IM 151-7 CPU interface DBs in STEP 7 .
module
Bit memory, timers and counters X X –
configured as retentive data
Diagnostics buffers, operating hour X1 X X
counters
MPI address, baud rate X X X
(or DP address, transmission rate of
MPI / DP interface of the
IM151-7 CPU, if it is parameterized
as DP node)
X = retentive; – = not retentive
1Only the last 100 entries in the diagnostics buffer are retained in the event of a POWER
OFF / POWER ON.


Memory concept
Retentive behavior of a DB with the IM 151-7 CPU interface module

For the IM 151-7 CPU interface module you can specify in STEP 7 or via SFC 82
"CREA_DBL" (parameter ATTRIB -> NON_RETAIN bit), whether, in response to a POWER
ON / OFF or RUN-STOP, a DB
● Keeps the actual values (retentive DB), or
● Accepts the initial values from load memory (non-retentive DB)
Table 4- 2 Retentive behavior of the DBs with the IM 151-7 CPU interface module
After a POWER OFF / POWER ON or restart of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module, the DB should...
Receive the initial values Retain the last actual values
(non-retentive DB) (retentive DB)
Reason: Reason:
After a POWER OFF / POWER ON and restart After a POWER OFF / POWER ON and restart
(STOP-RUN) of the IM 151-7 CPU interface (STOP-RUN) of the IM 151-7 CPU interface
module, the actual values of the DB are non- module, the actual values of the DB are retained.
retentive. The DB receives the start values from
load memory.
Requirement in STEP 7: Requirement in STEP 7:
 The "Non-retain" check box must be  The "Non-retain" check box must be activated
activated in the block properties of the DB, or in the block properties of the DB, or
 a non-retentive DB was generated with SFC  A retentive DB was generated with SFC 82.
82 "CREA_DBL" and the associated block
attribute (ATTRIB -> NON_RETAIN bit).


Memory concept
4.1.4 Address areas of system memory

The system memory of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module is broken down into address
areas (refer to the table below). In a corresponding operation of your user program, you
address data directly in the relevant address area.
Address areas of system memory
Table 4- 3 Address areas of system memory
Address areas Description

Process image of inputs At every start of an OB 1 cycle, the IM 151-7 CPU interface
module reads the inputs from the input modules and saves the
values to the process image of the inputs.
Process image of outputs During its cycle, the program calculates the values for the outputs
and writes these to the process image of outputs. At the end of
the OB 1 cycle, the IM 151-7 CPU interface module writes the
calculated output values to the output modules.
Bit memory This area provides memory for saving the intermediate results of
a program calculation.
Timers Timers are available in this area.
Counters Counters are available in this area.
Local data Temporary data in a code block (OB, FB, FC) is saved to this
memory area while the block is being edited.
Data blocks See section Recipes (Page 68) and Measured value log files
(Page 70).
Reference
The address areas of your IM 151-7 CPU interface module are listed in the S7-300-CPUs
and ET 200-CPUs Instruction List


Memory concept
I/O process image

When the user program addresses the input (I) and output (Q) address areas, it does not
query the signal states of digital electronic modules; instead, it accesses a memory area in
the IM 151-7 CPU interface module system memory. This particular memory area is the
process image.
The process image is organized in two sections: The process image of inputs, and the
process image of outputs.
Advantages of the process image
In contrast to direct access of the input / output modules, accessing the process image has
the advantage that a consistent image of the process signals is made available to the
IM 151-7 CPU interface module during cyclic program execution. When the signal status at
an input module changes during program execution, the signal status in the process image is
maintained until the image is updated in the next cycle. Moreover, because the process
image is stored in the IM 151-7 CPU interface module system memory, access is
significantly faster than direct access to the electronic modules.
Process image update
The operating system updates the process image periodically. The figure below shows the
sequence of this operation within a cycle.
6WDUWXS %RRWSURJUDP
:ULWHVWKHSURFHVVRXWSXWLPDJH
3,4
WRWKHPRGXOHV
&\FOHWLPH
3,, 5HDGVWKHLQSXWVIURPWKHPRGXOHVDQG
XSGDWHVWKHGDWDLQWKHSURFHVVLQSXW
LPDJH
8VHUSURJUDP
([HFXWHVWKHXVHUSURJUDP
2%DQGDOOWKHEORFNVFDOOHGLQLW
&&326


Memory concept
Variable process image

In STEP 7, you can set the size of the I/O process image to any value from 0 to 2048 bytes
for the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
Please observe the following::
Note
Currently, the dynamic setting of the process image only affects its update at the cycle
control point. That is, the process input image is only updated up to the set PII size with the
corresponding values of the peripheral input modules existing within this address area, or the
values of the process output image up to the set POI size are written to the peripheral output
modules existing within this address area.
This set size of the process image is ignored with respect to the STEP 7 commands used to
access the process image (for example U I100.0, L IW200, = Q20.0, T AD150, or the
corresponding indirect addressing commands). However, up to the maximum size of the
process image (that is, up to I/O byte 2047), these commands do not return any
synchronous access errors, but rather access the permanently available internal memory
area of the process image.
The same applies to the use of actual parameters of block calls from the I/O area (area of
the process image).
Particularly if these process image limits were changed, you should check to which extent
your user program continues to access the process image in the area between the set and
the maximum process image size. If such access is to continue to take place, this means
that inputs on the I/O module that change may not be detected or that outputs may not really
be written to the output module without an error message being generated.


Memory concept
Local data
Local data store:
● The temporary variables of code blocks
● The start information of the OBs
● Transfer parameters
● Intermediate results
Temporary Variables
When you create blocks, you can declare temporary variables (TEMP) which are only
available during block execution and then overwritten again. These local data have fixed
length in each OB. Local data must be initialized prior to the first read access. Each OB also
requires 20 bytes of local data for its start information.
The IM 151-7 CPU interface module has memory for storing temporary variables (local data)
of recently executed blocks. This memory is divided among the priority classes into partitions
of equal size. Each priority class has its own local data area.
CAUTION
All temporary variables (TEMP) of an OB and its nested blocks are stored in local data.
When using complex nesting levels for block processing, you may cause an overflow in the
local data area.
The IM 151-7 CPU interface module will change to STOP mode if the permitted length of
the local data for a priority class is exceeded.
Make allowances for local data space required for synchronous error OBs. This is assigned
to the respective triggering priority class.
See also
Retentivity of load memory, system memory and RAM (Page 54)


Memory concept
4.1.5 Properties of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card as a memory module for the IM 151-7 CPU interface module
Your IM151-7 CPU interface module uses a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card as memory
module. It can be used as load memory or as a portable storage medium.
Note
The IM151-7 CPU interface module requires the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for operation.
The following data are stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card:
● User programs (all blocks)
● Archives and recipes
● Configuration data (STEP 7 projects)
● Data for operating system update and backup
Note
You can either store user and configuration data or the operating system on the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card.
Properties of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card ensures maintenance-free and retentive operation of the
IM 151-7 CPU interface module .
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card copy protection

Your SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has an internal serial number that implements an MMC
copy protection. You can read this serial number from the SSL partial list 011CH index 8
using SFC 51 "RDSYSST". If the reference and actual serial number of your SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card are not the same, program a STOP command in a know-how-protected
module, for example.
Reference
● on the SSL partial list refer to the S7-300-CPUs and ET 200-CPUs Instruction list
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/31977679) or the System and
● For memory reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module go to section Memory reset of
the IM151-7 CPU interface module using the mode selector switch (Page 93).


Memory concept
4.2 Memory functions
Useful life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

The life of an SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends mainly on the following factors:
1. The number of delete or programming cycles
2. External influences, such as ambient temperature.
At ambient temperatures up to 60 °C, up to 100,000 delete/write operations can be
performed on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
CAUTION
To prevent data losses, do not exceed this maximum of delete/write operations.
See also
Retentivity of load memory, system memory and RAM (Page 54)
Operating and display elements of the IM151-7 CPU interface module (Page 17)
4.2.1 General: Memory functions
Memory functions
Memory functions are used to generate, modify or delete entire user programs or specific
blocks. You can also ensure that your project data are retained by archiving these. If you
created a new user program, use a programming device/PC to download the complete
program to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.


Memory concept
4.2.2 Downloading user programs via SIMATIC Micro Memory Card to the IM 151-7
CPU interface module
User program download

The entire user program is downloaded from your PG / PC to the IM 151-7 CPU interface
module via the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. The previous content of the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card is deleted in the process. Blocks use the load memory area as specified under
"Load memory requirements" in "General block properties".
The figure shows the load and work memory of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
3URJUDPPLQJGHYLFH
6,(0(16
&DUG
0HPRU\
0LFUR
6,0$7,&
6DYHGRQWKH /RDGPHPRU\ :RUNPHPRU\

KDUGGULYH
&RGHEORFNV &RGHEORFNV
6HTXHQFHUHODWHG
SDUWVRIWKHFRGH
'DWDEORFNV 'DWDEORFNV DQGGDWDEORFNV
DVZHOODV
FRQILJXUDWLRQGDWD
6\VWHPGDWDEORFNV 6\VWHPGDWDEORFNV
&RPPHQWV
6\PEROV
1:If not all of the work memory area is retentive, the retentive part is indicated in the STEP 7
module status as retentive memory. You cannot run the program until all the blocks are
downloaded.
Note
This function is only permitted if the IM 151-7 CPU interface module is in STOP mode. Load
memory is cleared if the load operation could not be completed due to power loss or illegal
block data.


Memory concept
4.2.3 Handling blocks
4.2.3.1 Encryption of blocks
Important information
Note
Supported blocks
S7 Block Privacy can be used to encrypt only function blocks (FBs) and functions (FCs).
Once blocks have been encrypted in STEP 7 they can no longer be edited or monitored. Nor
can any test or commissioning functions, such as status blocks or breakpoints, be
performed.
Requirement
The "S7 Block Privacy" extension package supplied with STEP 7 must be installed. Only by
this means can blocks be hard encrypted.
General procedure
In order to encrypt the blocks, proceed as follows:
1. In SIMATIC Manager, right-click the block container and select "Block Privacy ...".
2. The "S7-Block Privacy" tool is launched.
3. In the block browser of "S7-Block Privacy", select the desired block (multiple selections
can be made).
4. Right click on the block to be encrypted, and select "Encrypt block...". The "Block
encryption" dialog box opens.
5. Select whether decompilation information should also be encrypted.
Note
If you deactivate the check box, there is no way the block can be decompiled.
6. Enter a code of at least 12 characters in both fields. Make sure the code is securely
stored. Press the "OK" button to start the encryption.
Result: Your block is now encrypted. This is indicated by the following symbols:
Block that can be decompiled
Block that cannot be decompiled


Memory concept
Note
Run time for the command
Typically the run time for the command is extended because the encrypted blocks could not
be executed in a fully optimized manner. The final cycle time can only be determined with
encrypted blocks.
Note
Extended run times for POWER ON/memory reset/download
The ramp-up time for the CPU, the time required for memory reset and the loading time of
blocks can be extended significantly.
For more information please refer to the STEP 7 Online Help under "S7 Block Privacy".
4.2.3.2 Download of new blocks or delta downloads

There are two ways to download additional user blocks or download deltas:
● Download of blocks: You have already created a user program and downloaded it to the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM 151-7 CPU interface module. You then want to
add new blocks to the user program. In this case you do not need to reload the entire
user program to the MCC. Instead you only need to download the new blocks to the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (this reduces the download times for highly complex
programs).
● Delta download: In this case, you only download the deltas in the blocks of your user
program. In the next step, perform a delta download of the user program, or only of the
changed blocks to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, using the programming device/PC.
WARNING
The delta down of block / user programs overwrites all data stored under the same
name on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
The data of dynamic blocks are transferred to RAM and activated after the block is
downloaded.
4.2.3.3 Uploading blocks

In contrast to downloading, uploading involves the transfer of individual blocks or a complete
user program from the IM 151-7 CPU interface module to the programming device / PC. In
doing so, the blocks have the content of the last download in the IM 151-7 CPU interface
module. Dynamic DBs form the exception, because their actual values are transferred.
Uploading blocks or the user program from the IM 151-7 CPU interface module with STEP 7
does not affect the memory assignment of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.


Memory concept
4.2.3.4 Deleting blocks

When you delete a block, it is deleted from load memory. In STEP 7, you can also delete
blocks with the user program (DBs also with SFC 23 "DEL_DB"). RAM used by this block is
released.
4.2.3.5 Compressing blocks

When data are compressed, gaps which have developed between memory objects in load
memory/RAM as a result of load/delete operations will be eliminated. This releases free
memory in a continuous block. You can compress both in STOP mode as well as in RUN
mode of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
4.2.3.6 Promming (RAM to ROM)

When writing the RAM content to ROM, the actual values of the DBs are transferred from
RAM to load memory to form the start values for the DBs.
Note
This function is only permitted if the IM 151-7 CPU interface module is in STOP mode. Load
memory is cleared if the function could not be completed due to power loss.


Memory concept
4.2.4 CPU memory reset and restart
Memory reset
After inserting or removing a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, a complete memory reset
restores the IM 151-7 CPU interface module to defined conditions in order to make a
restart (warm start) possible. When resetting the IM 151-7 CPU interface module, the
memory management of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module is reestablished. Blocks in load
memory are retained. All dynamic runtime blocks are transferred once again from load
memory to RAM, in particular to initialize the data blocks in RAM (restore initial values).
Restart (warm start)

● All retentive DBs retain their current values. Non-retentive DBs are reset to their initial
values.
● The values of all retentive M, C, T are retained.
● All non-retentive user data are initialized:
– M, C, T, I, O with "0"
● All run levels are initialized.
● The process images are deleted.
Reference
Also read section Memory reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module using the mode
selector switch (Page 93).


Memory concept
4.2.5 Recipes
Introduction
A recipe represents a collection of user data. You can implement a simple recipe concept
using static DBs. In this case, the recipes should have the same structure (length). One DB
should exist per recipe.
Processing sequence
Recipe is written to load memory:
● The individual data records of the recipes are created as static DBs in STEP 7 and then
downloaded to the IM 151-7 CPU interface module. Therefore, recipes only use load
memory, rather than RAM.
Working with recipe data:
● SFC83 "READ_DBL" is called in the user program to copy the data record of a current
recipe from the DB in load memory to a static DB that is located in work memory. As a
result, the RAM only has to accommodate the data of one record. The user program can
now access data of the current recipe. The figure below shows how to handle recipe
data:
/RDGPHPRU\
6,0$7,&0LFUR
0HPRU\&DUG :RUNPHPRU\
,0&38
5HFLSH 6)&5($'B'%/
&XUUHQW
5HFLSH UHFLSH
6)&:5,7B'%/
5HFLSHQ


Memory concept
Saving a modified recipe:

● The data of new or modified recipe data records generated during program execution can
be written to load memory. To do this, call SFC 84 "WRIT_DBL" in the user program. The
data written to load memory are portable and retentive on Memory reset. You can backup
modified records (recipes) by uploading and saving these in a single block to the
programming device/PC.
Note
Active system functions SFC82 to 84 (active access to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card)
have a distinct influence on programming device functions (for example, block status,
variable status, download block, upload, open). This typically reduces performance
(compared to passive system functions) by a factor of 10.
Note
CAUTION
Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card while it
is being accessed by a write operation. In this case, you may have to delete the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card on your PG, or format the card in the IM151-7 CPU
interface module.
Never remove a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in RUN mode. Always remove it when
power is off or when the IM151-7 CPU interface module is in STOP state, and when the
PG is not writing to the card. If the CPU is in STOP mode and you cannot not determine
whether or not a PG is writing to the card (e.g. load/delete block), disconnect the
communication lines.


Memory concept
4.2.6 Measured value log files
Introduction
Measured values are generated when the IM151-7 CPU interface module executes the user
program. These measured values are to be logged and analyzed.
Processing sequence
Acquisition of measured values:
● The IM 151-7 CPU interface module writes all measured values to a DB (for alternating
backup mode in several DBs) which is located in the work memory.
Measured value logging:
● Before the data volume can exceed work memory capacity, you should call
SFC 84 "WRIT_DBL" in the user program to swap measured values from the DB to load
memory. The figure below shows how to handle measured value log files:
/RDGPHPRU\
6,0$7,&0LFUR
0HPRU\&DUG
:RUNPHPRU\
0HDVXUHGYDOXH 6)&&5($B'%/ ,0&38
0HDVXUHGYDOXH &XUUHQWPHDVXUHG
YDOXHV
6)&:5,7B'%/

0HDVXUHGYDOXHQ
● You can call SFC 82 "CREA_DBL" in the user program to generate new (additional) static
DBs in load memory which do not require RAM space.


Memory concept
Reference
For additional information on the block SFC 82 can be found in the System and Standard
Functions for S7-300/400 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1214574)
reference manual, or in the STEP 7 Online Help
Note
SFC 82 is terminated and an error message is generated if a DB already exists under the
same number in load memory and/or work memory.
The data written to load memory are portable and retentive on Memory reset.
Evaluation of measured values:
● Measured value DBs saved to load memory can be uploaded and evaluated by other
communication partners (programming device, PC, for example).
Note
Active system functions SFC82 to 84 (active access to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card)
have a distinct influence on programming device functions (for example, block status,
variable status, download block, upload, open). This typically reduces performance
(compared to passive system functions) by a factor of 10.
Note
With the IM 151-7 CPU interface module you can also generate non-retentive DBs using
SFC 82 (parameter ATTRIB -> NON_RETAIN bit).
Note


Memory concept
4.2.7 Backup of project data to SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Function principle
Using the Save project to Memory Card and Fetch project from Memory Card functions, you
can save all project data to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, and retrieve these at a later
time. For this operation, the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be located in the IM 151-7
CPU interface module or in the programming adapter of a programming device or PC.
Project data is compressed before it is saved to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, and
uncompressed on retrieval.
Note
In addition to project data, you may also have to store your user data on the MMC. You
should therefore first select a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with sufficient free memory.
A message warns you if the memory capacity on your SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is
insufficient.
The volume of project data to be saved corresponds with the size of the project's archive file.
Note
For technical reasons, you can only transfer the entire contents (user program and project
data) using the Save project to memory card action.


Mounting and connecting 5

5.1 Content
Where can I find what information?

You will find comprehensive information about fitting and connecting an ET 200S in the
relevant sections of the ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
The following sections will show you the differences and special features associated with
using an ET 200S with the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
5.2 Installing the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Requirement
The mounting rail is installed.
Procedure
1. Install the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
2. Mount the required terminal modules.
Note
Note the installation sequence
If you wish to extend the IM 151-7 CPU interface module with an optional DP master
module, you must first of all install the DP master module before you install the required
terminal modules.
3. Mount the terminating module.
Reference
The mounting is described in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System


Mounting and connecting

5.3 Connecting the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Introduction
You connect the supply voltage and PROFIBUS DP to the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
Requirements
● The IM151-7 CPU interface module is installed on the mounting rail.
● Wire the interface module with the supply voltage switched off.
● Observe the wiring rules in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System
Required tools
3 mm screwdriver
Power supply
You may only use SELV / PELV-type power supply units with a guaranteed electrically
isolated extra-low voltage (≤ 60 V DC).
Required accessories
● Cable with maximum 2.5 mm2 conductor cross section for the supply voltage
● PROFIBUS DP bus connector
Suitable bus connectors are listed in section Order numbers of accessories (Page 194).



Connecting PROFIBUS DP
Connect the PROFIBUS DP as follows:
1. Use a pre-fabricated PROFIBUS cable.
2. Plug the bus connector into the PROFIBUS DP socket.
3. Screw the bus connector into the connection socket.
Pin assignment for the bus connector:
View of the connection socket Terminal Signal Designation

1 – –
2 M24 external 24 V supply
3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B

4 RTS Request To Send

5 M5V2 Data reference potential (station)

6 P5V2 Supply plus (station)
7 P24 external 24 V supply
8 RxD / TxD-N Data line A
RS 485 interface
9 – –
Connecting the supply voltage

The voltage supply is over a connecting plug. When it ships, this is connected to the
connection for the supply voltage on the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
The connecting plug makes it possible to loop the voltage supply uninterrupted.
Pin assignment of the interface:
/ 0 ① 24 VDC (red)

② Ground (blue)
③ Ground (blue)
0
④ 24 VDC (red)
/

Connect the supply voltage as follows:

1. Strip the wires for the supply voltage to 10 mm.
2. Insert the individual cables into the spring-loaded terminal (round openings) of the cable
connector.
3. Insert the wired connector onto the 24 VDC terminal of the IM151-7 CPU interface
module.
4. Please ensure that there is sufficient strain relief.



5.4 Installing and connecting the DP master module

If you wish to extend the IM151-7 CPU interface module with an optional DP master module,
you can use the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a DP master. Connect the PROFIBUS
DP to the DP master module.
Requirements
● The mounting rail has been fitted (see the ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) Operating Instructions).
● The IM151-7 CPU interface module is installed on the mounting rail (see section Installing
the IM151-7 CPU interface module (Page 73)).
Note
You should install the required terminal module only having first installed the DP master
module.
Installing the DP master module

1. Suspend the DP master module in the mounting rail to the right of the IM151-7 CPU
interface module.
2. Rotate the DP master module to the back until it engages.
3. Slide the DP master module to the left until it audibly engages with the IM151-7 CPU
interface module.
,0&38 '3PDVWHU
PRGXOH

'3PDVWHULQWHUIDFH
Figure 5-1 Installing the DP master module



Connecting PROFIBUS DP
Connect the PROFIBUS DP as follows:
● Use a pre-fabricated PROFIBUS cable.
● Insert the bus connector in the X1 connection socket on the DP master module.
● Screw the bus connector into the connection socket.
Pin assignment for the bus connector:
View of the connection socket Terminal Signal Designation

1 – –
2 – –
3 RxD / TxD-P Data line B

4 RTS Request To Send

5 M5V2 Data reference potential (station)

6 P5V2 Supply plus (station)
7 – –
8 RxD / TxD-N Data line A
RS 485 interface
9 – –





Addressing 6
6.1 Addressing the I/O modules
6.1.1 Slot-oriented addressing of the centralized I/O modules
Slot-oriented addressing
A slot-orientated addressing is available only for the centralized I/O of the IM151-7 CPU
interface module. If the IM151-7 CPU interface module is started up without a configuration
loaded, the I/O modules are addressed by slot by default.
This is the digital or analog address set by default according to the type of I/O module (see
table below).
3URFHVVLPDJHGHIDXOWVHWWLQJ

SHUDQDORJPRGXOH
WHFKQRORJ\PRGXOH
,46(16(
E\WHV ','2PRGXOHVRU+LJK
)HDWXUHPRWRUVWDUWHU
E\WH SHUGLJLWDOPRGXOH
DSDUWIURP','2PRGXOHV
RUPRWRUVWDUWHU
Figure 6-1 Structure of the default address area


Addressing
Slot assignment
The figure below shows an ET 200S configuration with digital and analog electronic modules
as well as the technology modules and slot assignment.
6ORW
7HUPLQDWLRQ
30(SRZHUPRGXOH
&RXQW9N+]
'3PDVWHUPRGXOH
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
,0&38
',9'&
',9'&
$,57'
$28
66,
66,
Figure 6-2 Slots for the ET 200S
Address assignment
Depending on the slot, 1 byte is reserved in the address ranges of the IM151-7 CPU
interface module for digital I/Os and motor starters, and 16 bytes is reserved for analog I/Os,
technology modules, 4 IQ-SENSE and High Feature motor starters (up to 63 I/O modules).
The table below indicates the default address assignment for analog and digital modules per
slot for slot-oriented addressing.
Table 6- 1 Default address assignment for centralized I/O modules in an ET 200S with
IM151-7 CPU
Reserved address range Slot number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 … 66
Digital modules IM151-7 CPU 1 - 1 2 3 4 … 62
(except 8DI, 8DO
modules),
motor starters
Analog modules, - 272 288 304 320 … 1248
technology modules, to to to to to
4 IQ SENSE, 8DI, 8DO 287 303 319 335 1263
modules,
High Feature motor
starters
Power modules 2 256 272 288 304 320 … 1248
1 with X1 as MPI/DP interface and X2 as DP master interface
2 Diagnostics addresses (no user data)


Addressing
Note
The following digital modules are treated as analog or TF modules for default address
assignment purposes:
 6ES7131-4BF00-0AA0
 6ES7131-4BF50-0AA0
 6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0
 6ES7132-4BF00-0AB0
 6ES7132-4BF50-0AA0
 6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0
 6ES7131-4RD02-0AB0
Example of Slot-Oriented Address Assignment for I/O Modules

The figure below illustrates a sample ET 200S configuration, showing an example of the
address allocation for I/O modules. The addresses for the I/O modules are predefined in
default addressing.
6ORWQXPEHUV
,0
(76 &38
30 ', $, $2 '2

2FFXSLHGDGGUHVVHV

'LDJQRVWLFVDGGUHVV
Figure 6-3 Example of address assignment for I/O modules


Addressing
6.1.2 User-oriented addressing of the I/O Modules
User-oriented addressing
User-oriented module addressing is possible with both centralized and distributed I/Os.
User-oriented addressing means you can freely select
● Input addresses for modules and
● Output addresses for modules
within the range 0 to 2047 with byte-level granularity independently of one another. Assign
the addresses in STEP 7. Specify the module start address that forms the basis for all other
addresses of the module.
8VHURULHQWHGDGGUHVVLQJ

3URFHVVLPDJHGHIDXOWVHWWLQJ
Figure 6-4 Structure of the address area for user-oriented addressing
Note
If you are using PROFIBUS DP field devices, you must always configure the hardware in
STEP 7 HW Config. User-oriented addressing of modules is used automatically, and there is
no fixed slot addressing.
Advantage
Advantages of user-oriented addressing:
● You can make the best possible use of the available address spaces because there are
no "address gaps" between the modules.
● When creating standard software, you can specify addresses that are independent of the
configuration of the ET 200S station.


Addressing
6.2 Addressing on PROFIBUS DP
Overview
The relevant DP slaves must first be brought into service on the PROFIBUS DP before the
distributed I/Os can be addressed from the user program.
During this commissioning process:
● PROFIBUS addresses are assigned to the slaves
● Address ranges are assigned to the input / output modules or slots so that they can be
addressed from the user program. Slots without user data are given a diagnostics
address.
Additional information on commissioning the IM151-7 CPU interface module
● as DP slave (I slave) is available in the section Commissioning IM151-7 CPU as DP slave
(Page 112)
● as DP master is available in the section Commissioning IM151-7 CPU with DP master
module as DP master (Page 119).
User-oriented addressing of the distributed PROFIBUS I/Os

You must use user-oriented addressing for the distributed PROFIBUS DP I/Os.
Information can be found in the User-oriented addressing of the I/O modules (Page 82)
section.
Addressing consistent user data areas

The table below illustrates the points to consider with respect to communication in a
PROFIBUS DP master system if you want to transfer I/O areas with "Total length"
consistency.
For 1 to 32 byte data consistency on the PROFIBUS DP:

The address range of consistent data in the process image is automatically updated.
To read and write consistent data, you can also use SFC 14 "DPRD_DAT" and SFC 15
"DPWR_DAT". If the address range of consistent data is not in the process image, you must use
SFC 14 and SFC 15 to read and write consistent data.
The length in the SFC must tally with the length of the programmed area when accessing areas with
"Total length" consistency.
Direct access to consistent areas is also possible (e.g. L PEW or T PAW).
In a PROFIBUS DP system you can transfer up to 32 bytes of consistent data.


Addressing


Commissioning 7
7.1 Overview
This section contains important notes on commissioning which you should strictly observe in
order to avoid injury or damage to machines.
Note
Your commissioning phase is determined primarily by your application, so we can only offer
you general information, without claiming completeness of this topic.
Reference
Note the information about commissioning provided in the descriptions of your system
components and devices.
7.2 Commissioning procedure
7.2.1 Procedure: Commissioning the hardware
Hardware requirements
● ET 200S is installed
● ET 200S is connected
In case of networking the ET 200S with MPI or PROFIBUS:
● The MPI/PROFIBUS addresses are configured
● the terminating resistors on the segments are enabled


Commissioning
Recommended procedure: Hardware

Due to its modular structure and the many different expansion options, an ET 200S can be
very large and complex. It is therefore not a good idea to switch it on for the first time with all
the modules installed. Rather, we recommend a step-by-step commissioning procedure.
We recommend the following initial commissioning procedure for an ET 200S:
Table 7- 1 Recommended commissioning procedure: Hardware
Activity Remarks Information on this can be found

in section
An installation and wiring check - Commissioning check list
according to checklist (Page 88)
Disconnecting drive aggregates This prevents negative effects on your system as a -
and control elements result of program errors.
Tip: By redirecting data from your outputs to a data

block, you can always check the status at the
outputs
Preparing IM151-7 CPU Connecting a programming device Connecting the programming
device (PG) (Page 100)
Start up the power supply and Commission the power supply and the ET 200S Initial power on (Page 92)
ET 200S with the IM151-7 CPU with inserted IM151-7 CPU interface module.
and check the LEDs Check the LED displays of the IM151-7 CPU Debugging functions, diagnostics
interface module. and troubleshooting (Page 141)
Reset IM151-7 CPU memory - Memory reset of the IM151-7
and check the LEDs CPU interface module using the
mode selector switch (Page 93)
Commission the rest of the Plug the modules in according to the configuration ET 200S Distributed I/O System
modules and commission them. (http://support.automation.siemen
s.com/WW/view/en/1144348)
Operating Instructions
DANGER
Proceed step-by-step. Do not go to the next step unless you have completed the previous
one without error / error message.
Reference
Important information is available in section Debugging functions, diagnostics and
troubleshooting (Page 141).
See also
Procedure: Software commissioning (Page 87)


Commissioning
7.2.2 Procedure: Software commissioning
Requirements
● You have installed and connected your ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU.
● In order to utilize the full functionality of your IM151-7 CPU interface module, you require
STEP 7 as of V5.2 + SP1 + HSP219 or V5.5 + SP1.V5.5.
● In case of networking the ET 200S with MPI or PROFIBUS:
– The MPI/PROFIBUS addresses are configured
– The terminating resistors on the segment limits are enabled.
Note
Please observe the procedure for commissioning the hardware.
Recommended procedure: Software
Table 7- 2 Recommended commissioning procedure: Software
Activity Remarks Information can be found ...

 Switch on the programming device and run - in the Programming with STEP 7
SIMATIC Manager (http://support.automation.siemen
 Transferring the configuration and program to Manual
the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Debugging the I/Os Helpful functions are here:  in the Programming with
 Monitoring and modifying STEP 7 Manual
variables  in section Debugging
 Testing with program status functions, diagnostics and
troubleshooting (Page 141)
 Forcing
 Controlling the outputs in STOP
mode (PO enable)
Tip: Test the signals at the inputs
and outputs.
Commissioning PROFIBUS DP - in section Commissioning
PROFIBUS DP (Page 110)
Connecting the outputs Commissioning the outputs -
successively.
DANGER
Proceed step-by-step. Do not go to the next step unless you have completed the previous
one without error / error message.


Commissioning
7.3 Commissioning check list
Reaction to errors
React to errors as follows:
● Check the system with the help of the check list in the chapter below.
● Check the LED displays on all modules. The meaning is described in the ET 200S
Distributed I/O Device (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348)
Operating Instructions.
● If required, remove individual components to trace the error.
Reference
Important information is available in section Debugging functions, diagnostics and
troubleshooting (Page 141).
See also
Procedure: Commissioning the hardware (Page 85)
Introduction
Once you have installed and wired up your ET 200S, we advise you to check all the previous
steps once again.
The following tables give you instructions in the form of a checklist for checking your ET
200S. They also provide cross-references to sections containing additional information on
the relevant topic.
Mounting rail
The points to be checked are listed in the ET 200S Operating Instructions in chapter
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348)
Is the rail mounted firmly to the wall, in the frame or in the cabinet? Installing
Have you maintained the free space required? Installing


Commissioning
Concept of grounding and chassis ground
Have you established a low-impedance connection (large surface, large Wiring and assembly
contact area) to ground potential?
Is the profile rail properly connected to reference potential and ground Wiring and assembly
potential (direct electrical connection or ungrounded operation)?
Are all grounding points of electrically connected measuring instruments Appendix
and of the load power supply units connected to reference potentials?
Module installation and wiring
Are all the terminal modules, including the terminating module, installed Installing
correctly?
Are all the terminal modules wired up correctly? Wiring and assembly
Are all the power modules, electronic modules, ... correctly connected? Wiring and assembly


Commissioning
7.4 Commissioning the modules
7.4.1 Inserting/Replacing a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (MMC) as memory module

Your IM151-7 CPU interface module uses a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card as memory
module. You can use the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card as a load memory or a portable data
medium.
Note
You must have a connected SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in order to operate the
IM151-7 CPU interface module.
The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is not supplied as standard with the IM151-7 CPU
interface module.
Note
The IM151-7 CPU interface module goes into STOP and requests a memory reset when you
remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card while the IM151-7 CPU interface module is in
RUN state.
CAUTION
Data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be corrupted if you remove the card while it is
being accessed by a write operation. You may have to delete the SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card using the PG or format it in the IM151-7 CPU interface module if you remove it from
the live system.
DO NOT remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card when the system is in RUN state;
always shut down power or set the IM151-7 CPU interface module to STOP in order to
prevent any write access of a programming device. If the CPU is in STOP mode and you
cannot determine whether or not a programming device function is active (e.g. load / delete
block), disconnect the communication lines.
WARNING
Make sure that the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card to be inserted contains the proper user
program for the IM151-7 CPU interface module (for the system). The wrong user program
may have fatal processing effects.


Commissioning
Inserting/replacing the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

1. First of all, switch the IM151-7 CPU interface module to STOP.
2. Is there a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card inserted?
If yes, first of all ensure that no writing PG functions (e.g. downloading blocks) are
running. If you cannot ensure this, interrupt the communication connections of the
Press the ejector and remove the SIMATIC MMC.
An ejector ① is located on the frame of the module receptacle to enable you to remove
the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
Use a small screwdriver or ball-point pen to eject.
3. Insert the ("new") SIMATIC Micro Memory Card into the receptacle so that its beveled
edge points towards the ejector.
4. Gently press the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card into the IM151-7 CPU interface module
until it engages.
5. Perform a reset (refer to section Resetting the IM151-7 CPU interface module using the
mode selector switch (Page 93)).
,0&38
6,(0(16
6,0$7,&
0HPRU\
0LFUR
&DUG
Removing and inserting a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

After you replace a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in POWER OFF state, the IM151-7 CPU
interface module detects
● A physically identical SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with a different content
● A new SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the same content as the old SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card
It automatically performs a Memory reset after POWER ON.
Reference
Additional information about the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be found in the S7-300,
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12996906)
manual, in the Technical Data section.


Commissioning
7.4.2 Initial power on
Requirements
● You have installed and wired up the ET 200S.
● The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is inserted in the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
● The mode selector of your IM151-7 CPU interface module is set to STOP.
Initial power on of an ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU

Switch on the supply voltage for the ET 200S.
Result:
On the IM151-7 CPU interface module
● The ON LED lights up
● the STOP LED flashes at 2 Hz when the IM151-7 CPU interface module carries out an
automatic memory reset
● The STOP LED lights up after the memory reset.


Commissioning
7.4.3 Memory reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module using the mode selector
switch
When must I perform a memory reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module?
You must perform a memory reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module,
● When all retentive memory bits, timers and counters have been cleared and the initial
values of retentive data blocks in the load memory are to be used as actual values in the
work memory.
● if the retentive memory bits, timers and counters could cause unwanted responses after
"Load user program onto memory card" with the user program just downloaded to the
Reason: "Load user program onto memory card" does not delete the retentive areas.
● if the IM151-7 CPU interface module requests a memory reset with its STOP LED
flashing at 0.5 Hz intervals. Possible reasons for this request are listed in the table below.
Table 7- 3 Possible reasons for the request to reset the memory by the IM151-7 CPU interface
module
Reasons for the request to reset the Special features

memory by the IM151-7 CPU interface
module
The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has –
been replaced.
RAM error in the IM151-7 CPU –
interface module
Work memory is too small, i.e. not all IM151-7 CPU with inserted SIMATIC Micro Memory Card:
the blocks of the user program on a This causes continuous requests for a memory reset.
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be This may be prevented by formatting the SIMATIC Micro
loaded. Memory Card (see Formatting the SIMATIC Micro Memory
Attempts to load faulty blocks; if a Card (Page 96)).
wrong instruction was programmed, for For additional information on the way the SIMATIC Micro
example. Memory Card responds to a memory reset, see Memory
reset and restart (Page 67).
How to reset memory

There are two ways to reset the IM151-7 CPU interface module memory:
Memory reset using the mode selector Memory reset using the programming device
switch
... is described in this section. ... is only possible when the IM151-7 CPU interface
module is in STOP mode
(see STEP 7 Online Help).


Commissioning
Resetting the memory of the IM151-7 CPU using the mode selector switch
The following table contains the steps required to reset the memory of the IM151-7 CPU
interface module.
Table 7- 4 Steps for performing a memory reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Step Memory reset of IM151-7 CPU

1. Turn the key to STOP position. ①
2. Turn the key to MRES position. Hold the key in this position until the STOP LED lights up
for the second time and remains on (this takes 3 seconds). ②
Now release the key.
3. You must turn the key to MRES position again within 3 seconds and hold it there until the
STOP LED flashes (at 2 Hz). ③
You can now release the switch. When the IM151-7 CPU interface module has
completed the memory reset, the STOP LED stops flashing and lights up.
The memory reset has been carried out by the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
The procedure described in the table above is only required if you wish to reset the IM151-7
CPU interface module memory without this being requested by the IM151-7 CPU interface
module itself (STOP LED flashing slowly). If the IM151-7 CPU interface module prompts you
for a memory reset, you only have to turn the mode selector briefly to the MRES position to
initiate the memory reset operation.
The figure below shows how to use the mode selector switch to reset the IM151-7 CPU
interface module memory:
6723
/('
RQ
t
RII
V
PD[V
PLQV
,0&38
1 2 3
If the IM151-7 CPU interface module prompts you for another memory reset following a
successful memory reset operation, the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card may need to be
reformatted (see section Formatting the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (Page 96)).


Commissioning
STOP LED does not flash during the memory reset

What should I do if the STOP LED does not flash during the memory reset or if other LEDs
are lit?
1. You must repeat steps 2 and 3.
2. If the IM151-7 CPU interface module does not perform a memory reset again, you must
evaluate the diagnostics buffer of the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
What happens in the IM151-7 CPU interface module during a memory reset?
Table 7- 5 Internal processes in the IM151-7 CPU interface module during a memory reset
Event Action in the IM151-7 CPU interface module

Process in the 1. The IM151-7 CPU interface module deletes the entire user program in the work memory.
IM151-7 CPU 2. The IM151-7 CPU interface module deletes the retentive user data (flags, times, counters
interface module and DB contents).
3. The IM151-7 CPU interface module tests its hardware.
4. The IM151-7 CPU interface module copies the sequence-related content of the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card (load memory) to the work memory.
Tip: If the IM151-7 CPU interface module is unable to copy the content of the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card and requests a memory reset:
 Remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
 Memory reset of IM151-7 CPU
 Read the diagnostics buffer
Memory contents The user program is transferred back from the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card to the work memory
after reset and the memory utilization is indicated accordingly.
What's left?  Parameters of the MPI/DP interface:
– MPI address and highest MPI address as well as parameterized transmission rate or
– PROFIBUS address, highest PROFIBUS address, transmission rate, setting as active or
passive interface when the MPI/DP interface of the IM151-7 CPU is parameterized as DP
interface.
 Data in the diagnostics buffer. (Only the last 100 entries in the diagnostics buffer are retained in
the event of a POWER OFF / POWER ON.)
You can read the diagnostics buffer with the programming device (see STEP 7 Online Help).
 The content of the operating hours counter and the time.


Commissioning
Special feature: Interface parameters of the MPI/DP interface

The table below describes which interface parameters are valid after a CPU memory reset.
Memory reset ... MPI/DP parameters of the combined DP parameters of the DP master interface
MPI/DP interface with DP master module inserted
with inserted ... the MPI parameters on the SIMATIC ... the MPI parameters on the SIMATIC
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card Micro Memory Card or integrated read-only Micro Memory Card or integrated read-only
load memory are valid. load memory are valid.
If here no parameters are stored (SDB), the If no parameters are stored here (SDB),
previously set parameters stay valid. neither are any DP interface parameters
present.
without inserted ... are retained and valid. ... neither are any DP interface parameters
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card present.
7.4.4 Formatting the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
You must format the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the following cases
● The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card module type is not a user module.
● The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has not been formatted.
● The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is defective.
● The content of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is invalid.
The content of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has been identified as invalid.
● The "Load user program" operation was interrupted as a result of POWER OFF.
● The "Write RAM to ROM" operation was interrupted as a result of POWER OFF.
● Error when evaluating the module content during Memory reset.
● Formatting error, or formatting failed.
If one of these errors has occurred, the IM151-7 CPU interface module prompts for yet
another memory reset, even after the memory has already been reset. The card's content is
retained until the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is formatted, unless the "Load user program"
or "Write RAM to ROM" operation was interrupted as a result of POWER OFF.
The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is only formatted if there is a reason to do so (see above)
and not, for example, when you are prompted for a memory reset after a module is changed.
In this case, a switch to MRES triggers a normal memory reset for which the module content
remains valid.


Commissioning
Use the following steps to format your SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
CAUTION
Do not use the memory cards for other than SIMATIC purposes and do not format it with
third-party devices or Windows means. You overwrite the internal structure of the memory
card this way and it cannot be restored. This means the memory card will become useless
for SIMATIC devices.
If the IM151-7 CPU interface module is requesting a memory reset (STOP LED flashing
slowly), you can format the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the following switch operation:
1. Toggle the switch to the MRES position and hold it there until the STOP LED lights up
and remains on (after approx. 9 seconds).
2. Within the next three seconds, release the switch and toggle it once again to MRES
position. The STOP LED flashes to indicate that formatting is in progress.
Note
Always perform this sequence of operation within the specified time. Otherwise, the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card will not be formatted, but rather returns to memory reset
status.
See also
Memory reset of the IM151-7 CPU interface module using the mode selector switch
(Page 93)


Commissioning
7.4.5 Resetting to the as-delivered state
Delivery state of the IM151-7 CPU interface module

In the delivery state, the properties of the IM151-7 CPU interface module are set to the
following values:
Table 7- 6 Properties of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module in delivery state
Properties Value
MPI address 2
MPI transmission rate 187.5 Kbps
Retentive memory bits, timers, counters All retentive memory bits, timers and counters are
cleared
Set retentive area for memory bits, timers and Default setting
counters (16 memory bytes, no timers, 8 counters)
Contents of the diagnostics buffer cleared
Operating hours counter 0
Time-of-day 1.1.1994 00:00:00
Procedure
Proceed as follows to reset an IM151-7 CPU interface module to the delivery state using the
mode selector:
1. Switch off the power supply.
2. Remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card from the receptacle (see Inserting/replacing a
Micro Memory Card (Page 90)).
3. Keep the mode selector switch in the MRES position and switch the power supply on
again.
4. Wait until LED lamp image 1 from the subsequent overview is displayed.
5. Release the mode selector switch, set it back to MRES within 3 seconds and hold it in
this position.
6. The LED lamp image 2 from the subsequent overview is displayed.
This lamp image lights up while the reset operation is running (approximately 5 seconds).
During this period you can cancel the resetting procedure by releasing the mode selector.
7. Wait until LED lamp image 3 from the following overview is displayed and release the
mode selector again.
The IM151-7 CPU interface module is reset to the delivery state. It starts without buffering
(all LEDs are lit) and changes to the STOP mode.


Commissioning
Lamp images while resetting the IM151-7 CPU interface module

While you are resetting the IM151-7 CPU interface module to the delivery state, the LEDs
light up in succession in the following lamp images:
Table 7- 7 Lamp images
LED Color Lamp image 1 Lamp image 2 Lamp image 3

SF Red ⃞ ⃝ ∆
BF Red ⃞ ⃞ ⃞
ON Green ∆ ∆ ∆
FRCE Yellow ⃝ ⃞ ⃞
RUN Green ⃝ ⃞ ⃞
STOP Yellow ⃝ ⃞ ⃞
Legend:
∆ = LED lit;
⃞ = LED dark;
⃝ = LED flashes at 0.5 Hz
Note
If you remove an IM151-7 CPU interface module and re-use it in another place or place it in
storage, the IM151-7 CPU should be restored to its delivery state, because the interface
parameters of the MPI/DP interface are stored retentively.


Commissioning
7.4.6 Connecting the programming device (PG)
7.4.6.1 Connecting the PG to a node
Requirement
The PG must be equipped with an integrated MPI interface or an MPI card in order to
connect it via MPI.
Connecting a PG to the integrated MPI interface of the IM151-7 CPU

Interconnect the PG with the MPI interface of your IM151-7 CPU by way of a prefabricated
PG cable ①. You can also use a self-made connecting cable with PROFIBUS bus cable and
bus connectors. The figure below illustrates the connection between the PG and the
IM151-7 CPU.
,0&38
03,

3*
Number Designation
① PG cable used to interconnect the PG with the IM151-7 CPU
Procedure for PROFIBUS DP

The procedure is basically the same for PROFIBUS DP, if the interface of the IM151-7 CPU
interface module is set as PROFIBUS DP interface.


Commissioning
7.4.6.2 Connecting the PG to several nodes
Requirement
connect it to an MPI subnet.
Connecting the PG to several nodes

Use bus connectors to connect a PG which is permanently installed on the MPI subnet to the
other nodes of the MPI subnet.
The following figure shows two linked IM151-7 CPUs. The two interface modules are
connected via bus connectors.
,0&38
3*

,0&38
Number Designation
① PROFIBUS bus cable
② Connectors with enabled terminating resistors
See also
Configuring MPI and PROFIBUS subnets (Page 24)


Commissioning
7.4.6.3 Using the PG for commissioning or maintenance
Requirement
Using the PG for commissioning or maintenance

Use a stub cable to connect the commissioning and maintenance PG to the other subnet
nodes. The bus connector of this node must be equipped with a PG socket for this purpose.
The following figure below shows two linked IM151-7 CPUs to which a PG is connected.
,0&38
3*
,0&38
Number Designation
① Stub cable for connection between programming device and IM151-7 CPU
② Connectors with enabled terminating resistors
③ PROFIBUS bus cable for linking both IM151-7 CPUs


Commissioning
MPI addresses for service PGs

If there is no stationary PG, we recommend:
To connect a PG to an MPI subnet with "unknown" node addresses, set the following
addresses on the service PG:
● MPI address: 0
● Highest MPI address: 126
You then determine the highest MPI address on the MPI subnet with STEP 7 and match the
highest MPI address in the PG to that of the MPI subnet.
See also
Configuring MPI and PROFIBUS subnets (Page 24)


Commissioning
7.4.6.4 Connecting a PG to ungrounded MPI nodes
Requirement
Connecting a PG to ungrounded nodes of an MPI subnet

Connecting a PG to ungrounded nodes
If you configure ungrounded nodes of a subnet or an IM151-7 CPU interface module, you
may only connect an ungrounded PG to the subnet or IM151-7 CPU.
Connecting a grounded PG to the MPI
You want to operate with ungrounded nodes. If the MPI at the PG is grounded, you must
interconnect the nodes and the PG with an RS485 repeater. You must connect the
ungrounded nodes to bus segment 2 if the PG is connected to bus segment 1
(terminals A1 B1) or to the PG/OP interface.
The following figure shows an RS 485 repeater as interface between a grounded and an
ungrounded node of an MPI subnet.
,0&38
3*

%XVVHJPHQW %XVVHJPHQW
XQJURXQGHG JURXQGHGVLJQDOV
VLJQDOV
Number Designation
① Connectors with enabled terminating resistors
② RS485 Repeaters, with activated terminating resistors


Commissioning
7.4.7 Starting SIMATIC Manager
Introduction
SIMATIC Manager is a GUI for online/offline editing of S7 objects (projects, user programs,
blocks, hardware stations and tools).
The SIMATIC Manager lets you
● Manage projects and libraries,
● Call STEP 7 tools,
● Access the PLC (AS) online,
● Editing SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards.
Starting SIMATIC Manager

After installation, the SIMATIC Manager icon appears on the Windows desktop, and the Start
menu contains entry SIMATIC Manager under SIMATIC.
1. Run SIMATIC Manager by double-clicking the icon, or from the Start menu (same as with
all other Windows applications).
User interface
A corresponding editing tool is started up when you open the relevant objects. You start the
program editor by double-clicking the program block you want to edit (object-oriented start).
Online Help
The online help for the active window is always called by pressing F1.


Commissioning
7.4.8 Monitoring and modifying I/Os
The "Monitor and modify variables" tool

The STEP 7 "Monitor and modify variables" tool lets you:
● Monitor program variables in any format
● Editing (modifying) the status or content of variables in the IM151-7 CPU interface
module.
Creating a variable table

You have two options of creating a variable table (VAT):
● In the LAD / FBD / STL editor by selecting the PLC > Monitor/Modify Variables command
This table is also available directly online.
● In the SIMATIC Manager with the Blocks container open via menu item Insert New Object
> Variable table
This table created offline can be saved for future retrieval. You can also test it after
switching to online mode.
VAT structure:
In the VAT, every address to be monitored or modified (e.g. inputs, outputs) occupies one
row.
The meaning of the VAT columns is as follows:
Column text In this field ...

Address contains the absolute address of the variable
Icon contains the symbolic descriptor of the variables
This is identical to the specification in the Symbol Table.
Symbol comment shows the symbol comment of the Symbol Table
Status format contains the default format setting, e.g. HEX.
You can change the format as follows:
 right-click in the format field. The Format List opens.
or
 left-click in the format field until the relevant format appears
Status value shows the content of the variable at the time of update
Modify value is used to enter the new variable value (modify value)


Commissioning
Monitor variable
You have two options for monitoring variables:
● Updating the status values once via menu item Variable > Update Status Values
or
● Continuous update of status values via menu item Variable > Monitor
Modifying variables
To modify variables, proceed as follows:
1. Left-click the field Modify value of the relevant variable.
2. Enter the modify value according to the data type.
3. To update modify values once, select the menu item Variable > Activate Modify Value.
or
Enable modify values permanently via menu item Variable > Modify.
4. In the Monitor test function, verify the modify value entry in the variable.
Is the modify value valid?
You can disable the modify value entered in the table. An invalid value is displayed same as
a comment. You can re-enable the modify value.
Only valid modify values can be enabled.
Setting the trigger points

Trigger points:
● The "Trigger point for monitoring" determines the time of update for values of variables to
be monitored.
● The "Trigger point for modifying" determines the time for assigning the modify values to
the variables to be modified.
Trigger condition:
● The "Trigger condition for monitoring" determines whether to update values once when
the trigger point is reached or continuously every time the trigger point is reached.
● The "Trigger condition for modifying" determines whether to assign modify values once or
permanently to the variable to be modified.
You can customize the trigger points using the tool "Monitoring and Modifying Variables" in
the menu item Variable > Set Trigger... .
Special features
● If "Trigger condition for monitoring" is set to once , the menu items Variable > Update
Status Values or Variable > Monitor have the same effect, namely a single update.
● If "Trigger condition for modifying" is set to once , the menu items Variable > Update
Status Values or Variable > Modify have the same effect, namely a single assignment.
● If trigger conditions are set to permanent , the said menu items have different effects as
described above.
● If monitoring and modifying is set to the same trigger point, monitoring is executed first.
● If Process mode is set under Debug > Mode, values are not cyclically updated when
permanent modifying is set.
To correct or avoid error: Use the Force test function.


Commissioning
Saving/opening the variable table

Saving the VAT
1. After aborting or completing a test phase, you can save the variable table to memory. The
name of a variable table starts with the letters VAT, followed by a number from 0 to
65535; e.g. VAT5.
Opening VAT
1. Select the menu item Table > Open.
2. Select the project name in the Open dialog.
3. In the project window below, select the relevant program and mark the Blocks container.
4. In the block window, select the desired table.
5. Confirm with OK.
Creating a connection to the IM151-7 CPU interface module

The variables of a VAT represent dynamic quantities of a user program. To monitor or
modify variables, you will need to establish a connection with the relevant IM151-7 CPU
interface module. Each variable table can be linked to a different IM151-7 CPU interface
module.
Use the PLC > Connect to ... menu item to establish a connection to one of the following
IM151-7 CPU interface modules:
● Configured IM151-7 CPU interface module
● Directly connected IM151-7 CPU interface module
● Available IM151-7 CPU interface module ...
The table below lists the display of variables.
Interface modules The variables of the IM151-7 CPU interface module are displayed, ...
Configured IM151-7 CPU in S7 program (hardware station) of which the variable table is
interface module stored.
Directly connected IM151-7 that is connected directly to the programming device.
Available IM151-7 CPU that is selected in the dialog window.
interface module Use the PLC > Connect to ... > Available CPU ... menu item to
connect to an available IM151-7 CPU interface module. With this
step you can create a connection to any IM151-7 CPU interface
module in the network.


Commissioning
Controlling outputs in STOP mode of the IM151-7 CPU interface module

The function Enable PO resets the output disable signal for the peripheral outputs (PO).
This step enables you to control the PO when the IM151-7 CPU interface module is in STOP
mode.
In order to enable the POs, proceed as follows:
1. Select Table > Open the variable table (VAT) to open the variable table containing the
POs you want to modify, or activate the window containing the corresponding VAT.
2. To control the POs of the active VAT, use the PLC > Connect to ... menu item to
establish a connection to the required IM151-7 CPU interface module.
3. Use the PLC > Operating Mode menu item to open the Operating Mode dialog and
switch the IM151-7 CPU interface module to STOP mode.
4. Enter your values in the "Modify value" column for the PO you want to modify.
Examples:
PO: POB 7 modify value: 2#0100 0011
POW 2 W#16#0027
POD 4 DW#16#0001
5. Select Variable > Enable PO to set "Enable PO" mode.
6. Modify the PO by selecting Variable > Activate Modify Values. "Enable PO" mode
remains active until reset by selecting Variable > Enable PO once mode.
"Enable PO" is also terminated when the connection to the programming device is
dropped.
7. Return to step 4 if you want to set new values.
Note
If the IM151-7 CPU interface module changes its mode from STOP to RUN or STARTUP,
for example, a message is shown.
A message is also shown if the IM151-7 CPU interface module is in RUN mode and the
function "Enable PO" is selected.


Commissioning
7.5 Commissioning PROFIBUS DP
7.5.1 Commissioning the PROFIBUS DP network
Requirements
Requirements for commissioning a PROFIBUS DP network:
● A PROFIBUS DP network is installed.
● You have configured the PROFIBUS DP network using STEP 7 and have assigned a
PROFIBUS DP address and the address space to all the nodes.
● Note that you must also set address switches for some of the DP slaves (see the
description of the relevant DP slave).
● The software as shown in the following table is required for the IM151-7 CPU interface
module:
Table 7- 8 Software requirements for the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Interface module Order number Software required

IM151-7 CPU 6ES7151-7AA21-0AB0 as of STEP 7 V5.2 + SP1 + HSP219
or V5.5 + SP1
DP address ranges of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Table 7- 9 DP address ranges of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Address range IM151-7 CPU

Entire address range of 2048 bytes
inputs and outputs
Number of those in process image Bytes 0 to 2047 (can be set)
for I/Os Bytes 0 to 127 (preset)


Commissioning
DP diagnostics addresses
DP diagnostic addresses occupy 1 byte per DP master and DP slave in the input address
range. For example, at these addresses DP standard diagnostics can be called for the
relevant node (LADDR parameter of SFC 13). The DP diagnostics addresses are specified
in your configuration. If you do not specify any DP diagnostic addresses, STEP 7 assigns
these DP diagnostics addresses in descending order, starting at the highest byte address.
If there is an IM151-7 CPU interface module with DP master module as the master, assign
two different diagnostics addresses for S7 slaves:
● Diagnostics address of the slave (address for slot 0)
At this address all slave events are reported in the DP master (node proxy), e.g. node
failure.
● Diagnostics address of the module (address for slot 2)
Events are reported in the master (OB 82) at this address that affect the module (e.g.
STOP / RUN transition of an IM 151-7 CPU as an intelligent DP slave).
See also
Commissioning the IM151-7 CPU as DP slave (Page 112)
Commissioning the IM 151-7 CPU with DP master module as a DP master (Page 119)


Commissioning
7.5.2 Commissioning the IM151-7 CPU as DP slave
Requirements for commissioning

● The DP master is configured and programmed.
● You must parameterize the MPI/DP interface of your IM151-7 CPU interface module as
DP interface.
● Prior to commissioning, you must set the relevant parameters and configure the
IM151-7 CPU as DP slave. That means that, in STEP 7 you must
– "switch on" the IM151-7 CPU as DP slave,
– assign a PROFIBUS address to the IM151-7 CPU,
– assign a slave diagnostic address to the IM151-7 CPU,
– specify whether the DP master is an S7 DP master or another DP master,
– specify the address ranges for data exchange with the DP master.
● All other DP slaves are programmed and configured.
Additional Information
For additional information on configuration, refer to the STEP 7 online help.
GSD files
If you are working on an IM 308-C or third-party system, you require a GSD file to configure
the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a DP slave in a DP master system.
Note
If you wish to use the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a standard slave with the GSD file,
you must not activate the "Testing, Commissioning, Routing" checkbox in the DP interface
properties dialog box when you configure this slave CPU in STEP 7.
Configuration and parameter assignment message frame

STEP 7 assists you during configuration and parameter assignment of the DP CPU. If you
need a description of the configuration and parameter assignment frame, for example in
order to use a bus monitor, you can find it on the Internet


Commissioning
Commissioning
Commission the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a DP slave in the PROFIBUS subnet as
follows:
1. Switch on power, but keep the IM151-7 CPU interface module in STOP mode.
2. First, switch on all other DP masters/slaves.
3. Now switch the IM151-7 CPU interface module to RUN.
Startup of DP CPU as DP slave

When the IM151-7 CPU interface module is switched to RUN mode, two mutually
independent operating mode transitions are executed:
● The IM151-7 CPU interface module switches from STOP to RUN mode.
● The IM151-7 CPU interface module starts data exchange with the DP master via the
PROFIBUS DP interface.
Recognizing the Operating State of the DP master (Event Recognition)

The table below shows how the IM151-7 CPU interface module detects operating state
transitions or data exchange interruptions as DP slave.
Table 7- 10 Detecting operating mode transitions and station failure of a DP CPU operated as DP
master in the IM151-7 CPU as DP slave
Event What happens in the DP slave?

Bus interruption  Call of OB 86 with the message Station failure
(short circuit,
connector removed) (coming event; diagnostic address assigned to the DP slave)
 With I/O access: Call of OB 122
(I/O access error)
DP master:  Call of OB 82 with the message Module error
RUN → STOP
(incoming event; diagnostic address assigned to the DP slave; variable
OB82_MDL_STOP = 1)
DP master:  Call of OB 82 with the message Module OK
STOP → RUN
(outgoing event; diagnostic address assigned to the DP slave; variable
OB82_MDL_STOP = 0)
Tip:
When commissioning the IM151-7 CPU interface module as DP slave, always program
OB82 and OB86. This helps you to recognize and evaluate the respective operating states
or interruptions in data exchange.


Commissioning
Status/modify, programming via PROFIBUS

As an alternative to the MPI interface, you can program the IM151-7 CPU interface module
or execute the PG status and control functions via the PROFIBUS DP interface.
Note
The execution of status and control function via PROFIBUS DP interface extends the DP
cycle.
User data transfer by way of transfer memory

The IM151-7 CPU interface module operating as intelligent DP slave provides a transfer
memory to the PROFIBUS DP. User data are always exchanged between the IM151-7 CPU
interface module as DP slave and the DP master by way of this transfer memory. You can
configure up to 32 address ranges for this function.
This means the DP master writes its data to these transfer memory address ranges, and the
IM151-7 CPU interface module reads out these data in the user program and vice versa.
'3PDVWHU &38DV'3VODYH
,2 ,2
7UDQVIHUPHPRU\LQWKH
,2DGGUHVVVSDFH
352),%86
Numb Description
er
① The functions which control data exchange between transfer memory and the distributed I/O
of the slave CPU must be implemented in the user program. The DP master cannot access
this I/O directly.


Commissioning
Address ranges of transfer memory

In STEP 7, configure the I/O address ranges:
● You can configure up to 32 I/O address ranges.
● The maximum length of this address range is 32 bytes.
● You can configure a maximum of 244 input bytes and 244 output bytes.
The table below shows the principle of address ranges. You can also find this figure in the
STEP 7 configuration.
Table 7- 11 Configuration example for the address ranges of transfer memory
Type Master Type Slave Length Unit Consistenc

address address y
1 I 222 O 310 2 BYTE Unit
2 O 0 I 13 10 Word Total length
:
32
Address ranges in the DP Address ranges in the DP These paramaters of the address
master CPU slave CPU ranges must be the same for DP
master and DP slave.


Commissioning
Example program
Below, you will see a small example program for data exchange between the DP master and
the DP slave. The addresses used in the example are found in the table above.
In the DP slave CPU In the DP master CPU

L 2 //Data preparation in the
//DP slave
T MB 6
L IB 0
T MB 7
L MW 6 //Forward data to
//DP master
T PQW 310
L PIB 222 //continued processing of

//received data in DP master
T MB 50
L PIB 223
L B#16#3
+ I
T MB 51
L 10 //Data preparation in the
//DP master
+ 3
T MB 60
CALL SFC 15 //Send data to the DP slave
LADDR:= W#16#0
RECORD:=P#M60.0 Byte20 //In the user program

//of the master a block
//of 20 bytes lengths
//starting at MB60
//is written
//consistently to the
//output area
//PAB0 to PAB19
//(transfer area from
//master to slave)


Commissioning
RET_VAL :=MW 22
CALL SFC 14 //Receive data from

//DP master
LADDR:=W#16#D //In the slave, the
//peripheral bytes PEB13
//to PEB32 (data
//transferred from master)
//are read consistently and
//stored in MB30
//to MB49
RET_VAL :=MW 20
RECORD:=P#M30.0 byte 20
L MB 30 //Received data
//continue processing
L MB 7
+ I
T MW 100
Working with transfer memory

Note the following rules when working with the transfer memory:
● Assignment of address ranges:
– Input data of DP slaves are always output data of the DP master
– Output data of DP slaves are always input data of the DP master
● The user can define these addresses. In the user program, access data with
load/transfer instructions or with SFC 14 and SFC 15. You can also define addresses of
the process image of inputs or outputs.
● The lowest address of specific address ranges is their respective start address.
● The length, unit and consistency of the address ranges for DP master and DP slave must
be identical.
● The master and slave addresses may differ in logically identical transfer memory
(independent logical I/O address spaces in the master and slave CPU).
Note
Assign addresses from the I/O address range of the IM151-7 CPU to the transfer
memory.
You cannot use any addresses which have been assigned to transfer memory for other
I/O modules.


Commissioning
S5 DP master
If you use an IM 308-C as DP master and the IM151-7 CPU interface module as DP slave,
the following applies to the exchange of consistent data:
Use IM 308-C in the S5 control to program FB192 for enabling exchange of consistent data
between the DP master and slave. With the FB192, the data of the IM151-7 CPU interface
module are only output or read out in a consistent block.
S5-95 as DP master
If you use an AG S5-95 as DP master, you also have to set its bus parameters for the
IM151-7 CPU interface module as DP slave.
User data transfer in STOP mode

User data is treated in transfer memory according to the STOP state of the DP master or DP
slave.
● The DP slave CPU goes into STOP:
Data in transfer memory of the IM151-7 CPU interface module is overwritten with "0", that
is, the DP master reads "0" in direct data exchange mode.
● The DP master goes into STOP:
Current data in transfer memory of the IM151-7 CPU interface module are retained and
can still be read out by the IM151-7 CPU.
PROFIBUS address
For the IM151-7 CPU (DP-CPU) interface module you must not set "126" as a PROFIBUS
address.


Commissioning
7.5.3 Commissioning the IM 151-7 CPU with DP master module as a DP master
Requirements for commissioning

● A DP master module is connected to the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
● The PROFIBUS subnet has been configured.
● The DP slaves are ready for operation (see relevant DP slave manuals).
● Before commissioning, you must configure the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a DP
master. That means that, in STEP 7 you must
– configure the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a DP master,
Note
You must suspend the DP master module separately as a submodule (X2) in the
station window in HW Config.
– assign a PROFIBUS address to the DP interface on the DP master module,

– assign a master diagnostics address to the DP interface on the DP master module,
– integrate the DP slaves into the DP master system.
Is a DP-CPU (for example, an IM151-7 CPU interface module) a DP slave?
If so, this DP slave will appear in the PROFIBUS DP catalog as an already configured
station. In the DP master, assign a slave diagnostics address to this DP slave CPU.
You must interconnect the DP master with the DP slave CPU and specify the address
areas for data exchange with the DP slave CPU.
Additional Information
For additional information on configuration, refer to the STEP 7 online help.
Commissioning
Commission the IM151-7 CPU interface module with DP master module as a DP master in
the PROFIBUS subnet as follows:
1. Download the PROFIBUS subnet configuration (preset configuration) created with
STEP 7 from the programming device to the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
2. Switch on all the DP slaves.
3. Switch the IM151-7 CPU interface module from STOP to RUN.


Commissioning
Behavior of the IM151-7 CPU interface module during commissioning

● The DP master module is installed and the IM151-7 CPU interface module is configured
as a DP master
⇒ the IM151-7 CPU interface module switches to RUN with master functionality
● The DP master module is installed and the IM151-7 CPU interface module is not
configured as a DP master
⇒ the IM151-7 CPU interface module switches to RUN without master functionality
Starting up the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a DP master

During startup, the IM151-7 CPU interface module checks the configured preset
configuration of its DP master system against the actual configuration.
If the preset configuration = the actual configuration, the IM151-7 CPU interface module
goes to RUN.
If the preset configuration ≠ the actual configuration, the configuration of parameter Startup if
preset configuration ≠ actual configuration determines the behavior of the IM151-7 CPU
interface module.
Startup when the preset configuration ≠ actual Startup when the preset configuration ≠ actual
configuration = Yes (default setting) configuration = no
IM151-7 CPU switches to RUN. The IM151-7 CPU remains in STOP mode, and
(BF LED flashes if any of the DP slaves cannot the BF LED flashes after the set Monitoring time
be addressed). for transfer of parameters to modules.
The flashing BF LED indicates that at least one
DP slave cannot be addressed. In this case,
check that all the DP slaves are switched on and
correspond with your configuration, or read out
the diagnostics buffer with STEP 7.


Commissioning
Recognizing the operating state of DP slaves (Event recognition)

The table below shows how the IM151-7 CPU interface module with DP master module
acting as a DP master recognizes operating mode transitions of a CPU acting as a DP slave
or any interruptions of the data exchange.
Table 7- 12 Detecting operating mode transitions and station failure of a DP CPU operated as DP
slave in the IM151-7 CPU as DP master
Event What happens in the DP master?

Bus interruption  Call of OB86 with the message Station failure
(short circuit,
connector removed) (incoming event; diagnostics address of the DP slave assigned to the DP
master)
 With I/O access: Call of OB 122
(I/O access error)

DP slave:  Call of OB 82 with the message Module error
RUN → STOP
(incoming event; diagnostics address of the DP slave assigned to the DP
master; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP slave:  Call of OB82 with the message Module OK
STOP → RUN
(outgoing event; diagnostics address of the DP slave assigned to the DP
master; variable OB82_MDL_STOP=0)
Tip:
When commissioning the IM151-7 CPU interface module as the DP master, always program
OB 82 and OB 86; they help you to recognize and evaluate data exchange errors or
interruptions.
Status/modify, programming via PROFIBUS

As an alternative to the MPI interface, you can program the IM151-7 CPU interface module
or execute the PG status and control functions via the PROFIBUS DP interface.
Note
The execution of status and control function via PROFIBUS DP interface extends the DP
cycle.
Constant bus cycle time

This is a property of PROFIBUS DP that ensures bus cycles of exactly the same length. The
"Constant bus cycle time" function ensures that the DP master always starts the DP bus
cycle after a constant interval. From the perspective of the slaves, this means that they
receive their data from the master at constant time intervals.
In Step 7 HW config, you can configure constant bus cycle times for PROFIBUS subnets.
A detailed description of the constant bus cycle time can be found in the STEP 7 Online
Help.


Commissioning
For information on time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP, please refer to the section Time
synchronization (Page 44).
SYNC/FREEZE
The SYNC control command is used to set the DP slaves of a group to sync mode. In other
words, the DP master transfers the current output data and instructs the relevant DP slaves
to freeze their outputs. The DP slaves writes the output data of the next output frames to an
internal buffer; the state of the outputs remains unchanged.
After each SYNC control command, the DP slaves of the selected groups transfer the output
data stored in their internal buffer to the process outputs.
The outputs are only updated cyclically again after you transfer the UNSYNC control
command using SFC11 "DPSYC_FR".
The FREEZE control command is used to set the relevant DP slaves to Freeze mode. In
other words, the DP master instructs the DP slaves to freeze the current state of the inputs.
It then transfers the frozen data to the input area of the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
Following each FREEZE control command, the DP slaves freeze the state of their inputs
again.
The DP master does not receive the current state of the inputs cyclically once more until you
have sent the UNFREEZE control command with SFC11 "DPSYC_FR".
SFC 11 is described in the STEP 7 online help and in the System and Standard Functions
for S7-300/400 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1214574) reference
manual.
Powering up the DP master system
IM151-7 CPU is a DP master

Set the power-up monitoring time for DP slaves using the Monitoring time for parameter transfer to
modules parameter.
This means that the DP slaves must power up within the set time and must be set by the
IM151-7 CPU interface module (as DP master).
PROFIBUS address of the DP master

For the IM151-7 CPU (DP-CPU) interface module you must not set "126" as a PROFIBUS
address.


Commissioning
7.5.4 Direct data exchange
Requirement
In Step 7 HW config, you can configure "Direct Data Exchange" for PROFIBUS nodes. The
IM151-7 CPU interface modules with DP master module participate in a direct data
exchange as receivers. If the IM151-7 CPU interface module is operated as I slave (at the
combined MPI / DP interface), it can participate as sender and receiver in the direct data
exchange.
Definition
"Direct data exchange" is a special communication relationship between PROFIBUS DP
nodes.
Direct data exchange is characterized by the fact that the PROFIBUS DP nodes "listen" on
the bus for data that a DP slave returns to its DP master. This mechanism allows the
"listening node" (recipient) direct access to deltas of input data of remote DP slaves.
Address Areas
During configuration in STEP 7, use the I/O input addresses to specify the address area of
the recipient at which the sender's data should be read.
An IM151-7 CPU interface module can be:
● Sender as DP slave
● Receiver as DP slave or DP master, or as CPU not integrated in a master system


Commissioning
Example: Direct data exchange via DP CPUs

The example in the figure below shows the relationships you can configure for direct data
exchange. In the figure all DP masters and DP slaves (except slave 3 and slave 5) are each
a DP-CPU. Note that other DP slaves (ET 200M, ET 200S, ET 200pro) can only operate as
transmitters.
'3PDVWHU '3PDVWHU
6\VWHP 6\VWHP
&38 &38
&38 '3PDVWHU '3PDVWHU
352),%86
'3VODYH &38 '3VODYH

&38 &38
'3VODYH
'3VODYH '3VODYH


Service and maintenance 8

8.1 Overview
For the ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU, service and maintenance include
● Backing up the firmware to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
● Updating the firmware via the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
● Updating of the firmware online
● Backing up of project data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
● Replacing an IM151-7 CPU interface module
● replacing a DP master module
8.2 Backing up firmware on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
In which situations should I back up the firmware?

In some cases, we recommend that you back up the firmware on your IM151-7 CPU
interface module.
For example, you might want to replace the IM151-7 CPU interface module in your system
with an IM151-7 CPU interface module from your inventory. In this case, you should make
sure that the IM151-7 CPU interface module from your inventory has the same firmware that
is used in the system.
We also recommend that you create a back-up copy of the firmware for emergency
situations.
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card required

You need a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with a memory capacity ≥ 4 MB to back up the
firmware.


Service and maintenance

8.2 Backing up firmware on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Backing up the firmware on your IM151-7 CPU interface module to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Table 8- 1 Backing up the firmware to the SIMATIC micro memory card
Step Action required: The following takes place in the IM151-7 CPU
interface module:
1. Insert the new SIMATIC Micro Memory IM151-7 CPU requests memory reset.
Card in the IM151-7 CPU interface
module.
2. Turn the mode selector switch to MRES -
position and hold it there.
3. Switch supply voltage off and then on ... the STOP, RUN and FRCE LEDs start
again and hold the mode selector switch in flashing.
the MRES position until ...
4. Mode selector switch to STOP. -
5. Mode selector switch briefly to MRES  The IM151-7 CPU interface module starts
position, then let it return to STOP. to back up the firmware on the SIMATIC
Micro Memory Card.
 All LEDs are lit during the backup
operation.
 The STOP LED flashes when the backup is
complete, to indicate that the IM151-7 CPU
interface module requests a memory reset.
6. Remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card -
with the backed up firmware.



8.3 Updating the firmware
8.3.1 When should you update the IM151-7 CPU interface module?
After (compatible) functional expansions, or after an enhancement of operating system
performance, the firmware of the IM151-7 CPU interface module should be upgraded
(updated) to the latest version.
Updating an IM151-7 CPU interface module

The IM151-7 CPU interface module with order number 6ES7151-7AA20-0AB0 cannot be
upgraded to the latest firmware version >= V3.3.
An IM151-7 CPU interface module with the order number 6ES7151-7AA21-0AB0 can be
configured as IM151-6ES7151-7AA20-0AB0 using STEP 7 versions < V5.5 + SP1. The new
functionalities of the IM151-7 CPU V3.3 are not available with this step, if they also have to
be supported by STEP 7 (example: Encryption of blocks).
As of STEP 7 V5.2 + SP1 you can replace even previous configurations of the IM151-7 CPU
interface module together with the hardware support package HSP219 with the current
configuration including a 6ES7151-7AA21-0AB0 V3.3 interface module. This step will make
the full functionality available to you.
Where do I get the latest version of the firmware?

You can order the latest firmware (as *.UPD files) from your Siemens partner, or download it
from the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).



8.3.2 Firmware update using a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Table 8- 2 Firmware update using a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Step Action required: The following takes place in the IM151-7 CPU
interface module:
1 Recommendation
Before you update the firmware of your IM151-7 CPU interface module, create a backup
copy of the "old" firmware on an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card. If problems occur
during the update, you can reload your old firmware from the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
2 Transfer the update files to a blank -
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card using
STEP 7 and your programming device.
To do this, click "Update PLC / operating
system" in the SIMATIC Manager.
Note: You will need a SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card with at least 4 MB of
memory.
3 Switch off IM151-7 CPU power and insert -
a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
containing the firmware update.
4 Switch on power.  The IM151-7 CPU interface module
automatically detects the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card with the firmware update and
runs the update.
 All LEDs are lit during firmware update.
 The STOP LED flashes when the firmware
update complete, to indicate that the
IM151-7 CPU interface module requests a
memory reset.
5 Switch off IM151-7 CPU power and -
remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
containing the firmware update.
Result
● You have updated your IM151-7 CPU interface module with the latest firmware version.
● The address and transmission rate of the combined MPI / DP interface remain retentive.
All other parameters were reset during the firmware update.
NOTICE
Aborting the firmware update by POWER ON / POWER OFF or by removal of the Micro
Memory Card can lead to loss of the firmware on the CPU. In this condition only the
SF-LED continues to flash at 2 Hz (all other LEDs are off). However since the boot block
remains, you can regenerate the valid firmware by repeating the firmware update as
described.



8.3.3 Updating the firmware online (via networks)

To update the firmware of the IM151-7 CPU interface module, you need the (*.UPD) files
containing the latest firmware version.
Requirements
● An online firmware updates can be performed as of STEP 7 V5.3.
● The interface module of the station pending a firmware update must be accessible online.
● The files containing the current firmware versions must be available in the file system of
your programming device or PC. A folder may contain only the files of one firmware
version.
Performing a firmware update

1. Run STEP 7 and change to HW Config.
2. Open the station with the IM151-7 CPU interface module that is to be updated.
3. Select the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
4. Select PLC > Update Firmware.
5. In the Update Firmware dialog, select the path to the firmware update files (*.UPD) using
the Browse button.
6. After you selected a file, the information in the lower fields of the Update Firmware dialog
box shows you the firmware file and version for the corresponding modules.
7. Click on the Run button. STEP 7 checks to determine whether the selected file can be
interpreted by the IM151-7 CPU interface module and, if so, then downloads the file to
the interface module. If this step requires changing the operating state of the
IM151-7 CPU interface module, you will be asked to perform these tasks in the relevant
dialog boxes. The IM151-7 CPU interface module then performs the firmware update
independently.
8. Use STEP 7 (read out the CPU diagnostics buffer) to verify that the IM151-7 CPU
interface module can start up with the new firmware.
As an alternative you can also trigger the firmware update in SIMATIC Manager:
● Select the respective IM151-7 CPU interface module as the target CPU and then select
"Update PLC / Firmware".
● Via "Available nodes", select the target CPU and then select "Update PLC / Firmware".
You can use both paths to read step 5 described above. Then continue with the remaining
steps.
Result
● You have updated your IM151-7 CPU interface module online with the latest firmware
version.



8.4 Backing up project data on a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Function principle
Using the Save project to Memory Card and Fetch project from Memory Card functions, you
can save all project data to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, and retrieve these at a later
time. For this operation, the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be located in an
IM151-7 CPU interface module or in the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card adapter of a
programming device or PC.
Project data is compressed before it is saved to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, and
uncompressed on retrieval.
Note
In addition to project data, you may also have to store your user data on the SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card. You should therefore first select a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with
sufficient free memory.
A message warns you if the memory capacity on your SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is
insufficient.
The volume of project data to be saved corresponds with the size of the project's archive file.
Note
For technical reasons, you can only transfer the entire contents (user program and project
data) using the Save project to memory card action.



Handling the functions

How you use the Save project to memory card / Retrieve project from memory card functions
depends on the location of the SIMATIC micro memory card:
● When the SIMATIC MMC is inserted in the MMC slot, select a project level (for example,
CPU, programs, sources or blocks) which is uniquely assigned to the IM151-7 CPU
interface module from the project window in SIMATIC Manager. Select the Target system
> Save project to memory card or Target system > Retrieve project from memory card
menu command. All the complete project data is then written to / retrieved from the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
● If project data are not available on the currently used programming device (PG/PC), you
can select the source CPU via "Available nodes" window. Select PLC > Display
accessible nodes command to open the "Accessible nodes" window. Select the
connection/IM151-7 CPU that contains your project data on the SIMATIC Micro Memory
Card. Now select menu command Fetch project from Memory Card.
● If the SIMATIC MMC is located in the MMC programming unit of a PG or PC, open the
"S7 memory card window" using the File > S7 Memory Card > Open command. Select
the Target system > Save project to memory card or Target system > Retrieve project
from memory card menu command. to open a dialog in which you can select the source
or target project.
Note
Project data can generate high data traffic, which can lead to waiting periods of several
minutes with read/write access to the IM151-7 CPU interface module especially in RUN
mode.
Sample application
When you assign more than one member of your service and maintenance department to
perform maintenance tasks on a SIMATIC PLC, it may prove difficult to provide quick access
to current configuration data to each staff member.
If the project data of an IM151-7 CPU interface module are available locally on any
IM151-7 CPU that is to be serviced, any member of the service department can access the
latest project data and make any necessary changes that will then be available to all other
employees.



8.5 Replacing the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Introduction
Note
If you remove an (operational) device and re-use it in another place or place it in storage, the
device should be restored to its delivery state, because the bus parameters (e.g. address,
transmission rate) of the combined MPI / DP interface are stored retentively.
You can replace the IM151-7 CPU interface module if it is faulty.
Requirements
To replace the IM151-7 CPU interface module you must switch off the supply voltage on the
faulty IM151-7 CPU interface module .
Result: Failure of the ET 200S station and all connected components (DP slaves), if the
IM151-7 CPU interface module is operated as a DP master. If the IM151-7 CPU interface
module is used as I slave, the failure of the interface module is signaled as station failure to
the higher-level DP master.
NOTICE
PROFIBUS DP
The bus terminator function may fail if you shut down supply voltage at the first or last bus
node of a bus segment.
Required tools
Screwdriver with 3 mm blade



Replacing the IM151-7 CPU interface module

The IM151-7 CPU interface module is wired, and the terminal modules are on the right:
1. Switch off the supply voltage for the faulty IM151-7 CPU interface module.
2. Remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card from the slot (see Inserting/replacing a
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (Page 90)).
3. If required, release the connector for the supply voltage and the RS 485 connector on the
4. Use a screwdriver to slide the slider on the IM151-7 CPU interface module downwards
until it stops. Now move the IM151-7 CPU interface module to the left.
Note: The slider is located in the center below the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
5. Press down on the slider while swiveling the IM151-7 CPU interface module off the
mounting rail.
6. Suspend the new IM151-7 CPU interface module in the mounting rail.
7. Press down on the slider while swiveling the IM151-7 CPU interface module backwards
until the slider audibly engages.
8. Now move the IM151-7 CPU interface module to the right until the first terminal module.
If a DP master module is connected:
Move the IM151-7 CPU interface module to the right until it audibly engages on the DP
master module.
9. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card removed from the defective IM151-7 CPU
interface module into the slot on the new IM151-7 CPU interface module.
10.Switch on the power supply.
Behavior of the IM151-7 CPU interface module after replacement

As the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has been changed, after the IM151-7 CPU interface
module has been replaced it always automatically resets the memory and remains in STOP
mode, regardless of the position of the mode selector. The IM151-7 CPU interface module
can then be switched to RUN once more using the mode selector.
If the IM151-7 CPU interface module stays in STOP, you can view the cause of error in
STEP 7 (see the STEP 7 online help).



8.6 Replacing the DP master module
8.6 Replacing the DP master module
Introduction
You may replace a defective DP master module.
Requirements
To replace the DP master module you must switch off the supply voltage on the associated
IM151-7 CPU interface module .
Result: Failure of the ET 200S station and all components connected to it (DP slaves).
NOTICE
PROFIBUS DP
The bus terminator function may fail if you shut down supply voltage at the first or last bus
node of a bus segment.
Required tools
Screw driver with 3 mm blade
Replacing the DP master module

The DP master module and the IM151-7 CPU interface module are wired, and the terminal
modules are on the right:
1. Switch off the supply voltage for the respective ET 200S station (IM151-7 CPU).
2. If required, release the connector for the supply voltage and the RS 485 connector on the
3. Use a screwdriver to slide the slider on the IM151-7 CPU interface module downwards
until it stops. Now move the IM151-7 CPU interface module about 40 mm to the left.
Note: The slider is located in the center below the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
4. Use the screwdriver to slide the slider on the DP master module downwards to the stop.
Slide the faulty DP master module to the left until the connector for the backplane bus is
free.
Note: The slider is located underneath the DP master module.
5. Keeping the slider pressed down, swivel the DP master module out of the mounting rail.
6. Suspend the new DP master module in the rail and swing it downwards.
7. Slide the DP master module to the right until the first terminal module.
8. Move the IM151-7 CPU interface module to the right until it audibly engages with the DP
master module.
9. If required, insert the connector for the supply voltage and the RS 485 connector once
again on the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
10.Switch on the power supply.


Functions 9
9.1 Assigning parameters of the reference junction for the connection of
thermocouples
Introduction
If you want to use the IM151-7 CPU interface module in an ET 200S system with
thermocouples and a reference junction, set the parameters in the "Properties" section of the
hardware configuration.
Parameter assignment of the reference junction
Table 9- 1 Parameter assignment of the reference junction
Parameters Value range Explanation

Activation of the reference activated / You can enable the reference junction with
junction not activated this parameter. Only then can you continue
(Example, see figure to parameterize the reference junction.
below)
Slot none / 5 to 66 You can use this parameter to assign the
(Example, see figure RTD module slot to the reference junction.
below)
Channel number RTD on channel 0 This parameter can be used to set the
RTD on channel 1 channel (0 / 1) for measuring the reference
temperature (calculation of the
(Example, see figure
compensation value) for the assigned slot of
below)
the RTD module.
RTD module parameter Value range Explanation

Measurement Resistance / If you use a channel of the RTD module for
type/measurement range temperature reference junction configuration, you must
measurement, e.g. configure the measurement type /
measurement range for this channel as
 RTD-4L Pt100
RTD-4L Pt 100 climatic range.
standard range
TC module parameter Value range Explanation

Reference junction number 1 This parameter allows you to assign the
reference junction (1) that contains the
reference temperature (compensation value).
Reference junction channel None, RTD This parameter allows you to enable the use
0 and reference junction of the reference junction.
channel 1


Functions
9.2 Removal and insertion of modules during operation
Example of a parameterization dialog box
Figure 9-1 Example for a parameterization dialog box of the IM151-7 CPU module parameters in
STEP 7
Reference
You can find detailed information on the procedure, the connection system and an example
of configuration in the section entitled Analog Electronic Modules in the ET 200S Distributed
I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) Operating
Instructions.
9.2.1 Overview
The ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU supports the removal and insertion of in each case one
module of the ET 200S I/O system during operation and in an energized state.
Exceptions
The IM151-7 CPU interface module itself must not be removed during operation and in an
energized state.


Functions
Removal and insertion of modules in an energized state and during operation

When removing and inserting modules in an energized state and during operation, refer both
to the specifications given here and the restrictions in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) Operating Instructions,
section Wiring and equipping.
WARNING
When an output module is inserted, the outputs set by the user program become active
immediately. We therefore advise you to set the outputs to "0" in the user program before
removing the module.
If modules are removed or inserted incorrectly (see ET 200S Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) Operating Instructions,
section Wiring and equipping), this can cause uncontrolled system states. Adjacent
modules could be affected.
9.2.2 What happens when modules are removed during operation

● When you remove a module from the ET 200S I/O system during operation, OB 83 is
called and a corresponding diagnostics buffer entry is generated (event ID 3961H). This
takes place regardless of whether the associated power module is switched on or off.
If the OB 83 is available on the IM151-7 CPU interface module, it remains in RUN.
The absence of the module is noted in the system status list.
● If the module that has been removed is accessed from the user program, an I/O access
error occurs with a corresponding entry in the diagnostics buffer and the OB 122 is called
up.
If the OB 122 is available on the IM151-7 CPU interface module, it remains in RUN.
9.2.3 Procedure when modules are inserted during operation
Overview
If you insert a removed module once again in the ET 200S I/O system during operation, the
IM151-7 CPU interface module initially carries out a set / actual comparison with regard to
the inserted module. In doing so, the configured module is compared with the one that is
actually inserted. The activities described below take place dependent on the result of the
set / actual comparison.


Functions
Non-configurable modules
The following actions will take place regardless of whether the power module of the inserted
module is switched on or off.
Table 9- 2 Result of the set / actual comparison in the case of non-configurable modules
Inserted module = configured module Inserted module ≠ configured module

OB 83 is called with the corresponding OB 83 is called with the corresponding
diagnostics buffer entry (event -ID 3861H). diagnostics buffer entry (event -ID 3863H).
The module remains entered in the system status The module remains entered in the system status
list as unavailable. list as unavailable.
Direct access is again possible. Direct access is not possible.
Modules that can be parameterized

The following actions only take place when the power module of the inserted module is
switched on.
Table 9- 3 Result of the preset/actual comparison in the case of parameterizable modules with the
power module switched on

OB 83 is called with the corresponding OB 83 is called with the corresponding
diagnostics buffer entry (event -ID 3861H). diagnostics buffer entry (event ID 3863H).
The IM151-7 CPU interface module reconfigures The IM151-7 CPU interface module does not
the module. configure the module.
If parameter assignment is successful, the The module remains entered in the system status
module is entered in the system status list as list as unavailable.
available. The SF LED on the module remains lit.
The following actions only take place when the power module of the inserted module is
switched off.
Table 9- 4 Result of the preset/actual comparison in the case of parameterizable modules with the
power module switched off

OB 83 is called with the corresponding diagnostics buffer entry (event -ID 3861H).
When the power module is switched on, the When the power module is switched on, the
IM151-7 CPU interface module reconfigures the IM151-7 CPU interface module does not
module. configure the module.
If parameter assignment is successful, the The module remains entered in the system status
module is entered in the system status list as list as unavailable.
available. The SF LED on the module remains lit.


Functions
9.3 Switching power modules off and on during operation
9.3 Switching power modules off and on during operation
What happens when power modules are switched off during operation
If the load power voltage to a power module is switched off during operation, the following
activities take place:
● If you enable diagnostics when assigning parameters for the power module, the
diagnostics interrupt OB 82 (diagnostics address of the power module) is called with the
corresponding diagnostics buffer entry (event ID 3942H).
● The power module is entered as present but faulty in the system status list.
Switching off the load power supply has the following effects on the modules supplied by the
power module:
● The SF LED on the modules lights up.
● The modules can continue to be accessed without an I/O access error occurring.
● The outputs of the modules are deenergized and inactive for the process.
● The inputs of digital modules and FM modules return 0; the inputs of analog modules
return 7FFFH.
What happens when power modules are switched on during operation

If the load power supply to a power module is switched on during operation, the following
activities take place:
● If you enable diagnostics when assigning parameters for the power module, the
diagnostics interrupt OB 82 (diagnostics address of the power module) is called with the
corresponding diagnostics buffer entry (event ID 3842H).
● The power module is entered as present and o.k. in the system status list.
Switching on the load power supply has the following effects on modules supplied by the
power module:
● The SF LED on the modules goes out.
● The modules regain their full functionality.
Removal and insertion of power modules during operation

If, during operation, you remove or insert a power module, the activities listed in section
Removal and insertion of modules during operation (Page 136) take place.
Removal and insertion has the same effects as switching the load power supply off and on
for the modules that are supplied by the power module.


Functions
9.4 Power module with status byte
9.4 Power module with status byte
Diagnostic status of the power module

The diagnostic status of the power module can be evaluated as the input byte in the status
byte.
To do this, set a check in the "Status byte" check box in the "Addresses" tab in the properties
dialog of the power module.
The current status of the power module is held in a freely selectable input byte of the status
byte. This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnosis has been
enabled.
Example: Cross circuit detection

An external power supply can cause a cross circuit in a power module, even when it is
switched off. The status byte allows detection of the cross circuit.
Information on the meaning of bits in the status byte can be found in the documentation for
the respective power module.


Debugging functions, diagnostics and

troubleshooting 10
10.1 Overview
This chapter helps you to get acquainted with tools you can use to carry out the following
tasks:
● Hardware/software error diagnostics.
● Elimination of hardware/software errors.
● Testing the hardware/software – for example, during commissioning.
Note
It would go beyond the scope of this manual to provide detailed descriptions of all the
tools you can use for diagnostics, testing and troubleshooting functions. Further notes are
found in the relevant hardware/software manuals.
10.2 Reading/saving service data
Application
In the case of a service, for example, if the IM151-7 CPU signals the state "DEFECTIVE" (all
LEDs flashing), you have the option of saving special information for analyzing the CPU
state.
This information is stored in the diagnostic buffer and in the actual service data.
Select the “Target system -> Save service data” command to read and this information and
save the data to a file to forward to Customer Support.
Procedure
1. If the IM151-7 CPU is in the state "DEFECTIVE" (all LEDs flashing), switch the power
supply off and on (power off/on).
Result: The IM151-7 CPU interface module is in "STOP" mode.
2. As soon as possible after the IM151-7 CPU has switched to "STOP" mode, select the
respective IM151-7 CPU with the "PLC > Available nodes" menu command in the
SIMATIC Manager.
3. Use the SIMATIC Manager menu command "Target system > Save service data" to save
the service data.
Result: A dialog box opens in which you specify the storage location and name of the two
files.
4. Save the files.
5. Forward these files to Customer Support on request.


Debugging functions, diagnostics and troubleshooting

10.3 Identification and maintenance data of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
10.3 Identification and maintenance data of the IM151-7 CPU interface

module
Definition and properties

Identification and maintenance data (I&M) are data that are stored in a module for assisting
you in:
● Checking the system configuration
● Locating hardware changes in a system
● Correcting errors in a system
Identification data (I data) is information regarding the module, like for example, order
number and serial number, which are partly also printed on the housing of the module. I data
is manufacturer´s information about the module. It is fixed and can only be read.
Maintenance data (M data) is system-specific information, such as the installation location. M
data is created during the configuration and written to the module.
I&M data enable modules to be uniquely identified online.
Reading and writing the I&M data of the IM151-7 CPU interface module with STEP 7
Read:
● In STEP 7 the I&M data is displayed under "Module state – IM151-7 CPU" ("General" and
"Identification" tabs) and via "Available nodes" (detailed view) (see STEP 7 online help).
● In the user program, the I&M data can be read via SFC 51. Specify the required SSL
sublist number and the index in the input parameters of the SFC 51 (see table below).
Write:
You will always need STEP 7 HW Config to write the M data for modules.
For example, you can enter the following data during configuration:
● Name of the automation system (device name)
The device name is assigned when you create the station in SIMATIC Manager. In this
case a "SIMATIC 300(1) station is created by default. This name can be changed at any
time.
● You can enter the following data in STEP 7 HW Config on the "General" tab under
"IM151-7 CPU Properties":
– Name of the module
In this case, HW Config assigns a default name, e.g. IM151-7 CPU (can be changed).
– Higher level designation of the module
No default setting
– Location designation of a module
No default setting



10.3 Identification and maintenance data of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Reading the I&M data from the IM151-7 CPU interface module with the user program
If you want to read the I&M data from the IM151-7 CPU interface module in the user
program, you must read the associated system state list, specifying the relevant SSL ID and
the index using SFC 51. The SSL IDs and the associated indexes are listed in the following
table.
SSL sublists with I&M data

The I&M data can be found in the following SSL sublists under the specified indexes.
Table 10- 1 SSL sublists with I&M data
SSL ID Index Meaning

W#16#… W#16#…
Module identification
0111 an identification data record
0001 Identification of the module
This contains the module's order number and the product version.
0006 Identification of the basic software
Provides information on the software version of the module.
(The IM151-7 CPU interface module has no basic software so, in this case, the
identification data are the same as index 0001.)
0007 Identification of the basic firmware
Provides information on the firmware version of the module.
Identification of a component
011C Identification of a component
0001 Name of the automation system
The name of the automation system (device name) is saved to this parameter.
0002 Name of the module
The name of the module is saved to this parameter.
0003 Higher level designation of the module
This is a system-wide unique identifier for the module.
000B Location designation of a module
This is the module's installation location.
For detailed information on the structure and content of the system state lists, see the
System and Standard Functions for S7-300/400
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1214574) reference manual.
Additional information about reading the SSL with SFC 51 can be found in Reference
Manual System and Standard Functions for S7-300/400 or in the Online Help for STEP 7.
I&M data for the connected I/O devices

Information about the I&M data for the I/O devices connected to the IM151-7 CPU interface
module can be found in the relevant I/O module manuals.



10.4 Debugging functions
10.4.1 Overview: Debugging functions
Determining addressed nodes with "Node flashing test"

To identify the addressed node, select PLC > Diagnostics/Setting > Node/Flashing Test in
STEP 7.
A dialog appears in which you can set the flashing time and start the flashing test. The
directly connected node can be identified by a flashing FRCE LED. The flashing test cannot
be performed if the FORCE function is active.
Debugging functions of the software: Monitoring and modifying variables, stepping mode
STEP 7 offers you the following testing functions that you can also use for diagnostics:
● Monitoring and modifying variables
Can be used to monitor the current values of individual variables of a user program or an
IM151-7 CPU interface module on the programming device / PC. You can also assign
constant values to the variables.
● Testing with program status
You can test your program by viewing the program status of each function (result of
logical links, status bit) or the data of specific registers in real-time mode.
If you have selected the LAD programming language to be represented in STEP 7, the
color of the symbol will indicate a closed switch or an active circuit, for example.
● Stepping mode
When testing in single-step mode, you can process your program instructions in
sequence (= single-step) and set break points. This is only possible in testing mode and
not in process mode.
Note
Number of blocks and breakpoints that can be monitored with status block
With IM151-7 CPU ≥ V3.3, you can monitor two blocks at the same time and set up to
four breakpoints in stepping mode.



Debugging functions of the software: Forcing variables

The Force function can be used to assign the variables of a user program or IM151-7 CPU
interface module (also: inputs and outputs) constant values which can not be overwritten by
the user program.
For example, you can use it to jumper sensors or switch outputs permanently, irrespective of
the user program.
DANGER
This could result in severe injury or even death, and damage to property.
Incorrect use of the Force function could result in death or severe injury, and damage to
machinery or even the entire plant. Always follow the safety instructions in the STEP 7
manuals.
DANGER
Forcing with IM151-7 CPU interface module
The force values in the process image of the inputs can be overwritten by write commands
(such as T IB x, = I x.y, Copy with SFC, etc.) and by read I/O commands (such as L PIW x)
in the user program, or by write PG/OP functions. Outputs initialized with forced values only
return the forced value if not accessed by the user program via I/O write instructions (T
PQB x, for example) or by programming device / OP write functions!
Always ensure that forced values in the I/O process image cannot be overwritten by the
user program or programming device / OP functions.
)RUFLQJFRUUHVSRQGVWRDF\FOLFDOFRQWUROZLWKWKH,0&38LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH
([HFXWLRQIRUFH ([HFXWLRQ
MREIRULQSXWV IRUFHMREIRU
LQSXWV
3,2 %HV\ 3,, 8VHUSURJUDP 3,2 %HV\ 3,,

WUDQVIHU WUDQVIHU WUDQVIHU WUDQVIHU
)RUFHYDOXH
RYHUZULWWHQE\7
)RUFHYDOXH 34: )RUFHYDOXH
([HFXWLRQIRUFH 7bb34: ([HFXWLRQIRUFH

MREIRURXWSXWV MREIRURXWSXWV
%HV\2SHUDWLQJV\VWHPSURFHVVLQJ
Figure 10-1 Principle of forcing with IM151-7 CPU interface module



The differences between forcing and modifying variables
Table 10- 2 The differences between forcing and modifying variables
Characteristics/function Forcing Modifying Variables

Memory bit (M) - Yes
Timers and counters (T, C) - Yes
Data blocks (DB) - Yes
Inputs and outputs (I, O) Yes Yes
Peripheral inputs (PI) - -
Peripheral outputs (PO) - Yes
User program can overwrite modify/force values Yes Yes
Maximum number of force values 10 -
POWER OFF retentive Yes No
Reference
Details on debugging functions of the software are available in the STEP 7 Online Help and
in the Programming with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18652056) manual.
For additional information on the cycle times, please refer to the "Cycle time (Page 198)"
chapter.
10.4.2 Overview: Diagnostics
Introduction
Especially in the commissioning phase of a system, errors can occur. Tracking these errors
might be a time-consuming effort, because errors can occur both on the hardware and
software side. The many different testing functions ensure that commissioning runs
smoothly.
Note
Errors during operation are almost always a result of faults or damage to the hardware.
Type of error
Errors that the IM151-7 CPU interface module can recognize and to which you can respond
with organization blocks (OBs) can be divided into the following categories:
● Synchronous error: Errors you can relate to a specific point in the user program (error
when accessing an I/O module, for example).
● Asynchronous error: Errors you can not relate to a specific point in the user program
(cycle time exceeded, module error, for example).



Troubleshooting
Programming with foresight and, above all, knowledge and proper handling of diagnostic
tools puts you into an advantageous position in error situations:
● You can reduce the effects of errors.
● It makes it easier for you to locate errors (by programming error OBs, for example).
● You can limit downtimes.
Diagnostics with LED display

The SIMATIC hardware of the distributed I/Os offers diagnostics with LEDs.
These LEDs are implemented in three colors:
LED color Status of the IM151-7 CPU interface module

Green Regular operation.
Example: Power is on.
Yellow Non-regular operating status.
Example: Forcing is active.
Red Fault.
Example: Bus error
LED flashing Special event
Example: Memory reset
Reference
Notes on diagnosing suitable I/O modules can be found in the ET 200S Decentralized I/O
System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) Operating
Instructions.
Diagnostics buffer
If an error occurs, the IM151-7 CPU interface module writes the cause of error to the
diagnostics buffer. In STEP 7 you use the programming device to read the diagnostics
buffer. This location holds error information in plain text.
Modules with diagnostics capability that do not have their own diagnostics buffer write their
error information to the diagnostic buffer of the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
When an error or an interrupt event occurs, (e.g. diagnostic interrupt for an I/O module), the
IM151-7 CPU interface module switches to STOP mode, or you can respond in the user
program via error / interrupt OBs. This would be OB82 in the above example.



Diagnostics with system functions

On the IM151-7 CPU interface module, we recommend that you use the more user-friendly
SFB 54 "RALRM" (called in diagnostic OB 82) to evaluate the diagnostics from centralized or
decentralized I/O modules or DP slaves.
Further options for diagnostics with system functions are listed below:
● Using SFC 51 "RDSYSST" to read an SSL sublist or an extract thereof.
● Reading the diagnostic data (slave diagnostics) of a DP slave, using SFC 13
"DPNRM_DG"
Every DP slave provides slave diagnostic data according to EN 50170 Volume 2,
PROFIBUS. You can use SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG" to read this diagnostic data. Error
information is stored in hex code. Refer to the relevant module manual for information on
the meaning of the read code.
For example, the entry of the value 50H (= dual 0101 0000) in byte 7 of the slave
diagnostics for the distributed I/O module ET 200B indicates a faulty fuse or missing load
voltage in channel group 2 and 3.
● Reading a data record with SFB 52 "RDREC"
You can use SFB 52 "RDREC" (read record) to read a specific data record from the
addressed module. Data records 0 and 1 are especially suitable for reading diagnostic
information from a diagnosable module.
Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data that indicates the current state of a
module. Data record 1 contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data also stored in data record
0, plus module-specific diagnostic data.
● Reading the start information of the current OB using SFC 6 "RD_SINFO"
Information about the error can also be found in the start information of the relevant error
OB.
You can use SFC 6 "RD_SINFO" (read start information) to read the start information of
the OB that was last called and not yet processed completely, and of the startup OB that
was last called.
● Triggering detection of the bus topology in a DP master system with SFC 103
"DP_TOPOL"
The diagnostic repeater makes it easier to identify faulty modules or an interruption on
the DP cable when a fault occurs during operation. The repeater acts as a slave and is
able to determine the topology of a DP segment and log faults on the basis of this
topology.
You can use SFC103 "DP_TOPOL" to trigger the identification of the bus topology of a
DP master system by the diagnostic repeater. SFC 103 is described in the STEP 7 online
help and in the System and Standard Functions for S7-300/400
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1214574) reference manual. The
diagnostic repeater is described in the Diagnostic Repeater for PROFIBUS DP
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7915183) Manual.



10.4.3 Diagnostic functions available in STEP 7
Diagnosing with the "Diagnosing hardware" function"

Locate the cause of a module error by viewing the online information on the module. You
can locate the cause of an error in the user program cycle with the help of the diagnostics
buffer and of the stack content. In addition to this, you can check whether a user program is
capable of running on the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
Hardware diagnostics give you an overview of the PLC status. In an overview
representation, a symbol can display the error status of every module. A double-click on the
faulty module opens detailed error information. The scope of this information depends on the
specific module. You can view the following information:
● General information about the module (e.g. order number, version, designation) and state
of the module (e.g. faulty).
● Display of module errors (channel errors, for example) in centralized I/O modules and
PROFIBUS DP slaves.
● Display of messages from the diagnostics buffer.
For the IM151-7 CPU interface module, you can also view the following information about
the module states:
● Cause of an error in the user program cycle.
● Indication of the cycle time (longest, shortest and last cycle).
● Performance data (number of possible inputs and outputs, memory bits, counters, timers
and blocks).
For complete and current details of diagnostic functions in STEP 7 and specific procedures,
refer to the Programming with STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18652056) manual and the STEP 7
Online Help (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18652056).



10.5 Diagnostics using status and error LEDs
10.5.1 Overview
Diagnostics with LEDs is an initial tool for error localization. Usually, you evaluate the
diagnostics buffer for further error localization.
The buffer contains plain text information on the error that has occurred. For example, you
will find the number of the appropriate error OB here. If you generate this error OB, you can
prevent the IM151-7 CPU interface module switching to STOP mode.
10.5.2 Status and error displays of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Bus error-BF LED

The explanation of bus errors-BF LED on the IM151-7 CPU interface module or on the DP
master module is available in chapters Status and error displays of the MPI/DP interface as
DP slave (Page 155) or Status and error displays of the DP master module (parameterizaton
as DP master) (Page 156).
Standalone operation (MPI)
The DP functionality is irrelevant in standalone operation (MPI) and no BF LED is addressed.
Table 10- 3 Status and error displays of the IM151-7P CPU interface module
LED Meaning
SF ON FRCE RUN STOP
Off Off Off Off Off The IM151-7 CPU has no power supply.
Remedy:
Check whether the supply voltage is connected to mains and
switched on.
Off On X Off On The IM151-7 CPU is in STOP mode.
To correct or avoid error: Start the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
On On X Off On The IM151-7 CPU is in STOP mode as a result of an error.
To correct or avoid error: refer to the tables below, evaluation of the
SF LED
X On X Off Flashes The IM151-7 CPU requests memory reset.
(0.5 Hz)
X On X Off Flashes The IM151-7 CPU executes memory reset.
(2 Hz)
X On X Flashes On The IM151-7 CPU is in startup.
(2 Hz)
X On X Flashes Flashes During transmission of blocks from the load memory to the work
(0.5 Hz) (0.5 Hz) memory, STOP and RUN flash at 0.5 Hz until STOP mode is
reached.



LED Meaning
SF ON FRCE RUN STOP
X On X Flashes On The IM151-7 CPU was paused by a programmed break point.
(0.5 Hz) For further information, refer to the Programming with STEP 7
Manual.
On On X X X Hardware or software error
To correct or avoid error: refer to the tables below, evaluation of the
SF LED
X X On X X You enabled the Force function
For further information, refer to the Programming with STEP 7
Manual.
X X Flashes X X Node flashing test was activated.
(2 Hz)
Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes Flashes An internal system error is present in the IM151-7 CPU (all LEDs
are flashing, including BF LED). The procedure is as follows:
1. Set the mode selector switch to STOP.
2. Switch the supply voltage 1L+ off and on again.
3. Read the diagnostics buffer with STEP 7.
4. Read the service data (see section Reading/saving service data
(Page 141)).
5. Contact your local SIEMENS partner.
Flashes Off Off Off Off The IM151-7 CPU has no valid firmware;
(2 Hz) To correct or avoid error: Perform a firmware update with a Micro
Memory Card (see section Firmware update using a SIMATIC Micro
Memory Card (Page 128)).
X = This state is irrelevant for the current IM151-7 CPU function.
Standalone operation (MPI)

The DP functionality is irrelevant in standalone operation (MPI) and no BF LED is addressed.
Reference
● A detailed description of the OBs and SFCs / SFBs required for their evaluation can be
found in the STEP 7 online help and in the S7-300/400 System and Standard Functions



10.5.3 Evaluating the SF LED in case of software errors
Table 10- 4 Evaluation of the SF LED (software error)
Possible error Response of the IM151-7 Possible remedies

TOD interrupt is enabled and Call of OB 85. The Load OB 10 (OB number can be
triggered. However, a matching IM151-7 CPU interface seen from the diagnostics buffer).
block is not loaded. module STOPs if OB 85 is
(Software/configuration error) not loaded.
Start time of the enabled TOD Call of OB 80. The Disable the TOD interrupt before
interrupt was jumped, e.g. by IM151-7 CPU interface you set the time-of-day with SFC 29.
advancing the internal clock. module STOPs if OB 80 is
not loaded.
Delay interrupt triggered by Call of OB 85. The Load OB 20 (OB number can be
SFC 32. However, a matching IM151-7 CPU interface seen from the diagnostics buffer).
Process interrupt is enabled and Call of OB 85. The Load OB 40 (OB number can be
triggered. However, a matching IM151-7 CPU interface seen from the diagnostics buffer).
Status alarm is generated, but Call of OB 85. The Load OB55
the appropriate OB55 is not IM151-7 CPU interface
loaded. module STOPs if OB 85 is
not loaded.
Update alarm is generated, but Call of OB 85. The Load OB56
the appropriate OB 56 is not IM151-7 CPU interface
loaded. module STOPs if OB 85 is
not loaded.
Vendor-specific alarm is Call of OB 85. The Load OB57
generated, but the appropriate IM151-7 CPU interface
OB57 is not loaded. module STOPs if OB 85 is
not loaded.
Access to missing or defective Call OB 85 (depending on Load OB 85. The start information of
I/O module when the process the parameter settings in the OB contains the address of the
image is updated (software or HW Config). The relevant I/O module. Replace the
hardware error) IM151-7 CPU interface affected I/O module or eliminate the
module STOPs if OB 85 is program error.
not loaded.
The cycle time was exceeded. Call of OB 80. The Extending the cycle time (STEP 7 –
Probably too many interrupt IM151-7 CPU interface Hardware configuration), changing
OBs called simultaneously. module STOPs if OB 80 is the program structure.
not loaded. The To correct or avoid error:
IM151-7 CPU interface If necessary, retrigger cycle time
module switches to STOP monitoring by calling SFC 43
even though OB 80 is
loaded if twice the cycle
time was exceeded without
the cycle time being
triggered again.



Possible error Response of the IM151-7 Possible remedies

Programming error Call of OB 121. The Eliminate the programming error.
IM151-7 CPU interface The STEP 7 testing function helps
 Block not loaded
module STOPs if OB 121 is you to locate the error.
 Wrong block number not loaded.
 Wrong timer/counter number
 Read/write access to wrong
area
 etc.
I/O access errors Call of OB 122. The Check I/O module addressing in HW
An error has occurred when I/O IM151-7 CPU interface Config or whether an I/O module/DP
module data was accessed module STOPs if OB 122 is slave has failed.
not loaded.
Tip:
● You can use SFC 39 to disable all interrupts and asynchronous error events.
Note
The shorter the selected cyclic interrupt period, the more likely it is that cyclic interrupt
errors will occur. You must take into account the operating system times of the
IM151-7 CPU interface module, the user program runtime and extension of the cycle time
by active programming device functions, for example.
Reference
A detailed description of the OBs and on SFCs required for their evaluation can be found in
the STEP 7 Online Help and in the S7-300/400 System and Standard Functions



10.5.4 Evaluating the SF LED in case of hardware errors
Table 10- 5 Evaluating the SF LED (hardware error)
Possible error Response of the IM151-7 CPU interface Possible remedies

module
A centralized I/O module was Call of OB 83. The IM151-7 CPU interface Load OB 83.
removed or inserted while the module STOPs if OB 83 is not loaded.
system was in RUN mode. If more than one module is removed, the
IM151-7 CPU interface module always switches
to STOP.
A distributed module was removed Call of OB 86. The IM151-7 CPU interface Load OB86 or OB82.
from or inserted on the module STOPs if OB 86 is not loaded.
PROFIBUS DP while the system If the module was integrated using a GSD file:
was in RUN mode. Call of OB 82. The IM151-7 CPU interface
module STOPs if OB 82 is not loaded.
An I/O module with diagnostic Call of OB 82. The IM151-7 CPU interface Response to the diagnostic event,
capability reports a diagnostic module STOPs if OB 82 is not loaded. which depends on the parameter
interrupt. assignments for the I/O module.
Attempt to access a missing or faulty Call of OB 85, if access was attempted during Load OB 85 or OB 122. The start
I/O module. Loose connector update of the process image (OB 85 call must information of the OB contains the
(software or hardware error). be enabled accordingly in the parameters). Call address of the relevant I/O
OB 122 for direct I/O access. The IM151-7 CPU module. Replace the relevant I/O
interface module STOPs if the OB is not module, fix the connector or
loaded. eliminate the program error.
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is The IM151-7 CPU interface module switches to Replace the SIMATIC Micro
faulty. STOP and requests a memory reset. Memory Card, reset the
IM151-7 CPU interface module
memory, transfer the program
again, then set the IM151-7 CPU
interface module to RUN mode.
Reference



10.5.5 Status and error displays of the MPI/DP interface as DP slave
Explanation of the BF LED at the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Table 10- 6 BF LED
IM151-7 CPU
SF BF Meaning
On On/flashes PROFIBUS DP interface error.
To correct or avoid error: See the tables below
Table 10- 7 BF LED at the IM151-7 CPU interface module lights up
Possible error Response of the IM151-7 CPU Possible remedies

interface module
 Bus fault (hardware fault) Call of OB 86, if the IM151-7 CPU is  Check to see if the connector for
in RUN mode and communication PROFIBUS DP is inserted
 DP interface error
between the DP master and DP slave properly.
 I slave operation: No connection to the functioned properly before the error
DP master occurred.  Check the bus cable for a short-
circuit or break.
– IM151-7 CPU is active bus node ⇒ The IM151-7 CPU interface module
bus short circuit STOPs if OB 86 is not loaded.  Analyze the diagnostic data. Edit
– IM151-7 CPU is passive bus node the configuration.
⇒ transmission rate search: no
active node on bus, DP master not
present or turned off or bus
connection interrupted
Table 10- 8 BF LED at the IM151-7 CPU interface module flashes

interface module
Bus error during operation as I slave Call of OB 86, if IM151-7 CPU is in  Check the IM151-7 CPU interface
(active bus node) RUN mode and communicated as a module.
Possible causes: DP slave with the DP master before
the error occurred.  Verify that the bus connector is
 I slave is configured incorrectly properly seated.
The IM151-7 CPU interface module
 Incorrect, but permitted station STOPs if OB 86 is not loaded.  Check for breaks in the bus cable to
address configured the DP master.
 configured address ranges of the  Check the configuration and
actual structure do not correspond parameterization of the
with the set structure parameterized address ranges for
 Station failure of a parameterized the DP master.
sender in direct data exchange
 DP master not available or switched
off



Reference
10.5.6 Status and error displays of the DP master module (parameterizaton as DP

master)
Explanation of the BF LED on the DP master module
Table 10- 9 BF LED
IM151-7 CPU DP master module Meaning

SF BF
On On/flashes PROFIBUS DP interface error.
To correct or avoid error: See the tables below
Table 10- 10 BF LED on the DP master module lights up

interface module
 Bus fault (hardware fault) Call of OB 86 (if the IM151-7 CPU  Check to see if the connector for
interface module is in RUN and has PROFIBUS DP is inserted
 Short-circuit on the bus
previously run DP slaves that are now properly.
failing).
 Check the bus cable for short-
circuit.
STOPs if OB 86 is not loaded.
 Analyze the diagnostic data. Edit
the configuration.



Table 10- 11 BF LED on the DP master module flashes

interface module
The IM151-7 CPU interface module is a Call of OB 86 (if the IM151-7 CPU  Check whether the bus cable on the
DP master: interface module is in RUN and DP master module is connected to
connected DP slaves have since the IM151-7 CPU interface module
 Failure of a connected station
failed).
 At least one of the configured slaves and that the bus is not interrupted.
cannot be accessed.  Wait until the IM151-7 CPU
STOPs if OB 86 is not loaded.
 Incorrect configuration interface module has started up. If
(configured address areas of the the LED does not stop flashing,
actual structure do not correspond check the DP slaves or evaluate the
with the set structure.) diagnostic data for the DP slaves.
 Check the settings for the
configured address areas for the
DP master.
Reference



10.6 Diagnostics on the PROFIBUS DP
10.6.1 Diagnostics of the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a DP master
Evaluate diagnostics in the user program

The figure below illustrates the procedure for evaluating diagnostics data in the user
program.
'LDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW
2%LVFDOOHG
(YDOXDWLRQZLWK (YDOXDWLRQZLWK6)%
6)&RU HDVLHVWRSWLRQ
5HDG2%B0'/B$''5DQG )RUGLDJQRVLQJDIIHFWHGFRPSRQHQWV
5HDG2%B,2B)/$*
,'RIWKH,2PRGXOH FDOO6)%
6HW02'(
(QWHUELWRI2%B,2B)/$* 'LDJQRVWLFGDWDLVHQWHUHGLQWKH
LQ2%B0'/B$''5DWELW 7,1)2DQG$,1)2SDUDPHWHUV
5HVXOW'LDJQRVWLFDGGUHVV
2%B0'/B$''5
7RGLDJQRVHWKHHQWLUH )RUGLDJQRVLQJDIIHFWHG,2PRGXOHVFDOO6)&
'3VODYH
FDOO6)& ,QWKH,1'(;SDUDPHWHUHQWHUGLDJQRVWLFDGGUHVV
2%B0'/B$''5
,QWKH/$''5SDUDPHWHUHQWHU
'LDJQRVWLFDGGUHVV ,QSDUDPHWHU6=/B,'HQWHUWKH,':%
2%B0'/B$''5 GLDJQRVWLFGDWDIRUDQ,2PRGXOH
1RWH
6)&LVDV\QFKURQRXVZKLFKPHDQV
WKDWLWPD\EHFDOOHGPXOWLSOHWLPHVXQWLO
LWVVWDWHKDVFKDQJHGWR%86<
,QLWLDOFDOOLQ2%
H[HFXWLRQFRPSOHWHGLQWKHF\FOH



Diagnostics addresses for DP masters and DP slaves

With the IM151-7 CPU interface module you assign diagnostics addresses for the
PROFIBUS DP. Verify in your configuration that the DP diagnostics addresses are assigned
once to the DP master (for the DP master module) and once to the DP slave.
,0&38DVUHFHLYHU ,0&38DVVHQGHU
'3PDVWHU '3VODYH
352),%86
'LDJQRVWLFVDGGUHVV
Description of the DP master configuration Description of the DP slave configuration

When you configure the DP master, assign two When you configure the DP slave, you also
different diagnostics addresses for an intelligent assign it a diagnostics address (in the associated
DP slave, that is, one diagnostics address for slot DP slave project).
0, and one for slot 2. These two addresses This diagnostics address is referred to as
perform the following functions: assigned to the DP slave below.
 The diagnostics address for slot 0 reports in This diagnostics address is used by the DP slave
the master all events relating to the entire to obtain information about the state of the DP
slave (station representative), for example, master, or bus interruptions.
node failure.
 The diagnostics address for slot 2 is used to
report events concerning this slot. For
example, if the IM151-7 CPU is acting as an
intelligent DP slave, it returns the diagnostic
interrupts for operating state transitions.
These diagnostics addresses are referred to as
assigned to the DP master below.
These diagnostics addresses are used by the DP
master to obtain information about the state of
the DP slave, or about bus interruptions.



Event recognition
The table below shows how the IM151-7 CPU interface module acting as a DP master
recognizes operating mode transitions of a CPU acting as a DP slave or any interruptions of
the data exchange.
Table 10- 12 Event recognition of the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a DP master
Event What happens in the DP master?

Bus interruption (short  Call of OB 86 with the message Station failure (incoming event;
circuit, connector diagnostics address of Slot 0 of the DP slave that is assigned to the
removed) DP master)
 With I/O access: call of OB 122 (I/O access error)
DP slave: RUN → STOP  Call of OB 82 with the message Module error
(incoming event; diagnostics address of Slot 2 of the DP slave that is

assigned to the DP master; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP slave: STOP → RUN  Call of OB 82 with the message Module OK.
(outgoing event; diagnostics address of Slot 2 of the DP slave that is

assigned to the DP master; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=0)
Evaluation in the user program

The table below shows how you can, for example, evaluate RUN to STOP transitions of the
DP slave in the DP master.
Table 10- 13 Evaluating RUN to STOP transitions of the DP slave in the DP master
In the DP master In the DP slave (e.g. CPU 31x-2 DP)

Diagnostics addresses: (Example) Diagnostics addresses: (Example)
Master diagnostics address =1023 Slave diagnostics address =422
Slave diagnostics address =1022 Master diagnostics address = irrelevant
(Slot 0 of slave)
(Diagnostic) address for "Slot 2"=1021
(Slot 2 of slave)
The IM151-7 CPU interface module calls OB 82 CPU: RUN -> STOP
with the following information: The CPU generates a DP slave diagnostic
 OB82_MDL_ADDR:=1021 message frame
 OB82_EV_CLASS:=B#16#39 (incoming event)
 OB82_MDL_DEFECT:=module fault
Tip: This information is also available in the
diagnostics buffer of the IM151-7 CPU interface
module.
In the user program you should also include
SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG" for reading DP slave
diagnostic data.



10.6.2 Reading out slave diagnostic data

The slave diagnostic data is compliant with EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. Depending on
the DP master, diagnostic data for all DP slaves conforming to standard can be read with
STEP 7.
Diagnostics addresses for the receiving station with direct data exchange
For direct data exchange, you assign a diagnostics address in the receiving station:
,0&38DVVHQGHU ,0&38DVUHFHLYHU
352),%86
'LDJQRVWLFVDGGUHVV
Figure 10-2 PROFIBUS DP diagnostics address
In this figure, you see that assign a diagnostics address to the receiving station in your
configuration. The receiving station receives information about the status of the transmitting
station or about a bus interruption by means of this diagnostics address.



Reading out the diagnostic data

The table below shows you how the various DP master systems can read diagnostic
information from a slave.
Table 10- 14 Reading out diagnostic data in the master system, using STEP 5 and STEP 7
Automation system with Block or tab in STEP 7 Application Additional Information

DP master
SIMATIC S7/M7 "DP Slave Diagnostics" Display the slave diagnostics as Refer to the keyword Hardware
tab plain text on the STEP 7 user diagnostics in the STEP 7 online
interface help and in the Programming with
STEP 7
(http://support.automation.siemen
Manual
SFB 54 "RALRM" Reading additional interrupt System and Standard Functions
information from a DP slave or Reference Manual
local module from the relevant (http://support.automation.siemen
OB. s.com/WW/view/en/1214574)
SFC13 "DP NRM_DG" Reading out slave diagnostics System and Standard Functions
(store in the data area of the Reference Manual
user program)
SFC 51 "RDSYSST" Reading SSL sublists. In the System and Standard Functions
diagnostic interrupt, call SFC 51 Reference Manual
with the SSL ID W#16#00B4
and then read out the SSL of
the slave CPU.
SFB 52 "RDREC" and Reading the data records of S7 System and Standard Functions
SFC 59 "RD_REC" diagnostics (stored in the data Reference Manual
area of the user program)
FB 125/FC 125 Evaluating slave diagnostic On the Internet
data (http://support.automation.siemen
SIMATIC S5 with IM 308- FB 192 "IM308C" Reading slave diagnostic data Distributed I/O System ET 200
C operating in DP master (store in the data area of the Manual
mode user program) (http://support.automation.siemen
Example for reading the slave diagnosis with FB 192 "IM308C"

This shows you an example of how to use FB 192 in the STEP 5 user program to read out
slave diagnostics data for a DP slave.



Assumptions regarding the STEP 5 user program

For this STEP 5 user program it is assumed that:
● The IM 308-C operating in DP master mode uses the page frames 0 to 15 (number 0 of
IM 308-C).
● The DP slave is assigned PROFIBUS address 3.
● Slave diagnostics data should be stored in DB 20. You may also use any other DB.
● Slave diagnostic data consists of 26 bytes.
STEP 5 user program
STL Explanation
:A DB 30
:SPA FB 192
Name :IM308C
DPAD : KH F800 //Default address range of IM 308-C
IMST : KY 0.3 //IM no. = 0, PROFIBUS address of the DP slave = 3
FCT : KC SD //function: Read slave diagnostics
GCGR : KM 0 //not evaluated
TYP : KY 0, 20 //S5 data area: DB 20
STAD : KF +1 //Diagnostic data starting at data word 1
LENG : KF 26 //Length of diagnostic data = 26 bytes
ERR : DW 0 //Error code storage in DW 0 of DB 30
Example of reading out S7 diagnostic data with SFC 59 "RD REC"

Here you will find an example of how to use SFC 59 to read S7 diagnostics data records for
a DP slave in the STEP 7 user program. The process of reading the slave diagnostics is
similar for SFC 13.
Assumptions for the STEP 7 user program

For this STEP 7 user program it is assumed that:
● Diagnostic data for the input module at address 200H is to be read.
● Data record 1 is to be read out.
● Data record 1 is to be stored in DB 10.



STEP 7 user program
STL Explanation
CALL SFC 59
REQ :=TRUE //Request to read

IOID :=B#16#54 //Identifier of the address range, here the I/O input
//Logical address of the module
LADDR :=W#16#200 //Data record 1 is to be read
RECNUM :=B#16#1 //An error code is output if an error occurs
RET_VAL :=MW2 //Read operation not finished
BUSY :=MO.0 //DB 10 is target area for the read data record 1
RECORD :=P# DB10.DBX 0.0 BYTE 240
Note:
Data is only returned to the target area if BUSY is reset to 0 and if no negative RET_VAL has
occurred.



Diagnostics addresses
With the IM151-7 CPU interface module you assign diagnostics addresses for the
PROFIBUS DP. When configuring the project, make sure that the DP diagnostics addresses
are assigned once to the DP master and once to the DP slave.
,0&38DVVHQGHU ,0&38DVUHFHLYHU
352),%86
'LDJQRVWLFVDGGUHVV
Figure 10-3 PROFIBUS DP diagnostics address
Description of the DP master configuration Description of the DP slave configuration

When you configure the DP master, assign two When you configure the DP slave, you also
different diagnostics addresses for an intelligent assign it a diagnostics address (in the associated
slave, that is, one diagnostics address for slot 0, DP slave project).
and one for slot 2. Functions of those two Below, this diagnostics address is referred to as
addresses: assigned to DP slave.
 The diagnostics address for slot 0 is used to This diagnostics address is used by the DP slave
report in the master all events relating to the to obtain information about the state of the DP
entire slave (station substitute), for example, master, or bus interruptions.
node failure.
 The diagnostics address for slot 2 is used to
report events concerning this slot. For
example, if the CPU is acting as an I-slave, it
returns the diagnostic interrupts for operating
mode transitions.
From now on, these diagnostics addresses is
referred to as assigned to the DP master .
These diagnostics addresses are used by the DP
master to obtain information about the status of
the DP slave or about bus interruptions.



Event recognition
The table below shows how the IM151-7 CPU interface module detects operating state
transitions or data exchange interruptions as DP slave.
Table 10- 15 Event recognition of the IM151-7 CPU interface module as a DP slave
Event What happens in the DP slave?

Bus interruption (short circuit,  Calls OB86 with the message Station failure (incoming event;
connector removed) diagnostics address of the DP slave, assigned to the DP slave)
 With I/O access: call of OB 122 (I/O access error)
DP master: RUN → STOP  Calls OB82 with the message Faulty module (incoming event;
diagnostics address of the DP slave assigned to the DP slave;
variable OB82_MDL_STOP = 1)
DP master: STOP → RUN  Call of OB82 with the message Module OK. (outgoing event;
diagnostics address assigned the DP slave; variable
OB82_MDL_STOP = 0)
Evaluation in the user program

The table below shows how you can, for example, evaluate RUN-STOP transitions of the DP
master in the DP slave (see also the previous table).
Table 10- 16 Evaluating RUN-STOP transitions in the DP Master/DP Slave
In the DP master In the DP slave

Diagnostics addresses: (Example) Diagnostics addresses: (Example)
Master diagnostics address = 1023 Slave diagnostics address = 422
Slave diagnostics address in the master system = Master diagnostics address = irrelevant
1022
(Slot 0 of slave)
(Diagnostic) address for "Slot 2" = 1021
(Slot 2 of slave)
CPU: RUN → STOP → The CPU calls OB 82 with the following
information, for example:
 OB 82_MDL_ADDR: = 422
 OB82_EV_CLASS: = B#16#39 (incoming
event)
 OB82_MDL_DEFECT: = Module fault
Tip: The CPU diagnostics buffer also contains
this information.



10.6.3 Interrupts on the DP Master
Interrupts with S7 DP master

Process interrupts from an intelligent slave with SFC 7
In the IM151-7 CPU interface module as DP slave, you can trigger a process interrupt in the
DP master from the user program.
The call of SFC 7 "DP_PRAL" triggers a call of OB 40 in the user program of the DP master.
The SFC 7 allows you to forward interrupt information to the DP master in a double word.
This information can then be evaluated in the OB40_POINT_ADDR variable in the OB40.
The interrupt information can be programmed user-specific. You will find a detailed
description of SFC7 "DP_PRAL" in the System and Standard Functions for S7-300/400
Setting user-defined interrupts of Intelligent Slaves using SFB 75
In the IM151-7 CPU interface module as DP slave, you can trigger a any interrupt in the DP
master from the user program. SFB 75 "SALRM" is used to send a process or diagnostic
interrupt from a slot in the transfer area (virtual slot) to the associated DP master from the
user program on an intelligent slave. This starts the associated OB on the DP master.
Additional interrupt-specific information may be included. You can read this additional
information in the DP master using SFB 54 "RALRM".
Interrupts with another DP master

If you operate the IM151-7 CPU interface module with another DP master, these interrupts
are recreated in the device-specific diagnostic data of the IM151-7 CPU interface module.
You have to post-process the relevant diagnostic events in the user program of the DP
master.
Note
In order to allow the evaluation of diagnostics and process interrupts by means of device-
specific diagnostics using a different DP master, please note that:
The DP master should be able to save the diagnostics messages, which means the
diagnostics messages should be stored in a ring buffer within the DP master. For example, if
the DP master can not save the diagnostic messages, only the last incoming diagnostic
message would be saved.
In your user program, you have to poll the relevant bits of the device-specific diagnostics
data in cyclic intervals. Make allowances for the PROFIBUS DP bus cycle time, for example,
to be able to poll these bits at least once and in synchronism to the bus cycle time.
You cannot utilize process interrupts in device-specific diagnostics with an IM 308-C as a DP
master, because only incoming events but not outgoing events are reported.



10.6.4 Structure of the slave diagnostics when the CPU is operated as I-slave
Syntax of the diagnostics datagram for slave diagnostics
%\WH
%\WH 6WDWLRQVWDWXVHVWR
%\WH
%\WH 0DVWHU352),%86DGGUHVV
%\WH KLJKE\WH
'HYLFH,'
ORZE\WH
%\WH
%\WH ,GHQWLILHUUHODWHGGLDJQRVWLFGDWD
.
7KHOHQJWKGHSHQGVRQWKHQXPEHURI
WR . FRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJHVRIWKHWUDQVIHU
. PHPRU\
%\WH[
%\WH[
0RGXOHVWDWXVGHYLFHVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV
.
7KHOHQJWKGHSHQGVRQWKHQXPEHURI
WR . FRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJHV
.
%\WH\
%\WH\ ,QWHUUXSWVWDWXVGHYLFHVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV

. 7KHOHQJWKGHSHQGVRQWKHW\SHRILQWHUUXSW
WR .
.
%\WH]

([FHSWLRQ,QFDVHRIDQLQFRUUHFWFRQILJXUDWLRQIURPWKH'3PDVWHUWKH
'3VODYHLQWHUSUHWVFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJHV +LQE\WH
Figure 10-4 Structure of slave diagnostic data



Station Status 1
Table 10- 17 Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0)
Bit Meaning Remedy

0 1: DP slave cannot be addressed by DP  Is the correct DP address set on the DP
master. slave?
 Are the bus connectors connected?
 Does the DP slave have power?
 Correct configuration of the RS485
Repeater?
 Perform a reset on the DP slave.
1 1: DP slave is not ready for data exchange.  Wait for the slave to complete start-up.
2 1: Configuration data sent by DP master to  Was the software set for the correct
the DP slave is inconsistent with slave station type or DP slave configuration?
configuration.
3 1: Diagnostic interrupt, generated by a  You can read the diagnostic data.
RUN-STOP transition on the CPU or by the
SFB 75
0: Diagnostic interrupt, generated by a
STOP-RUN transition on the CPU or by the
SFB 75
4 1: Function is not supported; for example,  Check configuration data.
changing the DP address using software
5 0: The bit is always "0".  -
6 1: DP slave type inconsistent with software  Was the software set for the right station
configuration. type? (parameter assignment error)
7 1: DP slave was assigned parameters by a  The bit is always 1 if, for example, you
DP master other than the DP master are currently accessing the DP slave via
currently accessing the DP slave. the programming device or a different
DP master.
The DP address of the parameter
assignment master is in the "master
PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte.



Station Status 2
Bit Meaning
0 1: The DP slave requires new parameters and configuration.
1 1: A diagnostic message was received. The DP slave cannot resume operation until the
error has been cleared (static diagnostic message).
2 1: This bit is always "1" if a DP slave exists with this DP address.
3 1: The watchdog monitor is enabled on this DP slave.
4 1: DP slave has received control command "FREEZE".
5 1: DP slave has received control command "SYNC".
6 0:The bit is always set to "0".
7 1: DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been excluded from cyclic processing.
Station Status 3
Bit Meaning
0 to 6 0: These bits are always "0"
7 1: There are more diagnostic messages than the DP slave can save.
The DP master cannot enter all diagnostic messages sent from the DP slave in its
diagnostic buffer.
Master PROFIBUS address

The "Master PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte stores the DP address of the DP master:
● that has configured the DP slave and
● that has read and write access to the DP slave
Table 10- 20 Structure of the Master PROFIBUS address (byte 3)
Bit Meaning
0 to 7 DP address of the DP master that has assigned parameters to the DP slave and has
read/write access to that DP slave.
FFH: DP slave was not configured by a DP master



Device ID
The device ID is a manufacturer ID containing a code which specifies the type of the DP
slave.
Table 10- 21 Structure of the device ID (bytes 4, 5)
Byte 4 Byte 5 Device ID

81H 99H IM151-7 CPU



Structure of the configured address range diagnostics of the IM151-7 CPU

Module diagnostics indicate the configured address range of intermediate memory that has
received an entry.
%LW
%\WH
/HQJWKRIWKHLGHQWLILHUUHODWHGGLDJQRVWLFGDWDLQFOXGLQJE\WH
GHSHQGLQJRQWKHQXPEHURIFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJHVXSWRE\WHV
&RGHIRU,'UHODWHGGLDJQRVWLFV
%LW
%\WH
3UHVHWFRQILJXUDWLRQำ$FWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ
3UHVHWFRQILJXUDWLRQำ$FWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQRUVODYH&38LQ6723
3UHVHWFRQILJXUDWLRQำ$FWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ
(QWU\IRUVWFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
(QWU\IRUQGFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
(QWU\IRUUGFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
(QWU\IRUWKFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
%LW
%\WH
(QWU\IRUWKWRWKFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
%LW
%\WH
(QWU\IRUWKWRVWFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
%LW
%\WH
(QWU\IRUQGWRWKFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
%LW
%\WH
(QWU\IRUVWFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
(QWU\IRUQGFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
Figure 10-5 Identifier-related diagnostic data



Structure of the module status

The module status reflects the status of the configured address ranges, and provides
detailed ID-specific diagnostics with respect to the configuration. The module status follows
the identifier-related diagnostics and consists of a maximum of 13 bytes.
%LW
%\WH[
/HQJWKRIWKHPRGXOHVWDWXVLQFOXGLQJE\WH[ PD[E\WHV
&RGHIRUGHYLFHVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV
%LW
%\WH[ 6WDWXVW\SH0RGXOHVWDWXV
+ 0RGXOHVWDWXV
&RGHIRUVWDWXVPHVVDJH
%\WH[ + DOZD\V
%\WH[ + DOZD\V
%LW
%\WH[
&38VORW
VWFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
%LW
%\WH[
QGFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
UGFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
% 0RGXOHRNYDOLG
WKFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH GDWD
WKFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH % 0RGXOHHUURULQYDOLGGDWD
%LW
0RGXOHGHIHFWLYH
%\WH[ % ,QFRUUHFWPRGXOHLQYDOLG
GDWD
% 1RPRGXOHLQYDOLGGDWD
WKFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH

%LW
%\WH\
VWFRQILJXUHGDGGUHVVUDQJH
Figure 10-6 Structure of the module status



Structure of the interrupt status

The interrupt status of module diagnostics provides details on a DP slave. Device-related
diagnostics starts at byte y and has a maximum length of 20 bytes.
The following figure describes the structure and content of the bytes for a configured address
range of transfer memory.
%LW
%\WH\
/HQJWKRIWKHGHYLFHVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFVLQFOXGLQJ
E\WH[ PD[LPXPE\WHV
&RGHIRUGHYLFHVSHFLILFGLDJQRVWLFV
%\WH\ +&RGHIRUGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW
+&RGHIRUSURFHVVLQWHUUXSW
%LW
%\WH\ 6ORWQR
&38
1XPEHURIWKH
7UDQVIHUPHPRU\
1RIXUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ಻DERXW
2QO\GLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSW
%\WH\
GLDJQRVWLFVWDWH
,QFRPLQJGLDJQRVLVWKHUHLVDW
OHDVWRQHHUURU
*RLQJGLDJQRVLV
7KHUHLVRXWJRLQJGLDJQRVLV
GHYLDWLQJHUURU
%\WH\

%\WH\ 'LDJQRVWLFVRULQWHUUXSWGDWD

%\WH]
([DPSOHIRU%\WH\
&38 +
VWDGGUHVVUDQJH +
QGDGGUHVVUDQJH +
HWF
Figure 10-7 Device-specific diagnostics
Structure of the interrupt data for a process interrupt (from byte y+4)
During a hardware interrupt (in byte y+1, code 02H stands for hardware interrupt), as of byte
y+4, the four bytes of interrupt information which you transferred in the I-slave using SFC 7
"DP_PRAL" or SFB 75 "SALRM" during generation of the hardware interrupt for the master
are transferred.



Structure of the interrupt data when a diagnostic interrupt is generated in response to an operating
status change by the intelligent slave (after byte y+4)
Byte y+1 contains the code for a diagnostic interrupt (01H). The diagnostic data contains the
16 bytes of status information from the CPU. The figure below shows the allocation of the
first four bytes of diagnostic data. The next 12 bytes are always 0.
The data in these bytes correspond to the contents of data record 0 of diagnostic data in
STEP 7 (in this case, not all bits are used).
%LW
%\WH\
0RGXOH2.
0RGXOHSUREOHP
%LW
%\WH\
,GHQWLILFDWLRQIRUDGGUHVVUDQJHVRIWKH
಻WUDQVIHUPHPRU\FRQVWDQW
%LW
%\WH\
581PRGH
2SHUDWLQJPRGHLV6723
%LW
%\WH\
1RWH%\WH\WR%\WH\DUHDOZD\V
Figure 10-8 Bytes y+4 to y+7 for a diagnostic interrupt (operating status change by intelligent slave)



Structure of the interrupt data when a diagnostic interrupt is generated by SFB 75 in the I slave (as of
byte y+4)
%LW
PRGXOHRN
%\WH\ 0RGXOHIDXOW
1RWHWKH6)%2SHUDWLQJ
0DQXDO
%LW
%\WH\ 1RWHWKDWWKHVHGLDJQRVWLFVGDWD಻KDYHD
IL[HGPHDQLQJLQWKH಻6FRQWH[W
%LW 'HWDLOHGLQIRUPDWLRQFDQEHIRXQGLQWKH

67(3RQOLQHKHOSRULQWKH6\VWHP
%\WH\ 6RIWZDUHIRU66\VWHPDQG
6WDQGDUG)XQFWLRQVUHIHUHQFHPDQXDO
'LDJQRVWLFV'DWDVHFWLRQ
%LW

%\WH\

%LW

%\WH\
Figure 10-9 Bytes y+4 to y+19 for the diagnostics interrupt (SFB75)



10.7 Defective configuration statuses of the ET 200S
10.7 Defective configuration statuses of the ET 200S
Fault indications in the diagnostics buffer

Defective configuration statuses of the ET 200S distributed I/O system are entered in the
diagnostics buffer.
Error type Error location Cause of error Remedy

1 04 to 66 (slot) Communication interruption Check the configuration
If applicable 67 Displays the first slot at which no I/O of the ET 200S.
(bus terminator module is recognized.
module)
 Missing I/O module during POWER
ON or several I/O modules are missing
during operation.
 Interruptions at the rear panel bus
 Short-circuit at the rear panel bus ("04"
is output as the slot).
 Termination module missing.
If the termination module is missing,
the number of the inserted I/O
modules + 1 are output.
10.8 Failure of the load voltage from the power module
Load voltage failure

Should the load voltage of the power module fail, the electronic modules will behave as
follows:
● No output for output modules.
● Substitute values are generated for input modules.
Note
Electronic modules that are re-parameterized during operation must be parameterized yet
again once the load voltage has been restored to the power module.



10.8 Failure of the load voltage from the power module


Technical data 11
11.1 General technical data
Reference
The IM151-7 CPU interface module and the DP master module conform to the standards
and test values that apply to the ET 200S distributed I/O device. Detailed information on the
general technical specifications can be found in the ET 200S Distributed I/O Device


Technical data
11.2 IM151-7 CPU Interface Module
11.2.1 Block diagram IM 151-7 CPU with DP master module

The following figure shows the block diagram of the IM151-7 CPU interface module with the
optional DP master module.
352),%86'3PDVWHU
56
$
%
*DOYDQLF
LVRODWLRQ
'3PDVWHUPRGXOH
%DFNSODQHEXV 352),%86b'3FRQQHFWLRQ
56
$
%
(76EDFNSODQH
6723 EXV *DOYDQLF
LQWHUIDFHFRQQHFWLRQ LVRODWLRQ
581
(OHFWURQLFV
&38
6) w35$0
581
6723
%) 05(6
0RGHVHOHFWRU
)5&( VZLWFK
21
/
,QWHUQDOYROWDJHVXSSO\
00&
0
Figure 11-1 Block diagram of the IM151-7 CPU interface module with DP master module


Technical data
11.2.2 Technical specifications IM151-7 CPU
Table 11- 1 Technical specifications of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Technical specifications
IM151-7 CPU and version
Order number 6ES7151-7AA21-0AB0
 Hardware version 01
 Firmware version V 3.3
 Associated programming package STEP 7 as of V5.2 + SP1 + HSP219 or

V5.5 + SP1
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 60 x 119.5 x 75
Weight ca. 200 g
Memory
Work memory
 Work memory 128 KB
 Expandable No
 Capacity of the retentive memory for retentive 64 KB

data blocks
Load memory
 Pluggable (MMC) Yes
 Pluggable (MMC), max. 8 MB
Buffering Yes (ensured with SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

- maintenance-free)
Data retention on the SIMATIC Micro Memory At least 10 years
Card (after final programming)
Execution times
Processing times of
 Bit operations 0.06 µs
 Word instructions 0.12 µs
 Fixed-point arithmetic 0.16 µs
 Floating-point arithmetic 0.59 µs
Timers / counters and their retentivity

S7 counters
 Number 256
 Retentivity, configurable Yes
 Retentivity, preset From C0 to C7
 Counting range 0 to 999


Technical data
IEC Counters
 Available Yes
 Type SFB
 Number Unlimited
(limited only by work memory)
S7 timers
 Number 256
 Retentivity, configurable Yes
 Retentivity, preset Not retentive
 Timer range 10 ms to 9990 s

IEC timers Yes
 Type SFB
 Number Unlimited
(limited only by work memory)
Data areas and their retentive address areas
Bit memory
 Number, max. 256 bytes
 Retentivity, configurable Yes, from MB0 to MB255
 Retentivity, preset From MB0 to MB15

Number of clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)
Local data per priority class, max. 32 KB per runtime level / 2 KB per block
Blocks
Total number of blocks 1024 (DBs, FCs, FBs)
The maximum number of blocks that can be
loaded may be reduced if you are using another
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
OBs See S7300-CPUs and ET 200-CPUs Instruction
List
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vie
w/en/31977679)
 Size, max. 64 KB
 Number of free-cycle OBs 1 (OB 1)
 Number of time-of-day interrupt OBs 1 (OB 10)
 Number of time-delay interrupt OBs 2 (OB 20, 21)
 Number of cyclic interrupt OBs 4 (OB 32, OB 33, OB 34, OB 35)
 Number of hardware interrupt OBs 1 (OB 40)
 Number of DPV1 interrupt OBs 3 (OB 55, 56, 57)
 Number of asynchronous error OBs 6 (OB 80, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87)
(OB 83 only for centralized I/O, not for DP)
 Number of startup OBs 1 (OB 100)
 Number of synchronous error interrupt OBs 2 (OB 121, 122)


Technical data
Nesting depth
 Per priority class 16
 Additional within an error OB 4

FBs See Instruction List
 Number, max. 1024
(in the number range 0 to 7999)
 Size 64 KB
FCs See Instruction List
 Number, max. 1024
(in the number range 0 to 7999)
 Size 64 KB
Data blocks
 Number, max. 1024 (in the number range 1 to 16000)
 Size, max. 64 KB
 Non-retain support (configurable retentive Yes

address areas)
Address areas (I/O)
Total I/O address area
 Inputs, freely adressable 2048 bytes
 Outputs, freely adressable 2048 bytes
 Of which distributed
2048 bytes
– Inputs, freely adressable
2048 bytes
– Outputs, freely adressable
Process I/O image
 Inputs, adjustable 2048 bytes
 Outputs, adjustable 2048 bytes
 Inputs, preset 128 bytes
 Outputs, preset 128 bytes

Digital channels
 Inputs 16336
 Outputs 16336
 Inputs, central 496
 Outputs, central 496

Analog channels
 Inputs 1021
 Outputs 1021
 Inputs, central 124
 Outputs, central 124


Technical data
Removal
Mounting rail 1
I/O module for each ET 200S Max. 63
Station width ≤ 1 m or < 2 m
Current carrying capacity per load group (power Max. 10 A
module)
Time-of-day
Clock
 Hardware clock (real-time clock) Yes
 Factory setting DT#1994-01-01-00:00:00
 Buffered, can be synchronized Yes
 Buffered period Typically 6 weeks

(at an ambient temperature of 40 °C)
 Behavior of the clock on expiration of the The clock keeps running, continuing at the time-
buffered period of-day it had when power was switched off.
 Behavior of the real-time clock after POWER The clock continues running after POWER OFF.
ON
 Deviation per day typ. 2 s, max. 10 s
Operating hours counter

 Number 1
 Number 0
 Value range 0 to 231 hours

(using the SFC 101)
 Granularity 1 hour
 Retentive Yes; must be manually restarted after every

restart
 Supported Yes
 On MPI, time master Yes
 On MPI, time slave Yes
 On DP, time master Yes (DP slave must be time slave)
 On DP, time slave Yes
 On the AS, time master No
 On the AS, time slave No


Technical data
S7 message functions
Number of stations that can be logged on for 12 (depends on the number of connections
signaling functions configured for programming device / OP
communication)
Process diagnostics messages
 Supported Yes
 Simultaneously enabled interrupt S blocks, 300

max.
Test and startup functions
Status/control
 Monitor/modify variable Yes
 Variables Inputs, outputs, memory bits, DBs, timers,

counters
 Maximum number of variables 30
 Number of variables, of those status variables, 30

max.
 Number of variables, of those modify variables, 14

max.
Force
 Force Yes
 Forcing, variables Inputs/Outputs
 Maximum number of variables 10
Block status Yes; (max. 2 blocks simultaneously)

Single-step Yes
Number of breakpoints 4
Diagnostics buffer
 Yes Yes
 Maximum number of entries 500
 Adjustable No
 of which are power-failure-proof The last 100 entries are retained.
 Maximum number of entries that can be read in 499

RUN Yes (from 10 to 499)
10
– Adjustable
– Default
Service data can be read Yes
Monitoring functions
Status LEDs Yes


Technical data
Communication functions
PG/OP communication Yes
Prioritized OCM communication
 Supported No
Routing Yes (with DP master module)

 Connections, max. 4
Data set routing Yes (with DP master module)

Global data communication
 Supported Yes
 Number of GD circles, max. 8
 Number of GD packages, max. 8

8
– Senders, max.
8
– Receivers, max.
 Size of GD packages, max. 22 bytes

22 bytes
– of which consistent, max.
S7 basic communication
 Supported Yes
 User data per job, max. 76 bytes
 User data per job (consistent), max. 76 bytes (for X-SEND/REC); 64 bytes (for X-
PUT/GET as server)
S7 communication
 As server Yes
 As client No
 User data per job, max. See STEP 7 online help, common parameters
of SFBs/FBs and SFC/FC for S7 communication
 User data per job (consistent), max.
Number of connections
 Total 12
Suitable for PG communication 11

 PG communication, reserved 1
 PG communication, configurable, min. 1
 PG communication, configurable, max. 11
Suitable for OP communication 11

 OP communication, reserved 1
 OP communication, configurable, min. 1
 OP communication, configurable, max. 11


Technical data
Suitable for S7 basic communication 10
 S7 basic communication, reserved (default) 0
 S7 basic communication, configurable, min. 0
 S7 basic communication, configurable, max. 10
1st interface
Port designation X1
Type of interface Integrated RS 485 interface
Physics RS 485
Isolated Yes
Max. interface power supply (15V DC to 30V DC) 80 mA
Connection 9-pin sub-D socket
Functionality
MPI Yes
DP master No
DP slave Yes (active/passive)
Point-to-point link No
MPI
Services
Routing Yes (with DP master module)
Global data communication Yes
S7 basic communication Yes
S7 communication, as server Yes
S7 communication, as client No
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
DP slave
Services
Routing Yes (only with active, integrated DP slave
interface and installed DP master module in DP
master operation)
Global data communication No
S7 basic communication No
S7 communication Yes (only server; connection configured at one
end)
Direct data exchange Yes
DPV1 No
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Automatic baud rate detection Yes (only if interface is passive)


Technical data
Transfer memory
 Inputs 244 bytes
 Outputs 244 bytes
Address range, max. 32

 User data per address range, max. 32 bytes
GSD file The current GSD file is available for download

from the Internet
w/en/10805317/133100).
2nd interface
Port designation X2; on the DP master module
Type of interface RS 485, integrated interface on the DP master
module
Physics RS 485
Isolated Yes
Max. interface power supply No
(15V DC to 30 V)
Connection 9-pin sub-D socket
Functionality
MPI No
DP master Yes
DP slave No
DP master
Services
Routing Yes
Data set routing Yes (to field devices on the PROFIBUS DP)
Global data communication No
S7 basic communication Yes (intelligent blocks only)
S7 communication Yes (only server; connection configured at one
end)
Transmission rate, max. Up to 12 Mbps
Support for constant bus cycle time Yes
Isochronous mode No
Enable/disable DP slaves Yes
 Max. number of DP slaves that can be enabled 8
/ disabled simultaneously
SYNC/FREEZE Yes
Direct data exchange Yes
DPV1 Yes
Number of DP slaves, max. 32


Technical data
Address area
 Inputs, max. 2048 bytes
 Outputs, max. 2048 bytes
User data per DP slave

 Inputs, max. 244 bytes
 Outputs, max. 244 bytes
Programming
 LAD Yes
 FBD Yes
 STL Yes
 SCL Yes
 CFC Yes
 GRAPH Yes
 HiGraph Yes
Instruction set See Instruction List

Nesting levels 8
System functions (SFC) See Instruction List
System function blocks (SFB) See Instruction List
User program protection / password protection Yes
Encryption of blocks Yes; with S7 Block Privacy
Voltages, currents, electrical potentials
Rated supply voltage for the electronic 24 VDC
components 1L+
 Permissible range 19.2 V to 28.8 V
 Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction
 Short-circuit protection Yes
 Power failure buffering 5 ms
Current consumption from rated supply voltage

1L+
 IM151-7 CPU Typically 320 mA
 IM151-7 CPU + DP master module Typically 410 mA
 Power supply for the ET 200S backplane bus Max. 700 mA
Inrush current Typically 1.8 A

I2 t Typically 0.09 A2s


Technical data
External fusing of power supply lines
(recommended)
 Electronic / encoder supply 1L+ 24 VDC / 16 A circuit-breaker with type B or C
tripping characteristic
Note:
A 24V DC/16A circuit-breaker with type B
tripping characteristic trips before the equipment
fuse is tripped.
A 24 VDC/16A circuit-breaker with type C
tripping characteristic trips after the equipment
fuse is tripped.
Power loss Typically 4.2 W
Insulation tested with 500 VDC
Galvanic isolation
 between the backplane bus and supply No
voltages 1L+
 between the electronics and supply voltage No

1L+
Maximum potential difference 75 VDC, 60 VAC
Status, interrupts, diagnostics
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostics function Yes
Group errors Red "SF" LED
Monitoring of the supply voltage for the electronic Green LED "ON"
components 1L+


Technical data
11.3 DP master module
11.3.1 Technical specifications - DP master module
Table 11- 2 Technical specifications of the DP master module
Removal
DP master module
 Position To the right of IM151-7 CPU
 Number per IM151-7 CPU 1
Dimensions
Mounting dimensions W x H x D (mm) 35 x 119.5 x 75
Weight ca. 100 g
PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring Red "BF" LED


Technical data


Appendix A
A.1 Order numbers
A.1.1 Module order numbers
Table A- 1 IM151-7 CPU order numbers
Designation Order number

IM151-7 CPU interface module with terminating module, 1 unit * 6ES7151-7AA21-0AB0
* The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is not supplied as standard.
DP master module
Table A- 2 DP master module order numbers

DP master module, 1 unit 6ES7138-4HA00-0AB0


Appendix
A.1 Order numbers
A.1.2 Order numbers of accessories
IM151-7 CPU interface module accessories
Table A- 3 IM151-7 CPU accessories order numbers

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k 6ES7953-8LFxx-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 128k 6ES7953-8LGxx-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 512k 6ES7953-8LJxx-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 2M 6ES7953-8LLxx-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 4M 6ES7953-8LMxx-0AA0
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 8M (suitable for an FW update) 6ES7953-8LPxx-0AA0
Label sheets DIN A4, 10 units
 beige 6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
 Yellow 6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
 red 6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
 petrol 6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0


Appendix
A.1 Order numbers
Connectors and cables
Table A- 4 Connectors and cables order numbers

PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS bus connector (12 Mbps),
90° cable outlet
 without PG connection socket 6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0
 with PG connection socket 6ES7972-0BB12-0XA0
PROFIBUS bus connector (12 Mbps)

with FastConnect connection system, 90° cable outlet
PROFIBUS bus connector (12 Mbps),

35° cable outlet
PROFIBUS bus connector (12 Mbps)

with FastConnect connection system, 35° cable outlet
PROFIBUS FC cable
Sold by meter, min. ordering quantity 20 m
Delivery unit max. 1000 m, 1 m
 FC Standard Cable 6XV1830-0EH10
 FC Trailing Cable (for cable carriers) 6XV1830-3EH10
 FC Food Cable (PE sheath) 6XV1830-0GH10
 FC Food Cable (PUR sheath) 6XV1830-0JH10
PROFIBUS FastConnect stripping tool 6GK1905-6AA00


Appendix
A.2 Dimension drawings
A.2 Dimension drawings
A.2.1 IM151-7 CPU Interface Module

① Mounting rail rest
Figure A-1 Dimension drawing IM151-7 CPU interface module


Appendix
A.3 Cycle and response times
A.2.2 DP master module
DP master module

① Mounting rail rest
Figure A-2 Dimension drawing DP master module
A.3.1 Overview
Overview
This section contains detailed information about the following topics:
● Cycle time
● Response time
● Interrupt response time
Reference: Cycle time

You can view the cycle time of your user program on the programming device. For additional
information, refer to the STEP 7 Online Help or to the Configuring Hardware and
Connections in STEP 7 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/45531110)
manual.


Appendix
Reference: Execution time

Execution times are listed in the S7300-CPUs and ET 200-CPUs Instruction List
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/31977679). The instruction list contains
the execution times in table form for all
● STEP 7 instructions processed by the IM151-7 CPU interface module,
● SFCs / SFBs integrated in the IM151-7 CPU interface module,
● The IEC functions that can be called in STEP 7.
A.3.2 Cycle time
A.3.2.1 Overview: Cycle time
Introduction
This section explains what we mean by the term "cycle time", what it consists of, and how
you can calculate it.
Meaning of the term cycle time

The cycle time represents the time that an operating system needs for one program pass,
i.e. one OB 1 cycle, including all program sections and system activities interrupting this
cycle. This time is monitored.
Time slice model

Cyclic program processing, and therefore user program execution, is based on time shares.
To clarify these processes, let us assume that every time share has a length of precisely
1 ms.
Process image
During cyclic program processing, the IM151-7 CPU interface module requires a consistent
image of the process signal. To ensure this, the process signals are read / written prior to
program execution. The IM151-7 CPU interface module then does not address input (I) and
output (Q) operand areas directly at the I/O modules, but rather accesses the system
memory area of the IM151-7 CPU interface module containing the I/O process image.


Appendix
Sequence of cyclic program processing

The table and figure below show the phases in cyclic program processing.
Table A- 5 Cyclic program processing
Step Sequence
1 The operating system initiates cycle time monitoring.
2 The IM151-7 CPU interface module writes the values from the process output image to
the output modules.
3 The IM151-7 CPU interface module reads the status at the inputs of the input modules
and then updates the process input image.
4 The IM151-7 CPU interface module processes the user program in time slices and
executes the operations specified in the program.
5 At the end of a cycle, the operating system executes queued tasks, for example, loading
and deleting blocks.
6 The IM151-7 CPU interface module then returns to the start of the cycle, and restarts the
cycle time monitoring.
3URFHVVLPDJHRIRXWSXWV 2
3,4
7LPHVOLFHVPVHDFK
3
&\FOHWLPH
3URFHVVLPDJHRILQSXWV
3,,
8VHUSURJUDP
4
&\FOHFRQWUROSRLQW&&3 5
2SHUDWLQJV\VWHP26
7LPHVOLFHVPVHDFK

2SHUDWLQJV\VWHP
8VHUSURJUDP
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
3,4 3URFHVVLPDJHRIRXWSXWV
3,, 3URFHVVLPDJHRILQSXWV
&&3 &\FOHFKHFNSRLQW
26 2SHUDWLQJV\VWHP
In contrast to S7-400 CPUs, the IM151-7 CPU interface module only accesses data with an
OP / TP (monitor and modify functions) at the cycle control point (for data consistency, see
section Technical data (Page 179)). Processing of the user program is not interrupted by the
monitor and modify functions.


Appendix
Extending the cycle time

Always make allowances for the extension of the cycle time of a user program due to:
● Time-based interrupt processing
● Process interrupt processing
● Diagnostics and error processing
● Processing isochronic interrupts
● Communication with programming devices (PGs) and Operator Panels (OPs)
● Testing and commissioning such as, e.g. status/controlling of variables or block status
functions
● Transfer and deletion of blocks, compressing user program memory
● Write/read access to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card using SFC 82 to 84 in the user
program
A.3.2.2 Calculating the cycle time
Introduction
The cycle time is derived from the sum of the following influencing factors.
Process image update

The table below shows the times that an IM151-7 CPU interface module needs to update the
process image (process image transfer time). The specified times may be extended as a
result of interrupts or IM151-7 CPU interface module communication. The process image
transfer time is calculated as follows:
Table A- 6 Formula for calculating the typical transfer time for the process image (PI)
The transfer time of the process image is calculated as follows:

Base load K + Number of bytes in the PI for ET 200S I/Os (A)
+ Number of words in the PI via PROFIBUS DP (D)
= Transfer time for the process image
Table A- 7 Data for calculating the process image (PI) transfer time
Constant Components IM151-7 CPU

C Base load 140 µs
A per byte in the PO for centralized ET 200S I/Os 60 µs
D per word in the DP area for the DP interface 0.5 µs
(PROFIBUS DP only) integrated in the DP master


Appendix
Extending the user program processing time

In addition to actually working through the user program, the operating system of your
IM151-7 CPU interface module also runs a number of processes in parallel, such as timer
management for the core operating system. These processes extend the processing time of
the user program by up to 10%.
Operating system processing time at the cycle control point

The table below shows the operating system processing time at the cycle control point of the
IM151-7 CPU interface module. This time applies without:
● Testing and commissioning routines, e.g. status/controlling of variables or block status
functions
● Transfer and deletion of blocks, compressing user program memory
● Communication
● Writing, reading of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with SFC 82 to 84
Table A- 8 Typical operating system processing time at the cycle control point
Interface module Cycle control at the cycle control point (CCP)

IM151-7 CPU 150 μs
Extension of the cycle time as a result of nested interrupts

Enabled interrupts also extend cycle time. Details are found in the table below.
Table A- 9 Typical extended cycle time due to nested interrupts
Interrupt type Process Diagnostic Time-of- Delay interrupt Watchdog

interrupt interrupt day interrupt
interrupt
IM151-7 CPU 250 µs 250 µs 300 μs 200 µs 170 µs
The program runtime at interrupt level must be added to this time extension.
Extension of the cycle time due to error
Table A- 10 Typical cycle time extension as a result of errors
Type of error Programming errors I/O access errors

IM151-7 CPU 120 µs 130 µs
You have to add the program execution time of the interrupt OB to this increase. The times
required for multiple nested interrupt/error OBs are added accordingly.


Appendix
A.3.2.3 Communication load
Configured communication load for PG/OP communication and S7 communication

The CPU operating system continuously provides a specified percentage of total CPU
processing performance (time slice technology) for communication tasks. Processing
performance not required for communication is made available to other processes.
In the hardware configuration you can specify a communication load value between 5% and
50%. The default value is 20%.
The extension of the cycle time is dependent on the communication loading and can
fluctuate.
You can use the following formula for calculating the maximum cycle time extension factor:
100 / (100 – configured communication load in %)
7LPHVOLFHPV
8VHUSURJUDPLQWHUUXSW
2SHUDWLQJV\VWHP
8VHUSURJUDP
3HUFHQWDJHFDQEHSDUDPHWHUL]HGEHWZHHQDQG
&RPPXQLFDWLRQ
Example: 20% communication load

In your hardware configuration, you have specified a communication load of 20%. The
calculated cycle time is 10 ms. Using the above formula, the cycle time is extended by the
factor 1.25.
Example: 50% communication load

In your hardware configuration, you have specified a communication load of 50%. The
calculated cycle time is 10 ms. Using the above formula, the cycle time is extended by the
factor 2.


Appendix
Dependency of actual cycle time on the communication load

The figure below describes the non-linear dependency of the actual cycle time on the
communication load. In our example we have chosen a cycle time of 10 ms.
&\FOHWLPH
PV
,QWKLVDUHD\RXFDQVHWWKH
FRPPXQLFDWLRQORDG
PV
PV
PV
PV
PV

&RPPXQLFDWLRQORDG
Influence on the actual cycle time

From the statistical viewpoint, asynchronous events such as interrupts occur more frequently
within the OB1 cycle when the cycle time is extended as a result of communication load.
This further extends the OB1 cycle. This extension depends on the number of events that
occur per OB1 cycle and the time required to process these events.
Note
Change the value of the "communication load" parameter to check the effects on the cycle
time during system runtime. You must consider the communication load when setting the
maximum cycle time, otherwise time errors may occur.
Tips
● Use the default setting whenever possible.
● Increase this value only if the CPU is used primarily for communication and if the user
program is not time critical.
● In all other situations you should only reduce this value.


Appendix
A.3.2.4 Cycle time extension as a result of test and commissioning functions
Runtimes
The runtimes of the testing and commissioning functions are operating system runtimes, so
they are the same for every CPU. How the cycle time is extended as a result of active testing
and commissioning functions is shown in the table below.
Table A- 11 Cycle time extension as a result of test and commissioning functions
Function IM151-7 CPU

Status variable Negligible
Control variable Negligible
Status block Typ. 3 µs for each monitored line
+ 3 x runtime of monitored block
The monitoring of large blocks and the monitoring of loops can lead to a
significant increase in the cycle time.
Setting process and test mode in the LAD/FBD/STL editor

Switching between process and test mode is carried out directly in the LAD/FBD/STL editor
in the "Test/Mode" menu.
Loops in the test and process mode are handled differently in the Status block.
● Process mode: First loop iteration is displayed
● Test mode: Last loop iteration is displayed. Leads to a significant cycle time increase for
many loop iterations.
In terms of function, there is also no difference between process mode and test mode.
Note
It is also possible to set breakpoints in test mode.


Appendix
A.3.3 Response time
A.3.3.1 Overview: Response time
Definition of response time

The response time is the time between the detection of an input signal and the change of a
linked output signal.
Fluctuation width
The physical response time lies between the shortest and the longest response time. You
must always reckon with the longest response time when configuring your system.
The shortest and longest response times are shown below, to give you an idea of the
fluctuation width of the response time.
Factors
The response time depends on the cycle time and following factors:
● Delay in the I/O module inputs and outputs
● Additional DP cycle times on PROFIBUS DP
● Execution in the user program
Reference
The delay times are described in the technical data for the I/O modules in the ET 200S
Distributed I/O Device
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805258/133300) manual.


Appendix
DP cycle times in the PROFIBUS DP network

If you configured your PROFIBUS DP master system with STEP 7, then STEP 7 will
calculate the typical DP cycle time that must be expected. You can then view the DP cycle
time of your configuration on the programming device.
The figure below gives you an overview of the DP cycle time. In this example, let us assume
that the data of each DP slave has an average length of 4 bytes.
%XVF\FOHWLPH
PV
PV
%DXGUDWH0ESV
PV
PV
PV
PV
PV
%DXGUDWH0ESV
PV
PLQ
VODYHLQWHUYDO 1XPEHURI'3VODYHV
PD[QXPEHUGHSHQGLQJRQ&38
With multi-master operation on a PROFIBUS-DP network, you must make allowances for the
DP cycle time at each master. That is, you will have to calculate the times for each master
separately and then add up the results.


Appendix
A.3.3.2 Shortest response time
Conditions for the shortest response time

The figure below shows the conditions under which the shortest response time is reached.
&&326
,QSXWGHOD\
3,4 ,PPHGLDWHO\EHIRUHWKH3,,LVUHDGWKHVWDWHRIWKH
UHOHYDQWLQSXWFKDQJHV7KHFKDQJHLQLQSXWVLJQDOLV
3,, WKHUHIRUHDOVRLQFOXGHGLQWKH3,,
5HVSRQVHWLPH
8VHUSURJUDP 7KHFKDQJHLQLQSXWVLJQDOLVSURFHVVHGKHUHE\WKHXVHUSURJUDP
&&326
7KHXVHUSURJUDPUHDFWLRQWRWKHFKDQJHLQLQSXWVLJQDOLVWUDQVIHUUHGWR
3,4 WKHRXWSXWVKHUH
2XWSXWGHOD\
Calculation
The (shortest) response time is the sum of:
Table A- 12 Formula: Shortest response time
1 x process image transfer time for the inputs

+ 1 x process image transfer time for the outputs
+ 1 x program processing time
+ 1 × operating system processing time at the CCP
+ Delay in the inputs and outputs
= Shortest response time
The result is equivalent to the sum of the cycle time plus the I/O delay times.
See also
Overview: Response time (Page 205)


Appendix
A.3.3.3 Longest response time
Conditions for the longest response time

The figure below shows the conditions under which the longest response time is reached.
&&326
'HOD\RILQSXWV
'3F\FOHWLPHRQ352),%86'3
3,4
6WDWXVRIYLHZHGLQSXWFKDQJHVZKLOHUHDGLQJLQ3,,
3,, &KDQJHRILQSXWVLJQDOLVQRWFRQVLGHUHGLQ3,,
8VHUSURJUDP
&&326
5HVSRQVHWLPH
3,4
+HUHWKHFKDQJHRIWKHLQSXWVLJQDOLVFRQVLGHUHGLQ3,,
3,,
8VHUSURJUDP +HUHWKHFKDQJHRIWKHLQSXWVLJQDOLVSURFHVVHGE\WKHXVHU
SURJUDP
&&326
+HUHWKHUHVSRQVHRIWKHXVHUSURJUDPWRWKHFKDQJHDWWKH
3,4 LQSXWVLJQDOLVRXWSXWWRWKHRXWSXWV
'HOD\RIRXWSXWV
'3F\FOHWLPHRQ352),%86'3


Appendix
Calculation
The (longest) response time is the sum of:
Table A- 13 Formula: Longest response time
2 x process image transfer time for the inputs

+ 2 x process image transfer time for the outputs
+ 2 x program processing time
+ 2 × operating system processing time
+ 2 x DP cycle time on PROFIBUS DP (only if PROFIBUS DP is used)
+ Delay in the inputs and outputs
= Longest response time
This is equivalent to the sum of twice the cycle time and the delay in the inputs and outputs
plus twice the DP cycle time on the PROFIBUS DP.
See also
Overview: Response time (Page 205)
A.3.4 Interrupt response time
A.3.4.1 Overview: Interrupt response time
Definition of interrupt response time

The interrupt response time is the time that elapses between the first occurrence of an
interrupt signal and the call of the first interrupt OB instruction. Generally valid: Higher-
priority interrupts take priority. This means that the interrupt response time is increased by
the program processing time of the higher-priority interrupt OBs and the interrupt OBs of
equal priority which have not yet been executed (queued).
Process interrupt and diagnostic interrupt response times of the IM151-7 CPU interface module
Table A- 14 Process interrupt and diagnostic interrupt response times of the IM151-7 CPU interface
module
Interrupt response times (without communication) for ... Duration

Process alarm / diagnostic alarm less than 10 ms


Appendix
Process interrupt processing

Process interrupt processing begins after process interrupt OB 40 is called. Higher-priority
interrupts stop process interrupt processing. Direct I/O access is executed during runtime of
the instruction. After process interrupt processing has terminated, cyclic program execution
continues or further interrupt OBs of equal or lower priority are called and processed.
See also
Overview (Page 197)
A.3.4.2 Reproducibility of time-delay and watchdog interrupts
Definition of "reproducibility"
Time-delay interrupt:
The period that expires between the call of the first operation in the interrupt OB and the
programmed time of interrupt.
Watchdog interrupt:
The fluctuation range of the interval between two successive calls, measured between the
respective initial operations of the interrupt OB.
Reproducibility
The following times apply to the IM151-7 CPU interface module:
● Time-delay interrupt: +/- 100 μs
● Watchdog interrupt: +/- 100 μs
These times only apply if the interrupt can actually be executed at this time and if it is not
delayed, for example, by higher-priority interrupts or queued interrupts of equal priority.


Appendix
A.4 Additional documentation

The following documentation contains detailed information on specific topics. The
appropriate areas of these operating instructions refer to this documentation.
You can find the documents on the Internet.
Name of manual Description

Operating Instructions Application planning; assembling; wiring and
ET 200S Distributed I/O System assembly; commissioning; functions; alarm, error,
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vie and system messages; interface modules,
w/en/1144348) COMPACT modules
Manuals Description of functions and technical
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vie specifications of the terminal modules, power
w/en/10805258/133300) on the modules, and digital and analog electronic
ET 200S Distributed I/O System modules
List manual  List of the instruction set of the CPUs and their
S7 300 CPU and ET 200 CPU instruction list execution times.
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vie  List of the executable blocks
w/en/31977679)
(OBs/SFCs/SFBs) and their execution times.
Reference Manual Overview of objects included in the operating
System software for S7-300/400 system and systems for S7-300 and S7-400 CPUs:
standard functions, Volume 1/2 OBs
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vie SFCs
w/en/1214574) SFBs
IEC functions
diagnostics data
system status list (SSL)
events
This manual is part of the STEP 7 reference
information. You can also find the description in
the Online Help for STEP 7.
Manual This manual provides an overview of programming
Programming with STEP 7 with STEP 7.
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vie This manual is part of the STEP 7 basic
w/en/18652056) information. You can also find the description in
the Online Help for STEP 7.
Manual basics, configuration, saving, importing, exporting,
Configuring Hardware and Communication networking, configuring connections, downloading
Connections with STEP 7
w/en/45531110)
Manual Description of:
CPU 31xC and CPU 31x, Technical  Operating and display elements
specifications
 Communication
w/en/12996906)  Memory concept
 Cycle and response times
 Technical data


Appendix
Name of manual Description

Manual Description of:
Communication with SIMATIC Basics, services, networks,
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vie communication functions,
w/en/1254686) connecting PGs/OPs,
project design and configuration in STEP 7
Manual Starting SIMATIC PDM, configuring networks and
The Process Device Manager devices, working with SIMATIC PDM,
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vie communication, diagnostics
w/en/21407212)
Manual product overview, functions, configuration
Diagnostic repeater for PROFIBUS DP possibilities, installation, wiring, commissioning,
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/vie diagnostics
w/en/7915183)


Glossary
Accumulator
Accumulators represent CPU register and are used as buffer memory for download, transfer,
comparison, calculation and conversion operations.
See also CPU
Address
An address is the identifier of a specific operand or operand area.
Examples: Input I 12.1; Memory Word MW 25; Data Block DB 3.
Analog modules
Analog modules convert analog process values (for example, temperature) into digital values
that can be processed by the IM 151-7 CPU interface module or convert digital values into
analog manipulated variables.
Application
→ User program
Application
An application is a program that runs directly on the MS-DOS / Windows operating system.
Applications on the programming device include, for example, the STEP 7 basic package,
S7-GRAPH and others.
Automation system
An automation system is a programmable logic controller in the context of SIMATIC S7.
See also Programmable Logic Controller
Backplane bus
Serial data bus used by the interface module to communicate with electronic modules and to
supply power to these. The individual modules are interconnected by means of terminal
modules.


Glossary
Backup memory
Backup memory ensures buffering of the memory areas of a CPU without backup battery. It
backs up a configurable number of timers, counters, bit memory, data bytes and retentive
timers, counters, bit memory and data bytes).
See also CPU
Baud rate
Data transfer rate (in bps)
Bit memory
Bit memory are part of the CPU's system memory. They store intermediate results of
calculations. They can be accessed in bit, word or dword operations.
See System memory
Bus
A bus is a communication medium connecting several nodes. Data can be transferred via
serial or parallel circuits, that is, via electrical or fiber optic conductors .
Bus connector
Physical connection between the bus node and the bus cable.
Bus node
This is a device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus. It can be a DP master, DP
slave, RS 485 repeater, active star coupler etc.
Bus segment
A bus segment is a self-contained section of a serial bus system. Bus segments are linked to
one another using repeaters in PROFIBUS DP, for example.
Chassis ground
Chassis ground includes all the interconnected inactive parts of equipment that must not
carry a hazardous voltage even in the event of a fault.


Glossary
Clock memory
Memory bit which can be used to generate clock pulses in the user program (1 memory
byte).
Note
Make sure that the clock memory byte is not overwritten in the user program.
Code block
A SIMATIC S7 logic block contains elements of the STEP 7 user program. (in contrast to a
DB: this contains only data.)
See also Data block
Compression
The programming device online function "Compress" is used to rearrange all valid blocks in
CPU RAM in one continuous area of user memory, starting at the lowest address. This
eliminates fragmentation which occurs when blocks are deleted or edited.
Configuration
Assignment of modules to slots and (for example with electronic modules) addresses.
Consistent data
Data which are related in their contents and not to be separated are referred to as consistent
data.
For example, the values of analog modules must always be handled as a whole, that is, the
value of an analog module must not be corrupted as a result of read access at two different
points of time.
Counters
Counters are part of CPU system memory. The content of "Counter cells" can be modified by
STEP 7 instructions (for example, up/down count.)
See also System memory
CPU
Central processing unit = CPU of the S7 automation system with a control and arithmetic
unit, memory, operating system, and interface for programming device.


Glossary
Cycle control point

The cycle control point is the section of the CPU program processing in which the process
image is updated.
Cycle time
The cycle time represents the time a CPU requires for one execution of the user program.
See also User program
See also CPU
Cyclic interrupt
→ Interrupt, cyclic interrupt
Data block
Data blocks (DB) are data areas in the user program which contain user data. There are
shared data blocks which can be accessed by all code blocks, and instance data blocks
which are assigned to a specific FB call.
Data exchange broadcast

→ Direct data exchange
Data exchange traffic

Data set routing

Functionality of a module with several network connections.
Modules that support this function are able to pass on data of an engineering system (for
example parameter data generated by SIMATIC PDM) from a subnetwork to a field device at
the PROFIBUS DP.
Data, static
Static data can only be used within a function block. These data are saved in an instance
data block that belongs to a function block. Data stored in an instance data block are
retained until the next function block call.
Data, temporary
Temporary data is the local data of a block. It is stored in the L-stack when the block is
executed. After the block has been processed, this data is no longer available.


Glossary
Diagnostic interrupt
Modules capable of diagnostics operations report detected system errors to the CPU by
means of diagnostic interrupts.
See also CPU
Diagnostics
→ System diagnostics
Diagnostics buffer
The diagnostics buffer represents a buffered memory area in the CPU. It stores diagnostic
events in the order of their occurrence.
Direct data exchange

Direct data exchange is a special communication relationship between PROFIBUS DP
nodes. The direct data exchange is characterized by PROFIBUS DP nodes which "listen" on
the bus and know which data a DP slave returns to its DP master.
Distributed I/O systems

I/O systems that are not integrated into the central controller, but rather at distributed
locations a long distance from the CPU, such as:
● ET 200M, ET 200L, ET 200S, ET 200pro
● DP/AS-I Link
● S5-95U with PROFIBUS DP slave interface
● Further DP slaves supplied by Siemens or other vendors.
The distributed I/O systems are connected to the DP master via PROFIBUS DP.
DP master
→ Master
DP master
A master that complies with the IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 standard is known as a DP
master.
DP slave
→ Slave


Glossary
DP slave
A slave running on the PROFIBUS using the PROFIBUS DP protocol in compliance with IEC
61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is known as a DP slave.
DP Standard
Bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed I/O system to IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
DPV1
The designation DPV1 means extension of the functionality of the acyclical services (to
include new interrupts, for example) provided by the DP protocol. The DPV1 functionality is
an integral part of the IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 standard.
Electrically isolated
Electrically isolated I/O modules are isolated from the reference potentials of the control and
load circuits by means of an optocoupler, relay contact or transformer circuit, for example.
I/O circuits may be connected to the same potential.
Electronic modules
Electronic modules form the interface between the process and the automation system.
There are
● digital input and output modules
● analog input and output modules
● Technology modules
Equipotential bonding
Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that keeps electrical equipment and
extraneous conductive objects to the same or almost the same potential in order to prevent
disturbing or dangerous voltages between those objects.
Error display
One of the possible reactions of the operating system to a runtime error is to output an error
message. Further reactions: Error reaction in the user program, CPU in STOP.
See also Runtime error
See also Error reaction
Error handling via OB

After the operating system has detected a specific error (e.g. an access error with STEP 7),
it calls a dedicated organization block (error OB) in which the subsequent behavior of the
CPU can be defined.


Glossary
Error response
Reaction to a runtime error. Reactions of the operating system: It sets the automation
system to STOP, calls an OB in which the user can program a reaction or display the error.
See also Runtime error
ET 200
The ET 200 distributed I/O system with PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET IO allows the
connection of distributed I/Os to a CPU via a DP master or IO controller. ET 200 is
characterized by high-speed reaction times, because of a minimum data transfer volume
(bytes.)
The ET 200 is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.d standard.
The ET 200 works on the master / slave principle or controller / device principle.
The DP masters are, for example, the IM 308-C master connection or the IM 151-7 CPU
interface module with DP master module. An IO controller could be, for example, the IM
151-8 PN/DP CPU interface module.
DP slaves / IO devices could be the distributed I/Os ET 200M, ET 200L, ET 200S,
ET 200pro or DP slaves / IO devices from Siemens or other vendors.
External lightning protection

External plant components at which galvanic coupling of lightning surges is excluded.
Corresponds with lightning protection zone 0A and 0B.
FB
→ Function block
FC
→ Function
Flash EPROM
FEPROMs can retain data in the event of power loss, same as electrically erasable
EEPROMs. However, they can be erased within a considerably shorter time (FEPROM =
Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory). They are used on SIMATIC Micro
memory cards.
FORCE
The Force function can be used to assign the variables of a user program or CPU (also:
inputs and outputs) constant values.
Note in this connection also the restrictions in section Overview: Debugging functions in
section Debugging functions, diagnostics and troubleshooting.


Glossary
FREEZE
Control command a DP master may broadcast to a group of DP slaves.
When it receives a FREEZE command, the slave freezes its current input status and outputs
its data cyclically to the DP master.
The DP slave freezes its input status again after each new FREEZE command.
The DP slave does not resume the transfer input data to the DP master until the DP master
has sent the UNFREEZE control command.
Function
According to IEC 1131-3, a function (FC) is a code block without static data. A function
allows transfer of parameters in user program. Functions are therefore suitable for
programming frequently occurring complex functions, e.g. calculations.
Function block
According to IEC 1131-3, a function block (FB) is a code block with static data. An FB allows
the user program to pass parameters. Function blocks are therefore suitable for
programming complex functions, e.g., closed-loop controls, mode selections, which are
repeated frequently.
Functional ground
Grounding which has the sole purpose of safeguarding the intended function of electrical
equipment. With functional grounding you short-circuit interference voltage which would
otherwise have an unacceptable impact on equipment.
Ground
The conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.
Ground potential may be different from zero in the area of grounding electrodes. The term
reference ground is frequently used to describe this situation.
Ground-free
Having no direct electrical connection to ground
Grounding
Grounding means, to connect an electrically conductive component via an equipotential
grounding system to a grounding electrode (one or more conductive components with highly
conductive contact to earth).


Glossary
GSD file
All slave-specific properties are stored in a GSD file (device master data file). The format of
the GSD file is available in the IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 standard.
Hot-swapping
The removal and insertion of modules during the operation of the ET 200S.
IM
Interface module: The interface module combines the ET 200S with the DP master and
prepares the data for the electronic modules.
In an ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU, the IM 151-7 CPU interface module is itself the DP master
(together with the DP master module).
Instance data block

The STEP 7 user program assigns an automatically-generated DB to every call of a function
block. The instance data block stores the values of input, output and in/out parameters, as
well as local block data.
Interface, MPI-compatible
→ MPI
Internal lightning protection

Shielding of buildings, rooms or devices Corresponds with lightning protection zone 1, 2 or 3.
Interrupt
The operating system of an S7 CPU can distinguish between different priority classes that
control how the user program is executed. These priority classes include interrupts, e.g.
process interrupts. When an interrupt is triggered, the operating system automatically calls
an assigned OB. In this OB the user can program the desired response (e.g. in an FB).
See also Operating system
Interrupt, cyclic interrupt

A cyclic interrupt is generated periodically by the CPU in a configurable time pattern. A
corresponding OB will be processed.
See also Organization Block


Glossary
Interrupt, delay
The delay interrupt belongs to one of the priority classes in SIMATIC S7 program
processing. It is generated on expiration of a time started in the user program. A
corresponding OB will be processed.
Interrupt, delay
→ Interrupt, delay
Interrupt, diagnostic
→ Diagnostic interrupt
Interrupt, process
→ Process interrupt
Interrupt, status
An status interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave. At the DPV1 master the receipt of the
interrupt causes the OB 55 to be called.
For detailed information on OB 55, refer to the Reference Manual System Software for
S7-300/400.
Interrupt, time-of-day
The time-of-day interrupt is one of the priority classes in SIMATIC S7 program processing. It
is generated at a specific date (or daily) and time-of-day (e.g. 9:50 or hourly, or every
minute). A corresponding OB will be processed.
Interrupt, update
An update interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave. At the DPV1 master the receipt of
the interrupt causes the OB 56 to be called.
For detailed information on OB 56, refer to the Reference Manual System Software for S7-
300/400.
Interrupt, vendor-specific
A manufacturer-specific interrupt can be generated by a DPV1 slave. At the DPV1 master
the receipt of the interrupt causes the OB 57 to be called.
For detailed information on OB 57, refer to the Reference Manual System Software for
S7-300/400.


Glossary
Isochronous mode
The process data, transmission cycles via PROFIBUS DP, and the user program are
synchronized in order to achieve ultimate deterministic. The input and output data of
distributed I/O devices in the system are detected and output simultaneously. The
isochronous PROFIBUS DP cycle form the corresponding clock generator.
Load memory
The load memory contains objects generated by the programming device. For the IM 151-7
CPU interface module, it takes the form of a plug-in SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with
various memory sizes. A SIMATIC Micro Memory Card must be inserted to use the IM 151-7
CPU interface module.
Load power supply

Power supply for the load voltage for the power modules
Local data
→ Data, temporary
Master
When a master is in possession of the token, it can send data to other nodes and request
data from other nodes (= active node). The DP masters are, for example, the CPU 315-2 DP
or the IM 151-7 CPU interface module with DP master module.
Master
→ Slave
Micro Memory Card

→ SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
Module parameters
Module parameters are values which can be used to configure module behavior. There are
two different types of parameter: static and dynamic.
MPI
The multipoint interface (MPI) represents the programming device interface of SIMATIC S7.
It enables multiple nodes (PGs, text-based displays, OPs) to be operated simultaneously by
one or more CPUs. Each device is identified by its unique (MPI address) address.


Glossary
MPI address
→ MPI
Nesting depth
A block can be called from another by means of a block call. Nesting depth is referred to as
the number of simultaneously called code blocks.
See also Code Blocks
Network
A network consists of one or more interconnected subnets with any number of nodes.
Several networks can exist alongside each other.
Non-isolated
The reference potentials of the control and load circuit of non-isolated I/O modules are
electrically interconnected.
OB
→ Organization blocks
OB priority
The CPU operating system distinguishes between different priority classes, for example,
cyclic program execution or process interrupt-controlled program processing. Each priority
class is assigned organization blocks (OBs) in which the S7 user can program a response.
The OBs are assigned different default priority classes. These determine the order in which
OBs are executed or interrupt each other when they appear simultaneously.
See also Organization block
Operating state
SIMATIC S7 automation systems know the following operating states: STOP, STARTUP,
RUN.
See also STARTUP, RUN
Operating system
The CPU OS organizes all functions and processes of the CPU which are not associated to
a specific control task.


Glossary
Operating system
→ CPU
Organization blocks
Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between CPU operating system and the user
program. The order in which the user program is executed is defined in the organization
blocks.
Parameter
● Variable of a STEP 7 code block
● Variable used to set the behavior of a module (one or more per module). All modules
have a suitable basic factory setting which can be customized in STEP 7.
There are static and dynamic parameters.
See also static parameters
See also dynamic parameters
Parameter assignment
Refers to the transfer of parameters from the DP master to the DP slave.
Parameters, dynamic
In contrast to static parameters, you can change dynamic module parameters in runtime by
calling an SFC in the user program, e.g. limit values for an analog input module.
Parameters, static
In contrast to dynamic parameters, static parameters of modules cannot be changed by the
user program. You can only modify these parameters by editing your configuration in STEP
7, for example, by modifying the input delay parameters of a digital input module.
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage = extra low voltage with safe isolation
PG
→ Programming device
PLC
→ CPU


Glossary
PLC
Programmable controllers (PLCs) are electronic controllers whose function is saved as a
program in the control unit. Therefore, the configuration and wiring of the unit does not
depend on the PLC function. The programmable logic PLC has the structure of a computer;
it consists of a CPU with memory, I/O modules and an internal bus system. The I/O and the
programming language are oriented to control engineering needs.
PLC
→ PLC
PNO
→ PROFIBUS International
Priority class
The S7 CPU operating system provides up to 26 priority classes (or "Program execution
levels"). Specific OBs are assigned to these classes. The priority classes determine which
OBs interrupt other OBs. Multiple OBs of the same priority class do not interrupt each other.
In this case, they are executed sequentially.
Process image
The process image is part of CPU system memory. At the start of cyclic program execution,
the signal states at the input modules are written to the process image of the inputs. At the
end of cyclic program execution, the signal status of the process image of the outputs is
transferred to the output modules.
Process interrupt
A process interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules as a result of a specific event
in the process. The process interrupt is reported to the CPU. The assigned organization
block will be processed according to interrupt priority.
See also Organization Block
Product version
The product version identifies differences between products which have the same order
number. The product version is incremented when forward-compatible functions are
enhanced, after production-related modifications (use of new parts/components) and for bug
fixes.


Glossary
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, German process field bus standard specified in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1
CP 3/1. It specifies functional, electrical and mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus
system.
From the perspective of the user program, the distributed I/O is just as sophisticated as the
centralized I/O.
PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (= Distributed Peripherals), FMS (= Fieldbus
Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation), or TF (= Technological Functions.)
PROFIBUS address
A node must be assigned a unique PROFIBUS address in order to allow its identification on
PROFIBUS.
The PC/Programming device is assigned PROFIBUS address "0."
The PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 125 may be used for the ET 200S distributed I/O system.
PROFIBUS DP
→ PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS International
Technical committee dedicated to the definition and development of the PROFIBUS
standard.
Also known as the PROFIBUS User Organization membership corporation (PNO.)
Homepage: http://www.profibus.com
Programming device
Basically speaking, PGs are compact and portable PCs which are suitable for industrial
applications. They are identified by a special hardware and software for programmable logic
controllers.
Publisher
Publisher
The publisher is a sender in the direct data exchange.
RAM
RAM (Random Access Memory) is a semiconductor read/write memory.


Glossary
Reference ground
→ Ground
Reference potential
Reference potential for the evaluation / measuring of the voltages of participating circuits.
Restart
When the IM 151-7 CPU interface module starts up (for example, after changing the mode
selector switch from STOP to RUN or after a POWER ON), organization block OB 100
(warm restart) is executed before cyclic program processing (OB 1). On restart, the input
process image is read in and the STEP 7 user program is executed, starting at the first
instruction in OB1.
Retentive memory
A memory area is considered retentive if its contents are retained even after a power loss
and transitions from STOP to RUN. The non-retentive area of bit memory, timers and
counters is reset following a power failure and a transition from the STOP mode to the RUN
mode.
Retentive can be the:
● Bit memory
● S7 timers
● S7 counters
● Data areas
Runtime error
Errors occurred in the PLC (that is, not in the process itself) during user program execution.
Segment
→ Bus segment
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage
SFB
→ System function block


Glossary
SFC
→ System function
SIMATIC
The term denotes Siemens products and systems for industrial automation.
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards are storage media for the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
Slave
→ Master
Slave
A slave can only exchange data after being requested to by the master.
STARTUP
A STARTUP routine is executed at the transition from STOP to RUN mode. Can be triggered
by means of the mode selector switch, or after power on, or by an operator action on the
programming device. A restart has been carried out on the IM 151-7 CPU interface module.
See also Mode selector switch
See also Restart
STEP 7
Engineering system. Contains programming software for the creation of user programs for
SIMATIC S7 controllers.
Subscriber
Subscriber
The subscriber is a recipient in the direct data exchange.


Glossary
Substitute value
Substitute values are configurable values which output modules transfer to the process when
the CPU switches to STOP mode.
In the event of an I/O access error, a substitute value can be written to the accumulator
instead of the input value which could not be read (SFC 44).
SYNC
Control command a DP master may broadcast to a group of DP slaves.
With the SYNC control command the DP master causes the DP slave to freeze the statuses
of the outputs at the current value. The DP slave stores the output data contained in the next
frame, but does not change the state of its outputs.
After each new SYNC control command, the DP slave sets the outputs it has saved as
output data. The outputs are not updated cyclically again until the DP master has sent a
UNSYNC control command.
System diagnostics
System diagnostics refers to the detection, evaluation, and signaling of errors that occur
within the PLC, for example programming errors or module failures. System errors can be
indicated by LEDs or in STEP 7.
System function
A system function (SFC) is a function integrated in the operating system of the CPU that can
be called when necessary in the STEP 7 user program.
System function block

A system function block (SFB) is a function block integrated in the operating system of the
CPU that can be called when necessary in the STEP 7 user program.
System memory
System memory is an integrated RAM memory in the CPU. System memory contains the
address areas (e.g. timers, counters, bit memory) and data areas that are required internally
by the operating system (for example, communication buffers).


Glossary
System status list

The system status list contains data that describes the current status of an ET 200S with IM
151-7 CPU interface module. You can always use this list to obtain an overview of:
● the configuration of the ET 200S
● The current CPU parameter assignments and configurable electronic modules
● The current statuses and processes in the CPU and the configurable electronic modules
Terminating module
The ET 200S distributed IO system is completed by the terminating module. If you have not
inserted a terminating module, the ET 200S is not ready for operation.
Terminating resistor
The terminating resistor is used to avoid reflections on data links.
Time-of-day interrupt
→ Interrupt, time-of-day
Timer
→ Timers
Timers
Timers are part of CPU system memory. The content of timer cells is automatically updated
by the operating system, asynchronously to the user program. STEP 7 instructions are used
to define the precise function of the timer cell (for example, switch-on delay) and to initiate
their execution (for example, start).
Token
Allows access to the PROFIBUS DP for a limited time.
Topology
Structure of a network. Common structures include:
● Bus topology
● Ring topology
● Star topology
● Tree topology


Glossary
User program
In SIMATIC, a distinction is made between the operating system of the CPU and user
programs. The user program contains all instructions, declarations and data for signal
processing required to control a plant or a process. It is assigned to a programmable module
(for example CPU) and can be structured in smaller units (blocks).
User program
→ Operating system
User program
→ STEP 7
Voltage group
A group of electronic modules supplied by one power module.
Work memory
The work memory is integrated in the CPU and cannot be extended. It is used to run the
code and process user program data. Programs only run in work memory and system
memory.
See also CPU


Index
C
A Cable length
Accessories Extension with RS485 repeater, 26
IM151-7 CPU, 194 Maximum, 30
Address MPI subnet, 26
MPI, PROFIBUS DP, 25 PROFIBUS subnet, 26
Address assignment Stub cables, 27
for analog and digital modules, 80 Clock synchronization, 44
Address range DP interface, 44
of the I/O modules, 80 DP master module, 44
Addresses MPI interface, 44
Start addresses, 82 Commissioning
Addressing Check list, 88
Assignment of addresses, 82 Hardware Requirements, 85
slot-oriented, 79 IM151-7 CPU as DP master, 119
Unassigned, 82 IM151-7 CPU as DP slave, 112
Asynchronous error, 146 Procedure with the hardware, 86
Procedure with the software, 87
PROFIBUS DP, 110
B Reaction to errors, 88
Software requirement, 87
Back up Communication
Operating system, 125 Data consistency, 46
The firmware, 125 Data set routing, 42
Basic knowledge required, 3 Global data communication, 39
Baud rate OP communication, 37
Maximum, 24 Programming device communication, 37
MPI cable length, 26 S7 basic communication, 38
PROFIBUS cable length, 26 S7 communication, 38
Stub cables, 27 Services of the IM 151-7 CPU interface module, 36
Blocks Communication load
Deleting, 66 configured, 202
Delta download, 65 Dependency of actual cycle time, 203
Download, 62 Influence on the actual cycle time, 203
Encryption, 64 Compression, 66
Reloading, 65 Configuring
Upload, 65 Examples for subnets, 31
Bus cable, 28 MPI/PROFIBUS subnet, 24
Installation, 29 Connecting
Properties, 28 DP master module, 77
Versions available, 28 IM151-7 CPU, 74
Bus connector, 29 PG, 100, 101, 102
Bus termination, 33 ungrounded/grounded, 104
Bus terminator, 132, 134 Connecting a bus connector, 75
Connecting the RS 485 connector, 75
Connecting the supply voltage, 75


Index
Consistency, 83 Connecting, 77
Constant bus cycle time, 121 Display elements, 20
CPU as DP slave installing, 76
Startup, 113 Properties, 14
Cross circuit detection, 140 Technical specifications, 191
Cycle time Time synchronization, 23
Calculation, 200 DP Master, interrupts, 167
Definition, 198
Extension, 200
Process image, 198 E
Sequence of cyclic program processing, 199
Error
Time slice model, 198
Asynchronous, 146
Synchronous, 146
Error displays, 19
D
ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU
Data consistency, 46, 83 initial power on, 92
Data set routing, 42 Event recognition, 160
Default addressing, 79 Example
Deleting, 66 Data exchange between the DP master and DP
Delivery state IM151-7 CPU slave, 116
Lamp images during reset, 99 Maximum distance, 32
Properties, delivery state, 98 Terminating resistor, 33
Restore delivery state, 98 Using blocks to read slave diagnostics
Delta download, 65 information, 162
Detecting operating mode transitions
In the DP master, 113
Device ID, 171 F
Diagnostics
Firmware
configured address range, 172
Back up, 125
in DP Master mode, 158
Forcing, 145
with Diagnosing Hardware, 149
FREEZE, 122
with LEDs, 150
with system functions, 148
Diagnostics address, 159
G
Direct data exchange, 161
PROFIBUS DP, 165 Global data communication, 39
Diagnostics buffer, 147, 177 GSD files, 112
Dimensional diagram Guide
IM151-7 CPU, 196 Operating Instructions, 4
Direct data exchange, 123
Display elements
DP master module, 20 I
Disposal, 5
I&M data, 142
Documentation
I/O process image, 58
Additional, 211
Identification and maintenance data, 142
Download
Identification data, 142
of blocks, 62
IM151-7 CPU
DP interface
Accessories, 194
Clock synchronization, 44
commissioning as a DP master, 119
Time synchronization, 23
Commissioning as DP slave, 112
DP master module
Connecting, 74


Index
Dimensional diagram, 196 Download of blocks, 62

installing, 73 Downloading blocks, 65
Memory reset, 93 Memory reset, 67
Properties, 12 Promming, 66
Response after replacement, 133 RAM to ROM, 66
Technical specifications, 181 Restart, 67
IM151-7 CPU as DP slave Uploading blocks, 65
GSD files, 112 Warm start, 67
Installation - examples Memory reset, 67, 93
MPI subnet, 31 with mode selector switch, 94
PROFIBUS subnet, 34 Mode selector switch, 18
Installing Memory reset, 94
DP master module, 76 Modifying
IM151-7 CPU, 73 of variables, 144
Interfaces Monitor
MPI interface, 21 of variables, 144
PROFIBUS DP interface, 22, 23 Monitoring and modifying variables
Internet Controlling outputs in STOP mode of the IM151-7
Service & Support, 5 CPU interface module, 109
Interrupt data Creating a connection to the IM151-7 CPU interface
Generating a diagnostics interrupt, 175, 176 module, 108
Process interrupt, structure, 174 Creating a variable table, 106
Interrupt response time Modifying variables, 107
Definition, 209 Monitor variable, 107
IM151-7 CPU, 209 opening the VAT, 108
Process interrupt processing, 210 Saving the variable table, 108
Interrupts on the DP Master, 167 Setting the trigger points, 107
MPI
Number of nodes, maximum, 24
L MPI address, 25
MPI interface, 21
LED
Baud rate, maximum, 24
LED, 14
Load memory, 53
Connectable devices, 21
Local data, 60
Time synchronization, 21
Longest response time
MPI subnet
Calculation, 209
Cable length, 26
Conditions, 208
Example, 31
IM151-7 CPU as node, 35
Maximum distance, 32
M
Terminating resistor, 33
Maintenance data, 142
Memory
Compression, 66 N
Memory areas
Network node, 40
Load memory, 53
Number of nodes, maximum, 24
System memory, 53
Work memory, 54
Memory functions
O
Compression, 66
Deleting blocks, 66 OP communication, 37
Delta downloading for blocks, 65 Operating Instructions


Index
Changes since previous version, 4 Parameter assignment, 135

Purpose, 3 Reloading, 65
Operating system Replacing
Back up, 125 DP master module, 134
Update, 127 IM151-7 CPU Interface Module, 133
Order numbers Response time
Accessories, 194 Calculating the longest, 209
Cables, 195 Calculation, 207
Connector, 195 Conditions, 207
DP master module, 193 Conditions for the longest, 208
IM151-7 CPU, 193 Definition, 205
DP cycle times, 206
Factors, 205
P Fluctuation width, 205
Restart, 67
Parameterization
Retentive memory, 54
Reference junction, 135
Load memory, 54
PG
Retentive behavior of the memory objects, 55
Connecting, 100, 101, 102
System memory, 54
MPI addresses for service PGs, 103
Routing
Ungrounded/grounded configuration, 104
Access to a CPU on another subnet, 40
Pin assignment
Network node, 40
Bus connector, 75, 77
Requirements, 41
Pin assignment for supply voltage, 75
RS 485
Power module
Bus connector, 29
Status byte, 140
Maximizing cable lengths, 30
Power on
RS 485 repeater, 30
initial, 92
Requirements, 92
Process interrupt processing, 210
S
PROFIBUS DP
Commissioning, 110 S7 basic communication, 38
Direct data exchange, 123 S7 Block Privacy, 64
Number of nodes, maximum, 24 S7 communication, 38
PROFIBUS DP address, 25 S7 connections
PROFIBUS DP interface, 22 Distribution, 49
Baud rate, maximum, 24 End point, 47
PROFIBUS subnet IM151-7 CPU, 50
Bus cable, 28 Time sequence for allocation, 49
Cable length, 26 Transition point, 47
Example, 34 Scope
IM151-7 CPU as node, 35 Operating Instructions, 3
Programming device communication, 37 Segment, 24
Properties Cable lengths, 26
DP master module, 14 General, 24
IM151-7 CPU, 12 Service & support, 5
Service data
Application, 141
R Procedure, 141
SF LED
RAM to ROM, 66
Evaluation, 152
Recycling, 5
SFC 103, 30
Reference junction
SFC 14, 83


Index
SFC 15, 83 Time-delay interrupt, 210

Shortest response time Training center, 5
Calculation, 207 Transfer memory
Conditions, 207 Access from the user program, 83
SIMATIC Manager, 105 Address range, 115
start, 105 Example program, 116
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card Rules, 117
Properties, 61 User data transfer, 114
Service life, 62 User data transfer in STOP mode, 118
Slot, 17 Troubleshooting, 146
Slave diagnostics
Interrupt data, 174
Interrupt status, structure, 174 U
Module status, structure, 173
ungrounded/grounded, 104
reading with blocks, 162
Update
Reading, example, 162
Operating system, 127
Structure of identifier-related diagnostics, 172
Upload, 65
Syntax of the diagnostics datagram, 168
Useful life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, 62
Slot assignment
User data transfer, 114
ET 200S, 80
User program
Slot-oriented addressing of the centralized I/O
Deleting, 66
modules, 79
Delta download, 65
Startup
Reloading, 65
as DP slave, 113
Upload, 65
IM151-7 CPU as DP master, 120
User-oriented addressing of the I/O Modules, 82
Status byte, 140
Status displays, 19
Stepping mode, 144
V
Stub cables, 27
Baud rate, 27 Variables
Length, 27 Forcing, 145
Subnet Modifying, 144
Segment, 26 Monitor, 144
SYNC, 122
Synchronous error, 146
System memory, 53, 57 W
I/O process image, 58
Warm start, 67
Local data, 60
Watchdog interrupt, 210
Work memory, 54
T
DP master module, 191
IM151-7 CPU, 181
Terminating resistor
MPI subnet, 33
Time master, 44
Time slave, 44
DP interface, 23
DP master module, 23
MPI interface, 21


NOV PART NO.:

10050945-001

Power module PM-E DC24V (6ES7138- ___________________

Preface
4CA01-0AA0) 1
___________________
Properties
2
___________________
Parameters
SIMATIC
___________________
Diagnostics 3
ET 200S distributed I/O
Power module PM-E DC24V ___________________
Configuring 4
(6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)
Manual
04/2007
A5E01119952-02

Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E01119952-02 Copyright © Siemens AG 2007.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 04/2014 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY

Preface
Purpose of the manual

This manual supplements the ET 200S Distributed I/O System Operating Instructions.
General functions for the ET 200S are described in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System
Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348).
The information in this document along with the operating instructions enables you to
commission the ET 200S.
Basic knowledge requirements

To understand these operating instructions you should have general knowledge of
automation engineering.
Scope of the manual

This manual applies to this ET 200S module. It describes the components that are valid at
the time of publication.

Thanks to the fact that it is low in contaminants, this ET 200S module is recyclable. For
Additional support
If you have any questions relating to the products described in this manual and do not find
the answers in this document, please contact your local Siemens representative
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/partners).
available on the Internet. (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-docu).
Training center
D -90327, Nuremberg, Germany (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain).
Power module PM-E DC24V (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02 3

Preface
Technical Support
You can contact Technical Support for all Industry Automation products by means of the
Internet Web form for the Support Request
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi_en_WW/support_request).
Additional information about Siemens Technical Support is available on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi_en_WW/service).

(http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi_en_WW/support).
products.
● Your local contact for Automation & Drives in our contact database.
● Information about on-site services, repairs, spare parts, and lots more.

4 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02

Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Properties ............................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1 Power module PM-E DC24V (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0) ................................................................. 7
2 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 11
3 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................... 13
3.1 Diagnostics using LED display .....................................................................................................13
3.2 Error types ....................................................................................................................................14
4 Configuring ........................................................................................................................................... 15
4.1 Configuring the address space ....................................................................................................15
Index..................................................................................................................................................... 17

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02 5

Table of contents

6 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02

Properties 1
1.1 Power module PM-E DC24V (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)
Properties
● The PM-E DC24V power module monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic
modules in the voltage group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal
module.
● You can use all the electronic modules except the 2DI AC120V ST, 2DI AC230V ST, and
2DO AC24..230V/1A in the voltage group of the PM-E DC24V power module.
● The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input
image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnosis has
been enabled.
● The PM-E DC24V power module is suitable for fail-safe modules.
● Extended temperature range from 0 to 55°C with vertical installation.
CAUTION
Only connect the specified rated load voltage of 24 VDC to the TM-P terminal module of
the power module.
The connected rated load voltage must correspond to the supply voltage of the
electronic modules in the voltage group.
Maximum configuration per voltage group

The number of modules that can be connected depends on the total current of all modules in
a voltage group. This total must not exceed the maximum current carrying capacity.
Address space of inputs/outputs

Address space of inputs/outputs by selecting the following as an option:
Options Address space of the inputs Address space of the outputs

Status byte (S) 1 byte --
Option handling (O) 8 bytes 8 bytes
Status byte and option handling 9-byte inputs 9 bytes (9th byte not relevant)
(SO)

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02 7

Properties
General terminal assignment
Note
Terminals A4 and A8 are only available at specified terminal modules.
Terminal assignment for PM-E DC24V (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

Terminal Assignment Terminal Assignment Notes
2 L+ 6 L+ • L+: Rated load voltage 24 VDC
3 M 7 M • M: Chassis ground
A4 AUX1 A8 AUX1 • AUX1: Protective-conductor terminal or potential bus (freely usable
up to 230 VAC)

8 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02

Properties
Usable terminal modules
Usable terminal modules for PM-E DC24V (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

TM-P15C23-A1 TM-P15C23-A0 TM-P15C22-01
(6ES7193- (6ES7193-4CD30- (6ES7193-4CE10- Spring terminal
4CC30-0AA0) 0AA0) 0AA0)
TM-P15S23-A1 TM-P15S23-A0 TM-P15S22-01
(6ES7193- (6ES7193-4CD20- (6ES7193-4CE00- Screw-type terminal
4CC20-0AA0) 0AA0) 0AA0)
TM-P15N23-A1 TM-P15N23-A0 TM-P15N22-01
(6ES7193- (6ES7193-4CD70- (6ES7193-4CE60- Fast Connect
4CC70-0AA0) 0AA0) 0AA0)
Block diagram
Figure 1-1 Block diagram of the PM-E DC24V power module

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02 9

Properties
Technical data PM-E DC24V (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

Dimension B (mm) 15
Weight Approx. 35 g
Voltages, currents, potentials
Rated load voltage 24 VDC
• Overvoltage protection No
Protection with automatic circuit breakers Yes, tripping characteristic B, C

Max. current-carrying capacity (up to 60°C) 10 A
• Short-circuit protection No
Electrical isolation
• Between rated load voltage and backplane Yes
bus
• Between the power modules Yes
Insulation test voltage 500 VDC

Current consumption
• From the load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 4 mA
Power dissipation of the module Typically 100 mW

Parameter length 3 bytes
Diagnostic function Yes
• Group error Red "SF" LED
• Load voltage monitoring Green "PWR" LED
• Diagnostic information readable Yes

10 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02

Parameters 2
Parameters
The following table lists the power module parameters.
Table 2- 1 Parameters for power modules
PM-E DC24V Range of values Default setting Applicability

Diagnostics: No load voltage Disable/enable Disable Power module
The parameters are explained below.
Diagnostics: No load voltage

Use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message because there is no load voltage.
If there is no load voltage, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module is sent
to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all modules in the relevant voltage group light up.

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02 11

Parameters

12 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02

Diagnostics 3
3.1 Diagnostics using LED display
Power module
LED displays on the power module:
① Batch error (red)

② Load voltage (green)
Status and error displays by means of LEDs on power modules

The table below shows the status and error displays on the power module.
Event (LEDs) Cause Remedy

SF PWR
On No parameter assignment or incorrect Check the parameter assignment.
module plugged in. A diagnostic message Evaluate the diagnostics.
is pending.
Off There is no load voltage at the power Check the load voltage.
module.

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02 13

Diagnostics
3.2 Error types
3.2 Error types
Power module error types

The diagnostic message is reported on channel 0 and applies to the entire module.
The table below shows the types of errors affecting power modules
Table 3- 1 Power module error types
Error type Meaning Remedy

17D 10001: Encoder or load Supply voltage not present Correct the process wiring. Check
voltage missing or too low. the supply voltage.

14 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02

Configuring 4
4.1 Configuring the address space
Address area for option handling and status byte

You can control and monitor option handling, and evaluate the status byte of the power
module using the control (PIO) and feedback interface (PII).
The address range of the control (PIO) and feedback interface (PII) depends on how the
corresponding entry in the configuration software is configured, or which entry has been
selected.
This table shows the PII feedback interface and the PIO control interface for different entries.
Table 4- 1 PII feedback interface and PIO control interface
With STEP 7, HW Config PII feedback interface PIO control interface

or COM PROFIBUS
or other configuration
software
Usual entry for the power --- ---
module
Ends in ...S IBx Status byte ---
Ends in ...O IBx QBx
::: Option handling ::: Option handling
IBx+7 QBx+7
Ends in ...SO IBx QBx
::: Option handling ::: Option handling
IBx+7 QBx+7
IBx+8 Status byte QBx+8 Not applicable

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02 15

Configuring
4.1 Configuring the address space
Status byte for power modules
Figure 4-1 Assignment of status byte for power modules

16 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02

Index
B
Basic knowledge requirements, 3
Block diagram, 9
D
Disposal, 3
I
Internet
Service & Support, 4
P
Parameters
For power modules, 11
Power modules
Parameters, 11
Properties, 7
R
Recycling, 3
S
Scope
Manual, 3
T
Technical data, 10
Technical Support, 4
Terminal assignment, 8
Training Center, 3

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02 17

Index

18 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01119952-02

NOV PART NO.:

10050947-001

1
SIMATIC Distributed I/O System ET 200S Distributed I/O System ET00S
______________
Introduction
2
______________
Product Information
SIMATIC
Distributed I/O System

ET 200S
Product Information
09/2006
A5E00847859-01

Safety Guidelines
Danger
Warning
Caution
Caution
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by
Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly
as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
editions.
Siemens AG Order No.: A5E00847859-01 Copyright © Siemens AG 2006.

Automation and Drives Edition 09/2006 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90437 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY

Table of contents
1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
2 Product Information ................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Interrupt, Error and System Messages at 8DI / 8DO ................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Digital Electronic Module 8DI DC24V (6ES7131-4BF00-0AA0)................................................ 2-2
2.3 Digital Electronic Module 8DO DC24V/0.5A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)...................................... 2-7
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1
Distributed I/O System ET 200S

Product Information, 09/2006, A5E00847859-01 iii

Table of contents

iv Product Information, 09/2006, A5E00847859-01

Introduction 1
1.1 Introduction
This product information describes supplements to the ET 200S Distributed I/O System
Operating Instructions (A5E00515771-03), release 12/2005 and to the
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Manual (A5E00514527-03), release 12/2005.
The chapter number mentioned in this product information refer to the chapters in the
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Operating Instructions (A5E00515771-03), release 12/2005
and to the ET 200S Distributed I/O System Manual (A5E00514527-03), release 12/2005.
Contents of this Product Information

The product spectrum of the ET 200S is supplemented by the 8-channel digital electronic
modules 8DI DC24V and 8DO DC24V 0.5A.
Section Contents of this Product Information Manual

2.1 Interrupt, error and system messages at 8DI / 8DO Supplements Chapter
8 of the operating
instructions
2.2 Digital electronic module 8DI DC24V Supplements Chapter
2.3 Digital electronic module 8 DO DC 24V/0.5A 3 in the manual
Prerequisites for Operating the Digital Electronic Modules with the Interface Modules
Operation of the digital electronic modules 8DI DC24V/ 8DO DC24V 0.5A is possible with
the following interface modules from the specified order numbers (or firmware version).
There are no limitations at the interface modules listed in the table.
Interface module As of Order Number As of Firmware Version

IM 151-1 STANDARD 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0 ---
IM 151-1 FO STANDARD 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0 ---
IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 V2.1.3
IM 151-3 PN 6ES7151-3AA20-0AB0 V4.0.1
IM 151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE 6ES7151-3BA20-0AB0
IM 151-3 PN FO 6ES7151-3BB21-0AB0

Product Information, 09/2006, A5E00847859-01 1-1

Introduction
1.1 Introduction

1-2 Product Information, 09/2006, A5E00847859-01

Product Information 2
2.1 Interrupt, Error and System Messages at 8DI / 8DO
Digital electronic modules 8DI DC24V, 8DO DC24V 0.5A

LED display at 8DI DC24V, 8DO DC24V 0.5A:

1

① Status display for input/output status (green)
Status and error displays by means of LEDs at 8DI DC24V, 8DO DC24V 0.5A
The table below shows the status and error displays at the digital electronic modules.

1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
On Input/output on channel 0 active. ---
On Input/output on channel 1 active. ---
On Input/output at Channel 2 active. ---


Product Information
2.2 Digital Electronic Module 8DI DC24V (6ES7131-4BF00-0AA0)
Properties
● Digital electronic module with eight inputs
● Nominal input voltage 24 VDC
● Suitable for connecting 2-wire sensors
● Isochronous mode supported
Note
Terminals A4, A8, A3 and A7 are only available at specified terminal modules.
Pin assignment for 8DI DC24V (6ES7131-4BF00-0AA0)

1 DI0 5 DI1 • DIn: Input signal, Channel n
2 DI2 6 DI3 • AUX1: Sensor power supply 24 VDC (for example from power
module) or potential bus (can be used freely up to 230 VAC)
3 DI4 7 DI5
4 DI6 8 DI7
A4 AUX1 A8 AUX1
A3 AUX1 A7 AUX1


Product Information
Usable terminal modules for 8DI DC24V (6ES7131-4BF00-0AA0)

TM-E15C26-A1 TM-E15C24-01 Spring terminal
(6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0) (6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0)
TM-E15S26-A1 TM-E15S24-01 Screw-type terminal
(6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0) (6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0)
TM-E15N26-A1 TM-E15N24-01
(6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0) (6ES7193-4CB70-0AA0) Fast Connect

:LULQJH[DPSOHV
ZLUH
',

',
$ $
$8;
',
$ $

',
'&9$8;


Product Information
2-wire connection
The following configuration example shows a 2-wire connection with the electronic modules
8DI DC24V. You require further terminals so that sufficient terminals are available for the
24 VDC sensor power supply when the TM-E15S26-A1 terminal modules are used. In the
example this is implement by the add-on terminal TE-U120S4x10. Per add-on terminal,
terminal modules of the same height must exist across a minimum width of 120 mm. You
can naturally also use other terminals for this configuration (for example, ET 200S potential
distribution module 4POTDIS).
2 3
4
$8;
$ $
1

'&9
5
$ $

$ $$ $$ $$ $ $$ $$ $$ $

$ $$ $$ $$ $ $$ $$ $$ $

① Terminal module TM-P15S23-A0

② Power module PM-E 24 VDC
③ Electronic modules 8DI DC24V
④ Terminal modules TM-E15S26-A1
⑤ Sensor in 2-wire connection
⑥ Add-on terminal TE-U120S4x10


Product Information
Block Diagram
,QSXW

HOHFWURQLFV

%DFNSODQHEXV
(7b6
%DFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH

,QSXW

HOHFWURQLFV
0
3
3
Figure 2-1 Block diagram of the 8DI DC24V


Product Information
Technical Specifications 8DI DC24V (6ES7131-4BF00-0AA0)

Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 15 × 81× 52
(the total dimensions depend on the selected
terminal module)
Weight Approx. 35 g
Module-specific data
Supports isochronous operation Yes
Number of inputs 8
Length of cable
• Unshielded 600 m, maximum
• Shielded 1000 m, maximum
Rated supply voltage (from the power module) 24 VDC
• Reverse polarity protection Yes
• Between the channels No
• Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Permissible potential difference
• Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Insulation test voltage 500 VDC
Current consumption
• From supply voltage Dependent on the sensor
Power dissipation of the module Typically 1.2 W
Status display Green LED per channel
Diagnostics function No
Data for selecting a sensor
Input voltage
• Rated value 24 VDC
• For signal "1" 15 V to 30 V
• For signal "0" -30 V to 5 V
Input current
• At signal "1" Typ. 7 mA (for 24 V)
Input delay
• At "0" to "1" Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
• At "1" to "0" Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)
Input characteristic curve According to IEC 61131, Type 1
Connection of 2-wire BEROs Supported
• Permitted bias current Max. 1.5 mA


Product Information
2.3 Digital Electronic Module 8DO DC24V/0.5A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)
Properties
● Digital electronic module with eight outputs
● Output current 0.5 A per output, aggregate current 4 A
● Rated load voltage 24 VDC
● Short-circuit protection
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
● Isochronous mode supported
Note
Pin assignment for 8DO DC24V/0.5A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)

1 DO0 5 DO1 • DOn: Input signal, Channel n
2 DO2 6 DO3 • AUX1: M chassis ground (from power module) or potential bus
(freely usable up to 230 VAC)
3 DO4 7 DO5
4 DO6 8 DO7
A4 AUX1 A8 AUX1
A3 AUX1 A7 AUX1


Product Information
Usable Terminal Modules
Usable terminal modules for 8DO DC24V/0.5A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)

(6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0) (6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0)
(6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0) (6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0)
TM-E15N26-A1 TM-E15N24-01

:LULQJH[DPSOHV
ZLUH

'2

'2
$ $
$8;
'2
$ $
'2
0$8;


Product Information
2-wire connection
The following configuration example shows a 2-wire connection with the electronic modules
8DO DC24V. You require further terminals so that sufficient terminals are available for the
chassis ground connection M when the TM-E15S26-A1 terminal modules are used. In the
example this is implemented by the add-on terminal TE-U120S4x10 that can be mounted as
from a width of 120 mm (8 EMs). You can naturally also use other terminals for this
configuration (for example, ET 200S potential distribution module 4POTDIS).
2 3
4
$8;
$ $
1

'&9
5
$ $

$ $$ $$ $$ $ $$ $$ $$ $

$ $$ $$ $$ $ $$ $$ $$ $


⑤ Actuators in 2-wire connection


Product Information
Block Diagram

%DFNSODQHEXV

(7b6
%DFNSODQH
EXV
LQWHUIDFH
0 5HYHUVHSRODULW\
3 SURWHFWLRQ
/
3
Figure 2-2 Block diagram of the 8 DO DC 24V/0.5A
Technical specifications 8DO DC24V/0.5A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)

Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 15 × 81 × 52
(the total dimensions depend on the selected
terminal module)
Weight Approx. 40 g
Number of outputs 8
Length of cable
• Unshielded 600 m, maximum
• Shielded 1000 m, maximum


Product Information

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) 24 VDC
• Reverse polarity protection Yes1
Total current of the outputs (per module) 4A
• Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC
Insulation tested 500 VDC
Current consumption
• From the rated load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 5 mA per channel
Diagnostics function No
Data for selecting an actuator
Output voltage
• At signal "1" Min. L+ (-1 V)
Output current
• At signal "1"
– Rated value 0.5 A
– Permitted range 7 mA to 0.6 A
• With signal "0" (leakage current) 0.3 mA max.
Output delay (for resistive load)
• At "0" to "1" max. 300 μs
• At "1" to "0" max. 600 μs
Load resistor range 48 Ω to 3.4 kΩ
Lamp load Max. 5 W
Connecting two outputs in parallel
• For redundant triggering of a load Yes (per module)
• To increase performance No
Control of a digital input Yes
Switch rate
• For resistive load 100 Hz
• On inductive load 2 Hz
• For lamp load 10 Hz
Limitation (internal) of the voltage induced on Typically L+ (-55 V to -60 V)
circuit interruption
Reverse-voltage proof Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the
power module
Short-circuit protection of the output Yes2
• Threshold on Typically 1.5 A
1 Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through.
2 Per channel


Product Information


Index
Pin assignment, 2-2
Properties, 2-2, 2-9
D Technical specifications, 2-6
Digital electronic module 8 DO DC 24V/0.5A
Block diagram, 2-10
L
Pin assignment, 2-7
Properties, 2-7 LED display
Technical specifications, 2-10 8DI DC24V, 2-1
Digital electronic module 8DI DC24V 8DO DC24V 0.5A, 2-1
Block diagram, 2-5

Product Information, 09/2006, A5E00847859-01 Index-1

Index

Index-2 Product Information, 09/2006, A5E00847859-01

NOV PART NO.:

10602939-161

Digital electronic module 8DO ___________________

Preface
DC24V/0.5 A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0) ___________________

Properties 1
SIMATIC
___________________
Diagnostics 2
ET 200S distributed I/O

Digital electronic module 8DO DC24V/0.5 A
(6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)
Manual
10/2015
A5E01077385-AB

Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
Note the following:
WARNING
Trademarks
editions.
Siemens AG A5E01077385-AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2007 - 2015.

Division Digital Factory Ⓟ 10/2015 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY

Preface

Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348).

Scope of the manual


Additional support
If you have any questions relating to the products described in this manual and do not find
the answers in this document, please contact your local Siemens representative
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/partners).
available on the Internet. (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-docu).
Digital electronic module 8DO DC24V/0.5 A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)

Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB 3

Preface
Training center
D -90327, Nuremberg, Germany (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain).
Technical Support
You can contact Technical Support for all Industry Automation products by means of the
Internet Web form for the Support Request
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi_en_WW/support_request).
Additional information about Siemens Technical Support is available on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi_en_WW/service).

(http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi_en_WW/support).
products.
● Information about on-site services, repairs, spare parts, and lots more.

4 Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB

Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Properties ............................................................................................................................................... 6
1.1 Digital electronic module 8DO DC24V/0.5 A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0) ....................................6
2 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................... 12
2.1 Diagnostics using LED display ...............................................................................................12
Index..................................................................................................................................................... 13

Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB 5

Properties 1
1.1 Digital electronic module 8DO DC24V/0.5 A
(6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)
Properties
● Digital electronic module with eight outputs
● Output current 0.5 A per output, total current 4 A
● Rated load voltage 24 V DC
● Short-circuit protection
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
● Supports isochronous operation
Special features
When the rated load voltage 24 V DC is applied to the power module via a mechanical
contact, the digital outputs carry a "1" signal for about 50 μs for switching reasons. You have
to take this into consideration if you use this module in connection with high-speed counters.
Requirements for operation

It is possible to operate the 8DO DC24V 0.5A digital electronic module using the following
interface modules with the order numbers specified (or higher). The interface modules listed
in the table are not subject to any constraints.
Interface module Order number (or higher) Firmware version (or

higher)
IM 151-1 STANDARD 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0 ---
IM 151-1 FO STANDARD 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0 ---
IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 V2.1.3
IM 151-3 PN 6ES7151-3AA20-0AB0 V4.0.1
IM 151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE 6ES7151-3BA20-0AB0
IM 151-3 PN FO 6ES7151-3BB21-0AB0

6 Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB

Properties
1.1 Digital electronic module 8DO DC24V/0.5 A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)
Note
Terminal assignment for 8DO DC24V/0.5A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)

Terminal Allocation Terminal Allocation Notes
1 DO0 5 DO1 • DOn: Output signal, channel n
2 DO2 6 DO3 • AUX1: Mass M (from power module) or voltage bus (freely usable
3 DO4 7 DO5 up to 230 V AC)
4 DO6 8 DO7
A4 AUX1 A8 AUX1
A3 AUX1 A7 AUX1
Usable terminal modules for 8DO DC24V/0.5A (6ES7132-4BF00-0AA0)

TM-E15C26-A1 TM-E15C24-01
(6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0) (6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0) Spring terminal
TM-E15S26-A1 TM-E15S24-01
(6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0) (6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0) Screw-type terminal
TM-E15N26-A1 TM-E15N24-01

Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB 7

Properties
2-wire connection
The following configuration example shows a two-wire connection with the electronic
modules 8DO DC24V. You require further terminals so that sufficient terminals are available
for the mass M connection when the TM-E15S26-A1 terminal modules are used. In the
example this is implemented by the add-on terminal TE-U120S4x10, which you can mount
as of a width of 120 mm (8 EMs). You can naturally also use other terminals for this
configuration (for example, ET 200S potential distribution module 4POTDIS).

⑤ Actuator in 2-wire connection

8 Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB

Properties
Block diagram
Figure 1-1 Block diagram of the 8DO DC24V 0.5A

Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB 9

Properties

Width (mm) 15
Weight Approx. 40 g
Number of outputs 8
Cable length
• Unshielded Max. 600 m
• Shielded Max. 1000 m

Address space 1 byte
Rated Rated load voltage L+ (from power mod- 24 V DC
ule)
• Polarity reversal protection Yes 1
Total current of the outputs (per module) 4A


• Between different circuits 75 V DC / 60 V AC
Isolation tested 500 V DC

Current consumption
• From the rated load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 5 mA per channel
Power loss of the module Typically 1.5 W

Diagnostics functions No

10 Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB

Properties

Actuator selection data
Output voltage
• At signal "1" Min. L+ (-1 V)
Output current
• At signal "1"
0.5 A
– Rated value
7 mA to 0.6 A
– Permissible range
• At "0" signal (residual current) Max. 0.3 mA
Output delay (with resistive load)

• At "0" to "1" Max. 300 µs
• At "1" to "0" Max. 600 µs
Load resistance range 48 Ω to 3.4 kΩ

Lamp load Max. 5 W
Parallel switching of 2 outputs
• For redundant control of a load Yes (per module)
• For increased performance No
Control of a digital input Yes

Switching frequency
• With resistive load 100 Hz
• With inductive load 2 Hz
• With lamp load 10 Hz
Limiting (internal) of inductive shut-down voltage Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

Reverse-voltage proof Yes, if using the same load voltage as at the
power module
Short-circuit protection of the output Yes 2
• Response threshold Typ. 1.5 A
1) Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being switched through.
2per channel

Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB 11

Diagnostics 2
LED display
① Status display for output status (green)
Status and error displays

1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
On Output on channel 0 activated. —

12 Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB

Index
2
2-wire connection, 8
B
Block diagram, 9
D
Disposal, 3
I
Internet
L
LED display, 12
P
Properties, 6
R
Recycling, 3
S
Scope
Manual, 3
T
Technical specifications, 10
Technical Support, 4
Training Center, 4

Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB 13

Index

14 Manual, 10/2015, A5E01077385-AB

NOV PART NO.:

10602939-154

Preface
SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O 2AI I 4WIRE ST analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)
1
______________
Properties
2
SIMATIC ______________
Parameters
3
ET 200S distributed I/O ______________
Diagnostics
2AI I 4WIRE ST analog electronic 4

module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0) ______________
Analog value representation
5
Manual ______________
Connecting
04/2007
A5E01076100-01

Safety Guidelines
Safety Guidelines
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
WARNING
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only
in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or
recommended by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage,
positioning and assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
editions.
이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정 외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.
Siemens AG Ordernumber: A5E01076100-01 Copyright © Siemens AG 2007.

Automation and Drives Ⓟ 09/2007 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90327 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY

Preface

Operating Instructions.

Scope of the manual


Additional support
If you have any questions relating to the products described in these operating instructions,
and do not find the answers in this document, please contact your local Siemens
representative.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner
The portal to our technical documentation for the various SIMATIC products and systems is
available at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/simatic/portal
The online catalog and ordering system are available at:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall
2AI I 4WIRE ST analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 3

Preface
Training center
system. Please contact your regional training center or the central training center in D -
90327, Nuremberg, Germany.
Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200.
http://www.siemens.com/sitrain
Technical Support
You can reach technical support for all A&D projects
● using the support request web form:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
● Phone: + 49 180 5050 222
● Fax: + 49 180 5050 223
For more information about our technical support, refer to our Web site at
http://www.siemens.de/automation/service

In addition to our documentation services, you can also make use of our comprehensive
online knowledge base on the Internet.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
products.
● Information about on-site services, repairs, spare parts. Lots more can be found on our
"Services" pages.

4 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01

Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Properties .................................................................................................................................................. 7
1.1 2AI I 4WIRE ST analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)............................................7
2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Parameters...................................................................................................................................11
2.2 Parameter description..................................................................................................................12
3 Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................................. 13
3.1 Diagnostics using LED display.....................................................................................................13
3.2 Error types....................................................................................................................................14
4 Analog value representation .................................................................................................................... 15
4.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................15
4.2 Analog value representation for measuring range with SIMATIC S7 ..........................................15
4.3 Measuring ranges ........................................................................................................................16
4.4 Effect on analog value representation .........................................................................................18
4.4.1 Effect of the supply voltage and the operating state on analog input values ..............................18
4.4.2 Effect of the value range on the 2 AI I 4WIRE ST analog input...................................................18
5 Connecting .............................................................................................................................................. 19
5.1 Connecting measuring sensors ...................................................................................................19
5.2 Wiring unused channels of the analog input modules .................................................................22
5.2 Using the shield connection .........................................................................................................22
Index........................................................................................................................................................ 23

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 5

Table of contents

6 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01

Properties 1
1.1 2AI I 4WIRE ST analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)
Properties
● 2 inputs for measuring current
● Input ranges:
– ± 20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign
– 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits
● Permissible common mode voltage 2 VACSS
● Extended temperature range from 0 to 50°C with vertical installation
Note
Terminals 4, 8, A4, A8, A3 and A7 are only available at specified terminal modules.
Terminal assignment for 2AI I 4WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)

1 M0+ 5 M1+ • Mn+: Input signal "+", Channel n
2 M0- 6 M1- • Mn-: Input signal "-", Channel n
3 L+ 7 L+ • L+: Power supply for four-wire measuring transducer
4 Mana 8 Mana • Mana: Ground (of power module)
• AUX1: Protective-conductor terminal or potential bus (freely usable
A4 AUX1 A8 AUX1 up to 230 VAC)
A3 AUX1 A7 AUX1

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 7

Properties
Usable terminal modules for 2AI I 4WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)

(6ES7193-4CA50- (6ES7193-4CB30-
0AA0) 0AA0)
(6ES7193-4CA40- (6ES7193-4CB20-
0AA0) 0AA0)
TM-E15N26-A1 TM-E15N24-01
(6ES7193-4CA80- (6ES7193-4CB70- Fast Connect
0AA0) 0AA0)
6DPSOHFRQQHFWLRQ
ZLUH

0 P$

0

/

0DQD
$ $
$8;

$ $

Block diagram

08;

(76
%DFNSODQHEXV
EDFNSODQHEXV $'&
LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ
/ 9
0 $1$
3
3 0
&XUUHQW
OLPLWLQJ

Figure 1-1 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE ST

8 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01

Properties
2AI I 4WIRE ST technical specifications (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)

Width (mm) 15
Weight Approx. 40 g
Supports isochronous operation No
Number of inputs 2
Cable length
• Shielded Max. 200 m
Address space 4 bytes
Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) 24 VDC
• Reverse polarity protection Yes
Power supply of the transducers Yes
• Short-circuit protection Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)
• Between the channels and load voltage L+ No
• Between MANA and the backplane bus (Uiso) 75 V DC, 60 V AC
Insulation tested 500 VDC
Current consumption
• From load voltage L+ Max. 30 mA
Diagnostics function
• Group error Red "SF" LED
• Diagnostic functions readable Yes
Analog value generation
Measuring principle Integrative
Integration and cycle time/resolution per channel:
• Integration time can be assigned parameters Yes
• Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60 50
• Integration time in ms 16,7 20
• Conversion time in ms 55 65
• Cycle time in ms Number of active channels per module x
conversion time
• Resolution (including overshoot range) ± 20 mA/13 bits + sign
4 to 20 mA/13 bits

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 9

Properties
Suppression of interference, limits of error

Noise suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 1%),
(f1 = interference frequency)
• Common mode interference Min. 70 dB
(peak value of interference < rated value of
input range)
Crosstalk between the inputs Min. - 50 dB
Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, ± 0,6 %
with reference to the input range)
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25°C with ± 0,4 %
reference to input range)
Temperature error (with reference to the input ± 0.005 %/K
range)
Linearity error (with reference to the input range) ± 0,01 %
Repeatability ± 0,05 %
(in steady state at 25°C with reference to input
range)
Data for selecting a sensor
Input range (rated value)/input resistance
• Current ± 20 mA/50 Ω
4 to 20 mA/50 Ω
Permitted input current (destruction limit) 40 mA
Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by
means of digital filtering
Step Time constant
None 1 x cycle time
Weak 4 x cycle time
Medium 32 x cycle time
Strong 64 x cycle time

10 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01

Parameters 2
2.1 Parameters
Table 2-1 Parameters for analog input module
2 AI I 4WIRE ST Range of values Default setting Applicability

Group diagnostics (parameter • Disable Disable Module
assignment error, internal error) • Enable
Diagnostics: Overflow/underflow • Disable Disable Module
• Enable
Diagnostics: • Disable Disable Channel
Wire break* • Enable
Smoothing • None None Channel
• Weak
• Medium
• Strong
Type/range of measurement • Deactivated 4WIRE: 4 to 20 mA Channel
• 4WIRE: 4 to 20 mA
• 4WIRE: ± 20 mA
* Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 11

Parameters
2.2 Parameter description
2.2 Parameter description
Smoothing
The individual measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. The smoothing can be
adjusted in four steps, in which the smoothing factor k multiplied with cycle time of the
electronic module equals the time constant of the smoothing filter. The greater the
smoothing, the greater the time constant of the filter.
The following diagrams show the step response with the various smoothing factors in
relation to the number of module cycles.
1RQHN :HDNN 0HGLXPN 6WURQJN

[[ [ [

6WHSUHVSRQVH

0RGXOHF\FOHV
Figure 2-1 Smoothing with the 2 AI I 4WIRE ST

12 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01

Diagnostics 3
LED display
6) 1
① Batch error (red)
Status and error displays
Event (LED) Cause Remedy

SF
On No configuration or incorrect Check the parameter
module plugged in. No load assignment. Check the load
voltage.present There is a voltage. Evaluate the
diagnostic message. diagnostics.

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 13

Diagnostics
3.2 Error types
3.2 Error types
Analog input module error types
Table 3-1 Error types
Error type Meaning Remedy

16D 10000: Parameter Module cannot use the Correct the configuration (align
assignment error parameter for the channel: actual and set configuration).
Inserted module does not Correct the parameter assignment
match the one configured. (wire break diagnostics only
Incorrect parameter parameterized for the permitted
assignment. measuring ranges).
9D 01001: Error Internal module error Replace the module.
(diagnostic message at
channel 0 applies to the entire
module)
7D 00111: Upper limit Value is above the overshoot Correct the module/final controlling
exceeded range. element tuning.
8D 01000: Lower limit Value is below the underrange. Correct the module/final controlling
value undershot element tuning.
6D 00110: Line to the encoder Correct the process wiring.
Open circuit interrupted.

14 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01

Analog value representation 4

4.1 Introduction
Electronic modules with analog outputs

With the electronic module with analog inputs, continuously variable signals, such as those
occurring in temperature measurement and resistance measurement, can be acquired,
evaluated, and converted to digital values for further processing.
4.2 Analog value representation for measuring range with SIMATIC S7

With the same nominal range, the digitized analog value is the same for input and output
values. Analog values are represented in two's complement.
The following table shows the analog value representation of the analog electronic modules.
Table 4-1 Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format)
Resolution Analog value

Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Significance of the bits S 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
Sign
The sign (S) of the analog value is always in bit number 15:
● "0" → +
● "1" → –

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 15


4.3 Measuring ranges
Output value
The following table shows the representation of the binary analog values and the
corresponding decimal and hexadecimal representation of the units of the analog values.
The table below shows the resolutions 11, 12, 13, and 15 bit + sign. Each analog value is
entered left aligned in the ACCU. The bits marked with "x" are set to "0".
Table 4-2 Output values (SIMATIC S7 format)
Resolution in bits Units Analog value

Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte
11+S 16 10H S0000000 001xxxx
12+S 8 8H S0000000 0001xxx
13+S 4 4H S0000000 00001xx
15 + sign 1 1H S0000000 0000001
Introduction
The following tables contain the digitized analog values for the measuring ranges of the
analog input modules.
Since the binary representation of the analog values is always the same, these tables only
compare the measuring ranges with the units.
Measuring ranges for current: 4 to 20 mA
Table 4-3 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range 4 to 20 mA
Measuring range Units Range

4 to 20 mA Decimal Hexadecimal
> 22,8142 32767 7FFFH Overflow
22,8142 32511 7EFFH
: : : Overshoot range
20,0005 27649 6C01H
20,0000 27648 6C00H
16,0000 20736 5100H
: : : Nominal range
4,0000 0 0H
3,9995 -1 FFFFH
. : : Underrange
1,1852 -4864 ED00H
< 1,1852 -32768 8000H Underflow

16 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01


Current measuring range: ± 20 mA
Table 4-4 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range ± 20 mA
Measuring range ± 20 mA Units Range

Decimal Hexadecimal
> 23,5150 32767 7FFFH Overflow
23,5150 32511 7EFFH
: : : Overshoot range
20,0007 27649 6C01H
20,0000 27648 6C00H
14,9980 20736 5100H
: : : Nominal range
-14,9980 -20736 AF00H
-20,0000 -27648 9400H
-20,0007 -27649 93FFH
: : : Underrange
-23,5160 -32512 8100H
< -23,5160 -32768 8000H Underflow
Measured values in the event of a wire break in relation to enabled diagnostics

The following additional information applies to the current measuring range 4 to 20 mA:
Table 4-5 Measured values in the event of a wire break in relation to enabled diagnostics
Format Parameter assignment1 Measured values Description

Decimal Hexadecimal
S7 • "Wire break" diagnostics enabled 32767 7FFFH • "Open circuit" diagnostic message
• "Wire break" diagnostics disabled -32767 8000H • Measured value after leaving the
• "Overflow/underflow" diagnostics underrange
enabled • "Lower limit value undershot"
diagnostic message
• "Wire break" diagnostics disabled -32767 8000H • Measured value after leaving the
• "Overflow/underflow" diagnostics underrange
disabled
1 Measuring range limits for wire break and underflow detection: At 1.185 mA

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 17


4.4 Effect on analog value representation
4.4 Effect on analog value representation
4.4.1 Effect of the supply voltage and the operating state on analog input values
The input values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply voltage for
electronics/encoders and on the operating state of the PLC (CPU of the DP master). This is
illustrated by the table below.
Table 4-6 Relationship between the analog input values for the operating state of the PLC (CPU of
the DP master) and the supply voltage L+
Operating state of the PLC (CPU Supply voltage L+ on Input value of the electronic module with
of the DP master) ET 200S (power analog inputs (evaluation possible on the
module) CPU of the DP master)
POWER ON RUN L+ present Process values
7FFFH until first conversion after startup, or
after assignment of parameters for the
module is completed.
L+ present 7FFFH
POWER ON STOP L+ missing Process value
L+ present 7FFFH
POWER OFF - L+ missing -
L+ present -
4.4.2 Effect of the value range on the 2 AI I 4WIRE ST analog input

The way electronic modules respond to analog inputs depends on where the input values fall
within the value range. This is illustrated by the table below.
Table 4-7 Response of the analog modules, depending on where the analog input value falls within the range of values
Measured value within ... Input value in SIMATIC S7 format Input value in SIMATIC S5 format
Nominal range Measured value Measured value
Over-/underrange Measured value Measured value
Overflow 7FFFH End of the overshoot range +1 plus
overflow bit
Underflow 8000H End of the underrange -1 plus overflow
bit
Prior to parameter assignment, or with 7FFFH 7FFFH
incorrect parameter assignment*
* With product version 1 of the 2 AI I 4WIRE ST, the following applies: If the parameter setting error diagnostic message is
triggered because the parameters have been assigned incorrectly (e.g., wire break in measuring range ±20 mA), the SF
LED on the module lights up and the diagnostics can be evaluated. With this status, the correct input values are sent to the
DP master.

18 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01

Connecting 5
5.1 Connecting measuring sensors
Introduction You can connect current transmitters to the 2 AI I 4WIRE analog input module to act as:
● Connecting 4-wire transmitters.
In this chapter you will find out how to connect the measuring encoders and what to watch
out for when doing so.
Cables for analog signals

You should use shielded and twisted-pair cables for the analog signals. This reduces the
effect of interference. You should ground the shield of the analog cables at both ends. If
there are differences in potential between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current
that may interfere with the analog signals will flow across the shield. If this is the case, you
should only ground the shield at one end of the cable.
Analog input modules

The analog input modules are electrically isolated:
● Between the logic and backplane bus
● No isolation: Link between MANA and central grounding point
Note
Ensure that this difference in potential UISO does not exceed the permitted value. If there
is a possibility of exceeding the permitted value, establish a connection between terminal
MANA and the central grounding point.
Connecting measuring encoders to analog inputs

There can be only a limited potential difference UCM (common mode) between the measuring
lines M- of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA. To
ensure that the permitted value is not exceeded, you must take different steps depending on
the whether the encoders are isolated or non-isolated. The steps you have to take are
described in this chapter.

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 19

Connecting
Abbreviations used
The meanings of the abbreviations in the figures below are as follows:
M+: Measuring line (positive)

M- Measuring line (negative)
MANA Analog measuring circuit reference potential
M Ground connection
L+ Rated load voltage 24 V DC
UCM Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the measuring
circuit MANA
UISO Potential difference between MANA and central grounding point
Isolated measuring encoders

The isolated measuring encoders are not connected to the local ground potential. These can
be potential-free. Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM
(static or dynamic) can occur between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the
reference point of the measuring circuit MANA.
In environments with a high level of EMC interference, it is advisable to connect M- to MANA
in order to prevent the permissible UCM value from being exceeded.
The following schematic representation illustrates the connection of isolated measuring
encoders to the analog input modules.
/
0
0
P$ 1
0
8&0
5 0
$'8
2
P$
0
0$1$
8LVR
① Logic
② Backplane bus
③ Ground bus
④ Central grounding point
⑤ Isolated measuring encoders

20 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01

Connecting
Non-isolated measuring encoders

The non-isolated measuring encoders are connected to the local ground potential. You must
connect MANA to the ground potential. Depending on local conditions or interference,
potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed
measuring points.
If the permitted value for UCM is exceeded, there must be equipotential bonding conductors
between the measuring points.
The following schematic representation illustrates the connection of non-isolated measuring
encoders to an optically isolated analog input module.
Connection of non-isolated measuring encoders to an optically isolated analog input module:
/
0
0
P$ 1
0
5 0
$'8
2
P$
0
8&0 0$1$
4
8,62
3
① Logic
② Backplane bus
③ Ground bus
④ Equipotential bonding conductor
⑤ Non-isolated measuring encoders
Operating four-wire transmitters on an external voltage supply

If there is electrical isolation between the output and the transmitter supply, you can connect
the transmitter to the 2 AI I 4WIRE ST without the need for additional connections.
If there is no electrical isolation between the output and the transmitter supply, you can only
connect the transmitter to the 2 AI I 4WIRE ST if the reference potential of the supply
voltages (24 V DC) is the same.
If there is an increase in interference radiation, it is recommended that you connect M- to
MANA on the terminal module of the 2 AI I 4WIRE ST.

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 21

Connecting
5.2 Wiring unused channels of the analog input modules
5.2 Wiring unused channels of the analog input modules
Rules
Pay attention to the following instructions when wiring unused channels:
● "Deactivate" unused input channels when assigning parameters.
● A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH.
● The module cycle time is halved with the 2 AI I 4WIRE ST modules.
5.3 Using the shield connection
Rules
To prevent interference we recommend the following for analog electronic modules:
● Use shielded wires to the sensors and actuators.
● Lay out the wire shields on the shield connection.
● Connect the shield connection to the ground bus with low impedance.

22 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01

Index
2 L
2 AI I 2WIRE ST analog electronic module LED display, 13
Properties, 7
2AI I 4WIRE ST analog electronic module
Block diagram, 8 M
Properties, 7
Measured value resolution, 16
Measuring encoders, 19
Measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7, 15
4
4-wire transmitters, 21 N
Non-isolated measuring encoders, 21
A
Analog value processing, 19 P
Parameters
For analog electronic modules, 11
B
R
Recycling, 3
C
Response of the analog modules, 18
Cables for analog signals, 19 During operation, 18
Connecting, 19 When faults occur, 18
Connecting measuring encoders to analog inputs, 19
S
D Scope
Disposal, 3 Manual, 3
Shield connection, 22
E Smoothing, 12
Error types, 14
T
I Technical Support, 4
Internet Training center, 4
Isolated measuring encoders, 20

Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01 23

Index
SIMATIC ET 200S distributed I/O 2AI I 4WIRE ST analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)
24 Manual, 04/2007, A5E01076100-01

NOV PART NO.:

10602939-156

Data sheet 6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0

SIMATIC DP, ELECTRONIC MODULE FOR ET 200S, 2 AO I 15 MM
WIDE, +/-20 MA; 13 BIT + SIGN, 4 . .20 MA; 13 BIT CYCLE TIME <
1 MS WITH LED SF (GROUP FAULT)
Supply voltage
Load voltage L+
● Rated value (DC) 24 V; From power module
● Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input current
from load voltage L+ (without load), max. 150 mA
from backplane bus 3.3 V DC, max. 10 mA
Power losses
Power loss, max. 2 W
Address area
Address space per module
● Address space per module, max. 4 byte
Analog outputs
Number of analog outputs 2
Current output, no-load voltage, max. 18 V
Cycle time (all channels) max. 1.5 ms
Output ranges, current
● -20 mA to +20 mA Yes
● 4 mA to 20 mA Yes
Connection of actuators
● for current output two-wire connection Yes
● for current output four-wire connection No
Load impedance (in rated range of output)
6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0 Changes preserved

Page 1/3 24.04.2015 © Copyright Siemens AG

● with current outputs, max. 500 Ω

● with current outputs, inductive load, max. 1 mH
Destruction limits against externally applied voltages and currents
● Voltages at the outputs towards MANA 15 V; max. 15 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (mark to space
ratio 1:20)
● Current, max. 50 mA; DC
Cable length
● shielded, max. 200 m
Analog value generation for the outputs

Integration and conversion time/resolution per channel
● Resolution with overrange (bit including sign), 14 bit; 4 to 20 mA: 13 bits, +/-20 mA: 14 bits
max.
Settling time
● for resistive load 0.1 ms
● for capacitive load 0.5 ms
● for inductive load 0.5 ms
Errors/accuracies
Output ripple (based on output area, bandwidth 0 to 0.02 %
50 kHz), (+/-)
Linearity error (relative to output range), (+/-) 0.02 %
Temperature error (relative to output range), (+/-) 0.01 %/K
Repeat accuracy in steady state at 25 °C (relative to 0.05 %
output area), (+/-)
Operational limit in overall temperature range
● Current, relative to output area, (+/-) 0.5 %
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
● Current, relative to output area, (+/-) 0.3 %
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Substitute values connectable Yes; 0 to 65535 (range of values must be within the rated range)
Diagnostic messages
● Wire break Yes
● Group error Yes
Diagnostics indication LED
● Group error SF (red) Yes
Parameter
Remark 7 byte
Output type/range deactivated / +/-20 mA / 4 to 20 mA
Diagnosis: wire break Disable / enable
Group diagnostics Disable / enable
Behavior on CPU/Master STOP Output current and de-energized/substitute a value/keep last
value


Ex(i) characteristics
Max. values of output circuits (per channel)
● Uo (output no-load voltage), max. 18 V
Potential separation
Galvanic isolation analog outputs
● between the channels No
● between the channels and the backplane bus Yes
● between the channels and the load voltage L+ Yes

between MANA and M internally (UISO) 75V DC/60V AC
Dimensions
Width 15 mm
Height 81 mm
Depth 52 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 40 g
last modified: 20.04.2015




Revision 01
Page 6 of 7
3 POWER SUPPLY & CIRCUIT BREAKER

10044170-001 PWR-SPLY,24V/10A OUTPUT Sola
10044673-001 PWR-SPLY REDUNDANT MODULE Sola
10045083-001 CB- 10AT,2P,480Y/277VAC,6KIC ABB
www.nov.com

NOV PART NO.:

10044170-001

Printed By: parambahk 10044170-001
Printed On: 2016-07-31 01:11:56 GMT-0500
4 Power Supplies
SDN™ Performance DIN Rail Series

The SDN DIN Rail power supplies provide industry
leading performance. Sag immunity, transient suppression
and noise tolerant, the SDN series ensures compatibility in
demanding applications. Power factor correction to meet
European directive, hazardous location approvals and
optional redundant accessories allow the SDN series to
be used in a wide variety of applications. Wide operation
temperature range, high tolerance to shock and vibration
and reliable design make the SDN series the definition of
DC power quality.
Features
UL 60950 EMC and
• Power Factor Correction (per EN61000-3-2) UL 508 Listed
IND. CONT. EQ. E137632 Low Volt.
CUL/CSA-C22.2 Directive
E61379
• Auto Select 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz Input No. 234-M90
• Single Phase models meet SEMI F47 Sag Immunity

• Class 1, Div 2 Hazardous Locations Related Products
• ATEX approval on 2.5 through 10A Single Phase • SDP™ Series
Models • SFL Series
• Improved metal mounting clip • SCP Series
• DC OK Signal • SCL Series
• Adjustable Voltage
• SDN10-24-100P New Compact width (3.26”) Applications
• Parallel Capability standard on all units • Industrial/Machine control
• Industrial grade design • Process control
• -10°C to 60°C operation without derating. • Conveying Equipment
Indefinite short circuit, overvoltage and • Material Handling
overtemperature protection.
• Vending Machines
• Powers high inrush loads without shutdown
or foldback • Packaging Equipment
• Rugged metal case and DIN connector • DeviceNetTM
• SDN2.5-24-100P and SDN4-24-100LP meet NEC • Amusement Park Equipment
Class 2 • Semiconductor Fabrication Equipment
• Narrow width on rail for space critical applications
• User-friendly front panel Accessories
• Large, rugged, accessible, multiple connection • Chassis Mount Bracket (SDN-PMBRK2)
screw terminations
• Easy installation
• Broad range of product to fit almost any
application – 2.5 A through 40 A
• Single and three phase inputs available
• Highly efficient >90% switching technology
• High MTBF and reliability
Visit our website at www.solaheviduty.com or

86 contact Technical Services at (800) 377-4384 with any questions.

Power Supplies 4
The Sola Difference
Strong all metal
DIN connector
for horizontal or
vertical mounting
Rugged metal packaging
Large, heavy-duty screw
terminals for #10 AWG/4 mm2,
for quick, easy installation
Multiple output
connections
for ease of wiring
multiple devices
DC OK Signal
Single or parallel use

selectable by user
Easy to use, clearly Adjustable

labeled front panel output voltage
No internal fan, no extra

cooling required in any
power level
UL508 listing
means no derating
in UL 508 systems
Full CE compliance for

safety, emissions and
ingress protection
Automatically adjusts for

either 115 or 230V, 50 or Narrow width for minimal
60 Hz Input. No manual panel space required
intervention required.

Contact Technical Services at (800) 377-4384 with any questions. 87
4 Power Supplies
SDNTM Specifications (Single Phase)
Catalog Number
Description
SDN 2.5-24-100P SDN 4-24-100LP SDN 5-24-100P SDN 10-24-100P SDN 20-24-100P
Input
Nominal Voltage 115/230 VAC auto select
-AC Range 85-132/176-264 VAC
-DC Range6 90-375 VDC 210-375 VDC N/A
-Frequency 47 - 63 Hz
Nominal Current1 1.3 A. / 0.7 A 2.1 A / 1.0 A 2.2 A / 1.0 A 5 A / 2 A typ. 9 A/ 3.9 A
-Inrush current max. typ. < 25 A typ. < 20 A typ. < 40 A
Efficiency (Losses2) > 87.5% typ (8.6 W) > 88% typ (13.1 W) > 88% typ (16.4 W) > 88% typ (32.7 W) > 90% typ (48 W)
Power Factor Correction Units Fulfill EN61000-3-2
Output
Nominal Voltage 24 VDC (22.5 - 28.5 VDC adj.) 24 VDC (22.5 - 25.5 VDC adj.) 24 VDC (22.5 - 28.5 VDC adj.)
-Tolerance < ±2% overall (combination Line, load, time and temperature related changes)
-Ripple3 < 50 mVpp
Nominal Current 2.5 A (60 W) 3.8 A (92 W) 5 A (120 W) 10 A (240 W) 20 A (480 W)
4 1.6x Nominal Current 6 A 2x Nominal Current 12 A 2x Nominal Current 25 A 2x Nominal Current

-Peak Current 4.2 A max at 23.8V
< 2 sec. < 2 sec. < 2 sec. < 2 sec.
-Current Limit Fold Forward (Current rises, voltage drops to maintain constant power during overload up to max peak current)
Holdup Time5 > 50 ms > 100 ms > 100 ms > 20 ms
Parallel Operation Single or Parallel use is selectable via Front Panel Switch (SDN4 should not be used in parallel as Class 2 rating would be violated.)
General
EMC:
EN61000-6-3, -4; Class B EN55011, EN55022 Radiated and Conducted including Annex A.
-Emissions
EN61000-6-1, -2; EN61000-4-2 Level 4, EN61000-4-3 Level 3; EN61000-4-6 Level 3; EN61000-4-4 Level 4 input and Level 3 output; EN61000-4-5 Isolation Class
-Immunity
4, EN61000-4-11; Transient resistance according to VDE 0160/W2 over entire load range.
EN60950; EN50178; EN60204; UL508 Listed, cULus; UL60950, cRUus, CE (LVD 73/23 & 93/68/EEC). EN61000-3-2, IEC60079-15 (Class 1, Zone 2, Hazardous
Approvals Location, Groups A, B, C, D w/ T3A temp class up to 60°C Ambient.) SEMI F47 Sag Immunity. SDN2.5 & SDN4 - UL60950 testing to include approval as
Class 2 power supply.
Storage: -25oC...+85oC Operation. -10o-60oC full power with operation to 70oC possible with a linear derating to half power from 60oC to 70oC (Convection cooling,
Temperature no forced air required). Operation up to 50% load permissable with sideways or front side up mounting orientation. The relative humidity is < 90% RH,
noncondensing; IEC 68-2-2, 68-2-3. For operation below -10oC, contact Technical Services.
MTBF: > 820,000 hours > 640,000 hours > 600,000 hours > 510,000 hours
- Standard Bellcore Issue 6 Method 1 Case 3 @ 40C MIL217F @ 30C
Warranty 5 years
Protected against continuous short-circuit, overload, open-circuit. Protection class 1 (IEC536), degree of protection IP20 (IEC 529)
General Protection/Safety
Safe low voltage: SELV (acc.EN60950)
Status Indicators Green LED and DC OK signal (N.O. Solid State Contact rated 200 mA / 60 VDC)
Installation
Fusing
Internally fused. External 10 A slow acting fusing for the input is recommended to protect input wiring.
-Input
Outputs are capable of providing high currents for short periods of time for inductive load startup or switching. Fusing may be required for wire/loads if 2x Nominal
-Output
O/P current rating cannot be tolerated. Continuous current overload allows for reliable fuse tripping.
Mounting Simple snap-on system for DIN Rail TS35/7.5 or TS35/15 or chassis-mounted (optional screw mounting set SDN-PMBRK2 required).
Input: IP20-rated screw terminals, connector size range: 16-10 AWG (1.5-6 mm2) for solid conductors. 16-12 AWG (0.5-4 mm2) for flexible conductors.
Connections
Output: Two connectors per output, connector size range: 16-10 AWG (1.5 - 6 mm2) for solid conductors.
Case Fully enclosed metal housing with fine ventilation grid to keep out small parts.
25 mm above and below, 25 mm left and right, 25 mm above and below, 25 mm 70 mm above and below, 25 mm left and right,
-Free Space
10 mm in front left and right, 15 mm in front 15 mm in front
4.88 in. x 1.97 in. x 4.55 in. 4.88 in. x 2.56 in. x 4.55 in. 4.88 in. x 3.26 in. x 4.55 in. 4.88 in. x 6.88 in. x 4.55 in.
H x W x D (inches/mm)
(124 mm x 50 mm x 116 mm) (124 mm x 65 mm x 116 mm) (124 mm x 83 mm x 116 mm) (124 mm x 175 mm x 116 mm)
Weight (lbs/g) 1 lb (460g) 1.5 lbs (620g) 2.2 lbs (1100g) 3 lbs (1520g)
1 4
Input current ratings are conservatively specified with low input, worst case efficiency and power factor. All peak current is calculated at 24 Volt levels.
2 5
Losses are heat dissipation in watts at full load, nominal input line. Full load, 100 VAC Input @ Tamb = +25°C
3 6
Ripple/noise is stated as typical values when measured with a 20 MHz, bandwidth scope and 50 Ohm resistor. Not UL listed for DC input.


Power Supplies 4
SDNTM Specifications (Three Phase)
Catalog Number
Description
SDN 5-24-480 SDN 10-24-480 SDN 20-24-480C SDN 30-24-480 SDN 40-24-480
Input
Nominal Voltage 1Ø or 3Ø 380-480 VAC 1Ø or 3Ø 380 - 480 VAC1 3Ø 380 - 480 VAC
-AC Range 340 - 576 VAC
-DC Range 450 - 820 VDC
-Frequency 47 - 63 Hz
Nominal Current 0.5 A 0.8 A 1.5 A 2.0 A 3.0 A
-Inrush current max. typ. < 18 A typ. < 30 A
Efficiency (Losses) 3 > 90% typ (12 W) > 90% typ (48 W) > 90% typ (72 W) > 90% typ (96 W)
Power Factor Correction Units Fulfill EN61000-3-2
Output
Nominal Voltage 24 VDC (22.5 - 28.5 VDC adj.)
-Tolerance < ±2% overall (combination Line, load, time and temperature related changes)
-Ripple4 < 50 mVpp
Nominal Current 5 A (120 W) 10 A (240 W) 20 A (480 W) 30 A (720 W) 40 A (960 W)
-Peak Current 6 A 2x Nominal Current <2sec. 12 A 2x Nominal Current <2 sec. 25 A 2x Nominal Current <2sec. 35 A 2x Nominal Current < 2 sec. 45 A 2x Nominal Current<2 sec
-Current Limit Fold Forward (Current rises, voltage drops to maintain constant power during overload up to max peak current)
Holdup Time > 40 ms > 28 ms > 20 ms
Parallel Operation 5A through 30A units may be passively paralleled by selecting the “P” position of the switch on the unit. The SDN40 contains active current balancing.
General
EMC
EN61000-6-3, -4; Class B EN55011, EN55022 Radiated and Conducted including Annex A.
- Emissions
-Immunity EN61000-6-1, -2; EN61000-4-2 Level 4, EN61000-4-3 Level 3; EN61000-4-6 Level 3; EN61000-4-4 Level 4 input and Level 3 output; EN61000-4-5 Isolation Class 4,
EN61000-4-11; Transient resistance according to VDE 0160/W2 over entire load range.
Approvals CB Scheme, EN60950; EN50178; EN60204; UL508 Listed, cULus; UL60950, cRUus, CE (LVD 73/23 & 93/68/EEC). EN61000-3-2, IEC 60079-15 (Class 1, Zone 2
hazardous location, Groups IIA, IIB, IIC w/T3 temp class up to 60°C Ambient.
Temperature Storage: -25oC...+85oC Operation. -10oC -60oC full power with operation to 70oC possible with a linear derating to half power from 60oC to 70oC (Convection cooling, no
forced air required). Operation up to 50% load permissable with sideways or front side up mounting orientation. The relative humidity is < 90% RH, noncondensing; IEC
68-2-2, 68-2-3.
MTBF > 1,110,000 hours > 940,000 hours > 550,000 hours > 620,000 hours > 490,000 hours
-Standard MIL217F @ 30C
Warranty 5 years
General Protection/
Protected against continuous short-circuit, overload, open-circuit. Protection class 1 (IEC536), degree of protection IP20 (IEC 529) Safe low voltage: SELV (acc.EN60950)
Safety
Status Indicators Green LED on when Vout = 18V or greater.
Installation
Fusing
-Input Internally fused.
-Output Outputs are capable of providing high currents for short periods of time for inductive load startup or switching.
Fusing may be required for wire/loads if 2x Nominal O/P current rating cannot be tolerated. Continuous current overload allows for reliable fuse tripping.
Mounting Simple snap-on system for DIN Rail TS35/7.5 or TS35/15 or chassis-mounted (optional screw mounting set SDN-PMBRK2 required).
Connections Input: IP20-rated screw terminals, connector size range: 16-10 AWG (1.5-6 mm2) for solid conductors. 16-12 AWG (0.5-4 mm2) for flexible conductors. Output: Two connec-
tors per output, connector size range: 16-10 AWG (1.5-6 mm2) for solid conductors.5
Case Fully enclosed metal housing with fine ventilation grid to keep out small parts.
-Free Space 25 mm above and below, 25 mm left and right, 15 mm in front 70 mm above and below, 25 mm left and right , 15 mm in front
HxWxD 4.88 in. x 2.91 in. x 4.55 in. 4.88 in. x 3.5 in. x 4.55 in. 4.88 in. x 5.9 in. x 4.55 in. 4.88 in. x 9.72 in. x 4.55 in. 4.88 in. x 11.1 in. x 4.55 in.
(inches/mm) (124 mm x 73 mm x 116 mm) (124 mm x 89 mm x 116 mm) (124 mm x 150 mm x 116 mm) (124 mm x 247 mm x 116 mm) (124 mm x 282 mmx 116 mm)
Weight (lbs/g) 1.7 lbs (730g) 2.16 lbs (980g) 3.97 lbs (1800g) 4 lbs (2000g) 6.6 lbs (3300g)
1
For the SDN 20-24-480C, single phase input is permissable, but output is derated to 75% (15 Amps @ 24 VDC).
2
Input current ratings are conservatively specified with low input, worst case efficiency and power factor.
3
Losses are heat dissipation in watts at full load, nominal input line.
4
Ripple/noise is stated as typical values when measured with a 20 MHz, bandwidth scope and 50 Ohm resistor.
5
For the SDN 40-24-480, output: one (+) two (-) connectors, size range 16-5 AWG (1.5016 mm2) solid conductor.

4 Power Supplies
SDN™ Series Dimensions
W D
Dimensions - inches (mm)

+ +
24 VDC / 2.5 A
- -
OK
Catalog Number
OK
NEC Class 2
H W D
Power Supply
24-28 V
Single
SDN 2.5-24-100P 4.88 (124) 1.97 (50) 4.55 (116)
Parallel
SDN 4-24-100LP 4.88 (124) 2.56 (65) 4.55 (116)
S O LA SDN 5-24-100P 4.88 (124) 2.56 (65) 4.55 (116)
H
Power Supply
SDN 2.5-24-100P
SDN 5-24-480 4.88 (124) 2.91 (73) 4.55 (116)
C
U
L
).$ #/.4 %1
(!
US LISTED
SDN 10-24-100P 4.88 (124) 3.26 (83) 4.55 (116)
115/230 VAC 1.3-0.7 A 50/60 HZ
N L
W D
S O LA
Power Supply
SDN 20-24-480C
H
).$ #/.4 %1
U (!
C L US LISTED
Input: Output:
3PH 380/500 VAC 24 VDC / 20 A
Continuous Mode
1.7/1.5A/Phase 50/60 Hz
Reset fuse mode
Electronically protected
Parallel Use
L1 L2 L3 + + - -
Fuse Mode
Single Use
24-
Overload
28V
OK
Dimensions - inches (mm)

Catalog Number
H W D
SDN 20-24-100P 4.88 (124) 6.88 (175) 4.55 (116)
SDN 10-24-480 4.88 (124) 3.50 (89) 4.55 (116)
SDN 20-24-480C 4.88 (124) 5.90 (150) 4.55 (116)
SDN 30-24-480 4.88 (124) 9.72 (247) 4.55 (116)
SDN 40-24-480 4.88 (124) 11.10 (282) 4.55 (116)


Power Supplies 4
SDN™ Series Mounting
DIN Rail Mounting

Snap on the DIN Rail:
1. Tilt unit slightly backwards
2. Put it onto the DIN Rail
3. Push downwards until stopped
4. Push at the lower front edge to lock
5. Shake the unit slightly to ensure that the retainer
has locked
Alternative Panel Mount: Using the optional SDN-PMBRK2

accessory, the unit can be screw mounted to a panel.
Detachment from DIN Rail:
Press button downwards (to unlock) and remove the unit

from the DIN Rail.
Chassis Mounting Dimensions

Instead of snapping a Sola SDN™ unit on the DIN Rail,
you can also attach it using the screw mounting set
SDN-PMBRK2.
This set consists of two metal brackets, which replace the

existing two aluminum profiles.

NOV PART NO.:

10044673-001

4 Power Supplies
SDN™ Series Redundant Options

The SDN Series standard options allow for operation in a
wide variety of applications. With the addition of an exter-
nal redundancy module, the SDN can also be used for true
redundant operation including 2N and N+x configurations.
All SDN units include built in current sharing for parallel and
redundant operation. All models ending in P also include
a DC OK status relay contact. The external modules
SDN 2.5-20RED and SDN 30/40RED increase the reliability
by isolating the supplies and adding more signal options.
Paralleling for increased power does not require the use of
these modules.
Module Compatibility
EMC and
Two separate modules are available to provide the maximum Low Volt.
Directive
flexibility in size, cost and signaling capability. Refer to the
chart below for information on which module can be used for
each SDN power supply.
Features
Power Rating – A simple Yes or No indication that this module • DC OK Relay Contact
can or cannot handle the power rating of that power supply. • True Isolation
• High availability
Input/Output Signals – Yes indicates that each power supply
• SDN features and quality
would have an independent relay contact to provide power
supply status, and the DC bus output from the redundant
Applications
module has it’s own DC OK relay contact. Output only
indicates that only the output of the redundant module • Process Control
would have a DC OK relay contact. • Remote Location
• Critical Production
Redundancy Module Compatibility Chart
Single Phase SDN Series

SDN 2.5-24-100P* SDN 4-24-100P* SDN 5-24-100P SDN 10-24-100P SDN 20-24-100P
Power Rating Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SDN 2.5-20RED
Input / Output Signals Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SDN 30/40RED
Three Phase SDN Series
SDN 5-24-480 SDN 10-24-480 SDN 20-24-480 SDN 30-24-480 SDN 40-24-480
Power Rating Yes Yes Yes No No
SDN 2.5-20RED
Input / Output Signals Output Only Output Only Output Only N/A N/A
SDN 30/40RED
* Paralleling will violate Class 2 current limits.
114
Power Supplies 4
SDN™ Redundant Series Specifications for SDN2.5-20RED and SDN 30/40RED
Catalog Number
Description SDN 2.5-20RED SDN 30/40RED
Concept
By means of a separate redundancy module, you can interconnect several identical SDN power supply units in a N+1 redundant mode. These external
modules decouple the power supply outputs from each other so that, in case of failure, one power supply unit cannot overload the other units. The
modules incorporate DC OK relay contacts. The switch on front of the SDN power supply should be placed in parallel mode (not single mode) when
power supplies are used with redundant module.
Electrical Characteristics
Voltage
-Nominal Value 24 Vdc
-Max. Rated 35 V
Voltage Drop
-Vin -> Vout Typ. 0.6 V
Current Handling Capacity
-Maximum Value 20 A 40 A
Inverse Battery Protection Yes
Connection Via captive screw terminals

Solid: 16-10 AWG (1.5 - 6 mm2) Solid: 16-5 AWG (1.5 - 16 mm2)
Stranded: 16-12 AWG (1.5 - 4 mm2) Stranded: 16-8 AWG (1.5 - 10 mm2)
-Connector size range
Note: GND must be connected to module for voltage monitor to operate properly.
See Connectors and Wiring diagrams on next page.
Relay Contacts
(1) Vout “OK” - N.O. Contact
DC Okay Contacts (qty) description (1) Vout “OK” - N.O. & N.C. Contact
(2) Vin “OK” - N.O. Contact
-Voltage Set Point > 18 Vdc ±5%
-Contact Rating 30 Vdc @ 2A / 250 V @ 2A
DC OK LED Vout “OK” Green LED
-Voltage Set Point > 18 Vdc ±5%

Dimensions
4.88 in x 1.97 in x 4.55 in 4.88 in x 2.56 in x 4.55 in
H x W x D - inches (mm) (124 mm x 50 mm x 116 mm) (124 mm x 65 mm x 116 mm)
Free Space for Ventilation - Above/Below: 0.39 in. (10 mm) recommended
inches (mm) Left/Right: 0.39 in. (10 mm) recommended
Weight lbs (kg) 1.38 (625) 1.43 (646)
General
Storage: -25°C...+85°C Operation: -10°C...+60°C full power with operation to 70°C possible with a
linear derating to half power from 60°C to 70°C (Convection cooling, no forced air required). Operation up
Ambient Temperature to 50% load permissible with sideways or front side up mounting orientation. The relative humidity is
< 90% RH, noncondensing.
115
4 Power Supplies
Wiring Diagram for SDN 2.5-20RED
Single Single
Parallel Parallel
Notes:
1. The Common (marked “COM -“) connection to the module is required for voltage monitoring (DC OK Contacts), and is not meant to be
part of the current path from the power supply to the load.
2. Protective earth connection only provides protective ground to the metal case of the module. This connection is isolated from the
positive and common connections.
116
NOV PART NO.:

10045083-001

Printed By: parambahk 10045083-001
Printed On: 2016-07-31 01:11:56 GMT-0500
cir Min
cu ia
S200-K, 480Y/277 VAC it b tur
S2 rea e
Supplemental protectors 00 ke
r s
UL 1077, CSA 22.2, No. 235
K
No. of Rated No. of Rated
Catalog number Catalog number
poles current poles current
0.5 S201-K0.5   0.5 S203-K0.5
1 S201-K1  1 S203-K1
1.6 S201-K1.6 1.6 S203-K1.6
2 S201-K2 2 S203-K2
3 S201-K3 3 S203-K3
4 S201-K4 4 S203-K4
5 S201-K5 5 S203-K5
6 S201-K6 6 S203-K6
1 8
10
S201-K8
S201-K10 10
8 S203-K8
S203-K10
  13 S201-K13 3 13 S203-K13
  15 S201-K15 15 S203-K15
16 S201-K16 16 S203-K16
S201-K 20 S201-K20 20 S203-K20
25 S201-K25 25 S203-K25
32 S201-K32 32 S203-K32
40 S201-K40 40 S203-K40
50 S201-K50 50 S203-K50
60 S201-K60 60 S203-K60
63 S201-K63 63 S203-K63
0.5 S201-K0.5NA   0.5 S203-K0.5NA
1 S201-K1NA  1 S203-K1NA
1.6 S201-K1.6NA   1.6 S203-K1.6NA
2 S201-K2NA  2 S203-K2NA
3 S201-K3NA  3 S203-K3NA
S202-K 4 S201-K4NA 4 S203-K4NA
1 6 S201-K6NA 3 6 S203-K6NA
 8 S201-K8NA 8 S203-K8NA
+ 10 S201-K10NA + 10 S203-K10NA
NA 13 S201-K13NA NA 13 S203-K13NA
16 S201-K16NA   16 S203-K16NA
20 S201-K20NA 20 S203-K20NA
25 S201-K25NA 25 S203-K25NA
32 S201-K32NA 32 S203-K32NA
40 S201-K40NA 40 S203-K40NA
50 S201-K50NA 50 S203-K50NA
63 S201-K63NA 63 S203-K63NA
0.5 S202-K0.5 0.5 S204-K0.5
S203-K 1 S202-K1  1 S204-K1
1.6 S202-K1.6   1.6 S204-K1.6
2 S202-K2  2 S204-K2
3 S202-K3  3 S204-K3
4 S202-K4  4 S204-K4
5 S202-K5 5 S204-K5
6 S202-K6  6 S204-K6
8 S202-K8  8 S204-K8
2 10 S202-K10
4 10 S204-K10 15
13 S202-K13 13 S204-K13
15 S202-K15 15 S204-K15
16 S202-K16 16 S204-K16
20 S202-K20 20 S204-K20
S204-K 25 S202-K25 25 S204-K25
32 S202-K32 32 S204-K32
40 S202-K40 40 S204-K40
50 S202-K50 50 S204-K50
60 S202-K60 60 S204-K60
63 S202-K63 63 S204-K63
Tripping characteristic K
UL 1077
480Y/277 VAC
6 kA
S201-KNA Inductive loads
• K Curve
• Designed for allowing higher in-rush
currents during system start up
• Example: motors, transformers
Accessories & technical data
Accessories – See page 15.31 - 15.34
Technical data – See page 15.35 - 15.36
S203-KNA
Note: Switching neutral is noted by “NA” in the catalog
number.
Low Voltage Products & Systems 15.21

ABB Inc. • 888-385-1221 • www.abb.us/lowvoltage 1SXU000023C0202 Rev. A


Revision 01
Page 7 of 7
4 METERS

10547585-001 METER ANALOG_Main Hydraulic Supply The Meter Shop
10547586-001 METER ANALOG_Hyd Cathead Makeup/Breakout The Meter Shop
10547487-001 METER A._ Disc Brake Hyd Supply The Meter Shop
11405050-001 METER-ANALOG_DS Supply The Meter Shop
11405052-001 METER ANALOG_DS Service Caliper The Meter Shop
11405051-001 METER ANALOG_ODS Supply The Meter Shop
11405053-001 METER ANALOG_ODS Service Caliper The Meter Shop
10547488-001 METER ANALOG_Emergency Caliper The Meter Shop
10547502-001 METER ANALOG_DW Low Clutch The Meter Shop
10547503-001 METER ANALOG_DW High Clutch The Meter Shop
10547492-001 METER ANALOG_RT Inertia Brake The Meter Shop
10547490-001 METER ANALOG_DW Inertia Brake The Meter Shop
10547584-001 METER ANALOG_DW Air Supply The Meter Shop
10547500-001 METER ANALOG_DW Lube Oil The Meter Shop
10547583-001 METER A._DW Brake Cooling Water The Meter Shop
www.nov.com

NOV PART NO.:

10547585-001

TMS 10023
Meter:
Manufacturer : DEIF A/S
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIN 96x96mm SQUARE, 240 DEGREE POINTER DEFLECTION, NON-IS, IP54
(ADDITIONAL RUBBER GASKET SUPPLIED BY METERSHOP), OPERATING TEMPERATURE
-25 +60 DEG C, 0/4-20mA DC FOR FULL SCALE MEASURING RANGE,REVERSE POLARITY
PROTECTION WITH DIODE 1N4005 FITTED INTERNALLY.
DIAL DETAILS:
MANUFACTURER : METER SHOP
MODEL : MC08716
NOV COLORED LOGO, LOCATION TOP CENTER
TITLE: Main Hyd Supply, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
OUTER SCALE: 0-3000, OUTER UNIT: PSI
INNER SCALE: 0-207, INNER UNIT: Bar
TIMES NEW ROMANS FONT TO BE USED.
LENS/COVER DETAIL:
POLYCARBONATE LEXAN®, TENSILE STRENGTH 9000 PSI, CONT TEMP 180̊F, UV

RESISTANT, ABRASION RESISTANT, NATURALLY TRANSPARENT, HIGH IMPACT
STRENGTH, WITH ANTI STATIC COATING AND ANTI GLARE PROPERTIES.

NOV PART NO.:

10547586-001

TMS 10024
Meter:
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIN 96x96mm SQUARE, 240 DEGREE POINTER DEFLECTION, NON-IS, IP54, SHOCK
50g2PLANE VIB 50g3PLANE, OPERATING TEMPERATURE -20 +60 DEG C, 0/4-20mA DC
FOR FULL SCALE MEASURING RANGE,REVERSE POLARITY PROTECTION WITH DIODE
1N4005 FITTED INTERNALLY.
DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL : MC08726
TITLE: Cathead Makeup/Breakout, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

10547487-001

TMS 10012
Meter:
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL : MC08930
TITLE: Disc Brake Hyd Supply, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
INNER SCALE:0-138, INNER UNIT:Bar
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

11405050-001

11405050-001
TMS 10043
Meter:
Manufacturer: DEIF A/S
Model: DQ96‐C
Specification:

-25 to +60 DEG C, 0/4-20mA DC FOR FULL SCALE MEASURING RANGE, REVERSE POLARITY
DIAL DETAILS:
MANUFACTURER: METER SHOP
MODEL: MC07825
TITLE: DS Supply, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

11405052-001

11405052-001
TMS 10045
Meter:
Model: DQ96‐C
Specification:

DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL: MC07825
TITLE: DS Service Caliper, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

11405051-001

11405051-001
TMS 10044
Meter:
Model: DQ96‐C
Specification:

DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL: MC07825
TITLE: ODS Supply, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

11405053-001

TMS 10046

Meter:
Model: DQ96‐C
Specification:

DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL: MC07825
TITLE: ODS Service Caliper, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

10547488-001

TMS 10013
Meter:
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL : 07829
TITLE: Emergency Caliper, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
INNER SCALE:0-138, INNER UNIT:Bar
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

10547502-001

TMS 10017
Meter:
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL : MC07826
TITLE: DW Low Clutch, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

10547503-001

TMS 10018
Meter:
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL : MC07828
TITLE: DW High Clutch, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

10547492-001

TMS 10015
Meter:
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL : MC08715
TITLE: RT Inertia Brake, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

10547490-001

TMS 10014
Meter:
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL : MC08717
TITLE: DW Inertia Brake, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

10547484-001

TMS 10022
Meter:
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL : MC07827
TITLE: DW Air Supply, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

10547500-001

TMS 10016
Meter:
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL : MC07733
TITLE: DW Lube Oil, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:


NOV PART NO.:

10547583-001

TMS 10021
Meter:
Model : DQ96‐C
Specification:
DIAL DETAILS:
MODEL : MC07731
TITLE: DW Brake Cooling Water, LOCATION BOTTOM CENTER
LENS/COVER DETAIL:



Technical Document
Hazardous Area Certificates –
Drawworks Controls

information which belongs to National-Oilwell Varco, L.P., Rig Solutions - Western Hemisphere
REMARKS its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively referred to
hereinafter as "NOV"). It is loaned for limited purposes 11000 Corporate Centre Drive
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE only and remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in Suite 200
whole or in part or use of this design or distribution of this Houston, Texas 77041 USA
information to others is not permitted without the express
CLIENT PO NUMBER written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned Phone 281 854 0400
to NOV upon request and in any event upon completion of Fax 281 854 0607
the use for which it was loaned. This document and the
information contained and represented herein is the
copyrighted property of NOV.
 National Oilwell Varco
16595471-DOS 01
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 2 of 5
REVISION HISTORY
01 12.02.2016 For Information CIG BKF BKF

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 Initial Release
www.nov.com


Revision 01
Page 3 of 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 BARRIER / ISOLATOR ..................................................................................................... 4

2 JUNCTION BOXES / GLANDS......................................................................................... 5
www.nov.com



Revision 01
Page 4 of 5
1 BARRIER / ISOLATOR
Description NOV Part No. Cert. Code Cert. No. Permitted Use
& Manufacturer No.
BARRIER-IS 2 10504654-001 II (1) G D EEx ia IIC PTB 00 ATEX Output Zone
SW IN,2 RELAY KFD2-SR2-Ex2.W 2080 0, 1, 2
OUT
BARRIER-IS 10066430-001 II (1) G D EEx ia IIC TUV 99 ATEX Output Zone
FREQUENCY/CU KFD2-UFC-Ex1.D 1471 0, 1, 2
R,W/LCD
www.nov.com

NOV PART NO.:

10504654-001
CERTIFICATE NO.:
PTB 00 ATEX
2080




NOV PART NO.:

10066430-001
CERTIFICATE NO.:
TUV 99 ATEX
1471




Revision 01
Page 5 of 5
2 JUNCTION BOXES / GLANDS
Description NOV Part No. Cert. Code Cert. No. Permitted Use
& Manufacturer No.
Junction Box, 10053340-001 II 2 G D EEx ia Sira Output Zone
Assembly BPG8 II T6 99ATEX3173 0, 1, 2
Cable Gland 10057555-001 II 2GD Ex d IIC Baseefa 06 Output Zone
501/421/0/M20 ATEX 0056X 1, 2
www.nov.com

NOV PART NO.:

10053340-001
CERTIFICATE NO.:
SIRA
99ATEX3173

CERTIFICATION
1 EC TYPE-EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE
2 Equipment intended for use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Directive 94/9/EC
3 Certificate Number: Sira 99ATEX3173 Issue: 8
4 Equipment: BPG Range of Junction Boxes
5 Applicant: ABTECH Limited
6 Address: Sanderson Street
Lower Don Valley
Sheffield S9 2UA
UK
7 This equipment and any acceptable variation thereto is specified in the schedule to this certificate and
the documents therein referred to.
8 Sira Certification Service, notified body number 0518 in accordance with Article 9 of Directive 94/9/EC
of 23 March 1994, certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and
Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment intended for use in
potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to the Directive.
The examination and test results are recorded in the confidential reports listed in Section 14.2.
9 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements, with the exception of those listed in the
schedule to this certificate, has been assured by compliance with the following documents:
IEC 60079-0:2011 EN 60079-7:2007 EN 60079-11:2012 EN 60079-31:2009
10 If the sign ‘X’ is placed after the certificate number, it indicates that the equipment is subject to special
conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate.
11 This EC type-examination certificate relates only to the design and construction of the specified
equipment. If applicable, further requirements of this Directive apply to the manufacture and supply of
this equipment.
12 The marking of the equipment shall include the following:
II 2 G D
Ex e IIC T6 Gb (Ta = -65°C to +40°C, +55°C, +60°C or +65°C)
Ex e IIC T4 Gb (Ta = -65°C to +90°C)
Ex ib IIC T6 Gb (Ta = -65°C to +40°C, +55°C, +60°C or +65°C)
Ex ib IIC T4 Gb (Ta = -65°C to +90°C)
Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db (Ta = -65°C to +40°C, +55°C, +60°C or +65°C)
Ex tb IIIC T100°C Db (Ta = -65°C to +90°C)
(Temperature class, marking for dust and Ta maximum depends upon the maximum power dissipation, refer to Annexe)
Project Number 25164 C Ellaby

Deputy Certification Manager
This certificate and its schedules may only be
reproduced in its entirety and without change.
Sira Certification Service
Rake Lane, Eccleston, Chester, CH4 9JN, England
Page 1 of 5
Form 9400 Issue 1 Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Email: info@siracertification.com
Web: www.siracertification.com
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE
EC TYPE-EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Sira 99ATEX3173

Issue 8
13 DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT
The BPG range of junction boxes utilises a BPG enclosure covered by certificate number
Sira 99ATEX3172U and are fitted with an arrangement of suitably certified terminals.
BPG ref. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13.5 14 15
Length 80 110 160 190 230 122 220 160 260 360 560 255 400 400 600 400
Width 75 75 75 75 75 120 120 160 160 160 160 250 250 250 250 405
Height 55 55 55 55 55 90 90 90 90 90 90 120 120 160 120 120
(All dimensions are in mm)
Before the Junction Box is installed, its total dissipated power for the particular application will be calculated
in accordance with EN 60079-7:2003, Annex E, E.2 and will not exceed the values given in the table below:
BPG ref. Maximum Power Dissipation (W)
T6/T85°C T6/T85°C T6/T85°C T6/T85°C T4/T100°C
Ta +40°C Ta +55°C Ta +60°C Ta +65°C Ta +90°C
(max) (max) (max) (max) (max)
1 8.390 2.23 1.73 1.45 8.390
2 8.551 2.00 1.70 1.45 8.551
3 8.833 2.00 1.70 1.45 8.833
4 9.012 2.07 1.80 1.29 9.012
5 9.260 2.00 1.70 1.10 9.260
6 9.378 2.00 1.70 1.45 9.378
7 10.500 2.30 1.70 1.10 10.500
8 10.348 2.00 1.70 1.10 10.348
9 11.933 2.30 1.70 1.10 11.933
10 13.793 4.50 3.29 2.10 13.793
11 18.338 6.68 5.20 4.00 18.338
12 15.474 2.30 1.70 1.10 15.474
13 20.867 5.20 4.00 3.00 20.867
13.5 20.867 5.20 4.00 3.00 20.867
14 30.384 7.97 6.59 4.79 30.384
15 31.350 8.26 6.00 4.40 31.350
Junction boxes of size not specified in the table may be manufactured subject to the maximum
dissipated power being based on a smaller enclosure.
Variation 1 - This variation introduced the following changes:
i. The BPG range of junction boxes were permitted to have alternative power dissipation ratings that
enable them to be used in an upper ambient temperature of either +40°C or +55°C or +60°C or
+65°C, the associated ratings and markings were recognised.
i. The recognition of a minor revision of the information marked on the label.
i. When certified, intrinsically safe terminals are used, alternative marking, ‘ia’ and ‘ib’, was recognised.
reproduced in its entirety and without change. Sira Certification Service
Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 2 of 5
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue1
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 8

i. The BPG 13.5 junction box covered by certificate number Sira 99ATEX3172U was added to the range.
i. The option to fit slotted trunking inside the Junction Boxes, this trunking may be sited as required.
The instructions were modified to recognise additional restrictions associated with this change and
a new Condition of Manufacture was introduced.
ii. The recognition of minor drawing modifications including the introduction of a new company logo;
these amendments are administrative or involve changes to the design that do not affect the
aspects of the product that are relevant to explosion safety.
i. Following appropriate re-assessment to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the
EN 60079 series of standards, the documents previously listed in section 9, EN 50 014:1997
(amendments A1 to A2), EN 50 019:1994, EN 50020:2002 and EN 50281-1-1:1998, were replaced
by those currently listed. As part of this change, the markings in section 12 were updated
accordingly and the ‘ia’ marking previously included as Variation 1 (dated 30 March 2005) was
removed.
ii. The Condition of Certification that defined the ambient temperature range of specific types of
gackets was removed because only silicone rubber gaskets are now used in the construction of
these Junction Boxes.
iii. It was recognised that a new procedure for selecting terminals has been adopted by the
manufacturer; this allows the terminals to be chosen from an Approved Component Document,
Sira 12AC087, that is issued and controlled by Sira. The relevant Condition of Certification was
amended to recognise this change.
iv. The recognition of drawing modifications required for use with other certification associated with
these products.
v. The Condition of Certification dealing with power dissipation was modified.
vi. A Condition of Certification that requires the manufacturer to monitor the status of previously
certified devices was added.
14 DESCRIPTIVE DOCUMENTS
14.1 Drawings
Refer to Certificate Annexe.
14.2 Associated Sira Reports and Certificate History
Issue Date Report/File no. Comment
0 19 January 2000 R51X6055E The release of the prime certificate.
1 25 May 2001 R51A6746A The introduction of Variation 1.
2 28 September 2001 53V7936 The introduction of Variation 2.
3 23 July 2002 R53A9009A The prime certificate was re-issued to permit the following:
• The incorporation of previous variations 1 and 2.
• The lower ambient temperature range was confirmed
as –65°C.
• The introduction of the changes included in Sira report
number R53A9009A.
Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 3 of 5
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue1
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 8
Issue Date Report/File no. Comment

4 30 March 2005 R53V10438A The introduction of Variation 3.
5 10 March 2008 R51A17881A This Issue covers the following changes:
• All previously issued certification was rationalised into
a single certificate, Issue 5, Issues 0 to 4 referenced
above are only intended to reflect the history of the
previous certification and have not been issued as
documents in this format.
• The change of the Applicant’s name, first recognised
31 January 2007, was re-confirmed.
• The introduction of Variation 4.
6 03 April 2012 R26585A/00 The introduction of Variation 5.
7 11 June 2012 R26585A/01 Report R26585A/01 replaced report R26585A/00.
8 24 October 2012 R25164A/00 This Issue covers the following changes:
• The introduction of Variation 6.
• Because this certificate was re-issued, some
Variations 1 and 2 were duplicated, this has been
clarified and reflected in the certificate history; no
technical changes were involved.
15 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE (denoted by X after the certificate number)
None
16 ESSENTIAL HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS OF ANNEX II (EHSRs)
The relevant EHSRs that are not addressed by the standards listed in this certificate have been
identified and individually assessed in the reports listed in Section 14.2.
17 CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION
17.1 The use of this certificate is subject to the Regulations Applicable to Holders of Sira Certificates.
17.2 Holders of EC type-examination certificates are required to comply with the production control
requirements defined in Article 8 of directive 94/9/EC.
17.3 When the manufacturer has equipped the junction boxes with terminals, a routine electric strength test
shall be carried out only if the components are wired. This test shall be carried out according to the
following standards:
- industrial control equipment: EN 60947 - measurement, control and laboratory use: EN 61010

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 4 of 5
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue1
CERTIFICATION
SCHEDULE

Issue 8
17.3 The terminals used in these Junction Boxes will be ATEX approved devices chosen from the Approved
Component Document number Sira 12AC087 that is issued by Sira. All terminals will be installed in
accordance with their certificate conditions and the relevant codes of practice/wiring regulations paying
particular attention to the following:
• The maximum service temperature range.
• The minimum creepage and clearance distances shall be maintained.
• The rated voltages and currents may vary if cross-connection facilities are used.
• The reduction in rating of adjacent terminals shall be observed, where applicable.
The terminals fitted into the junction boxes shall also conform to the following requirements:
Temperature class/ Requirement
Dust marking
T6/T85°C The terminals shall have an insulation limiting temperature of 100°C minimum
T4/T100°C The terminals shall be ceramic
17.5 Suitably certified Ex e equipment such as breathing devices and blanks may be fitted to the enclosure
providing the enclosure maintains compliance with BS EN 60529 code IP64 or better.
17.6 The manufacturer will take all reasonable steps to ensure that the power dissipated by the Junction Box
does not exceed the maximum value stipulated in the table detailed in the Description of Equipment, in
addition, the manufacturer will supply all the relevant information that will enable the user/installer to
calculate the dissipated power in Watts for each Junction Box in accordance with EN 60079-7 Annex E, E2.
17.8 When the junction boxes are used for intrinsically safe applications, a 3 mm separation distance
between the enclosure is required, there shall also be a minimum of 6 mm between different
intrinsically safe circuits.
17.9 When trunking is fitted, it may be sited as required and the minimum creepage and clearance distances
shall still be met.
17.10 The products covered by this certificate incorporate previously certified devices, it is therefore the
responsibility of the manufacturer to continually monitor the status of the certification associated with
these devices, and the manufacturer will inform Sira of any modifications of the devices that may
impinge upon the explosion safety design of their products.

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 5 of 5
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue1
Certificate Annexe
Certificate Number: Sira 99ATEX3173
Equipment: BPG Range of Junction Boxes
Applicant: ABTECH Limited
CERTIFICATION
Issue 0 to 2: The drawings associated with these Issues were rationalised by those listed in Issue 3.
Issue 3
Number Sheet Rev. Date Description
ABT 10260 1 of 1 C 25 Jun 02 External Label (BPG)
ABT 10304 1 of 1 A 16 Nov 99 BPG Manufacturing Specification
Issue 4
Number Sheet Rev. Date Description
ABT 14842 1 of 1 - 01 Feb 05 BPG Range EEx ia Label
ABT 14845 1 of 1 - 01 Feb 05 BPG Range EEx ib Label
Issue 5: No new drawings were introduced.
Issue 6
Drawing Sheets Rev. Date (Sira Stamp) Title
ABT 10260 1 of 1 D 30 Mar 12 BPG External label – Junction Boxes
ABT 10304 1 of 1 B 30 Mar 12 BPG Manufacturing specification
ABT 14842 1 of 1 B 30 Mar 12 BPG Range EEx ia Label
ABT 14845 1 of 1 B 30 Mar 12 BPG Range EEx ib Label
Issue 7 (No new drawings were introduced.)
Issue 8
Drawing Sheets Rev. Date (Sira Stamp) Title
ABT 10260 1 of 1 E 30 Sep 12 BPG Nameplate – Junction Box
ABT 10304 1 of 1 C 30 Sep 12 BPG Manufacturing specification
ABT 10305 1 of 1 C 30 Sep 12 BPG Range of Enclosures

Tel: +44 (0) 1244 670900
Page 1 of 1
Fax: +44 (0) 1244 681330
Form 9400 Issue 1
ABTQ-34 rev 10
Last review: 21 Jul 12
INSTALLATION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR
ABTECH ‘BPG’ Range Enclosures – SIRA99ATEX3173
Marking
The marking shown is for an apparatus certified
terminal box.
TYPE BPG RATING W The maximum power dissipation permitted in this
SERIAL No 20
terminal box is marked on the label and identified by
Ex e IIC T Gb Ex tb IIIC T °C Db
RATING________WATTS.
Tamb - °C to + °C The ambient temperature range for which this
II 2 GD - IP6 ! product is suitable is marked on the label and
SIRA99ATEX3173 identified by Tamb_____.
DO NOT OPEN WHEN AN EXPLOSIVE
ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT. The Ex e marking may be replaced by Ex ia or Ex ib.
WARNING !!! Enclosures marked Ex ia or Ex ib may only be used
LIVE TERMINALS! ISOLATE ELSWHERE for terminating intrinsically safe circuits.
BEFORE OPENING ENCLOSURE
STATIC HAZARD! When the box is black it is anti-static and the
CLEAN ONLY WITH A DAMP CLOTH. ‘STATIC HAZARD’ warning will be missing.
Alternative markings for temperature ratings as follows.

T6 with Ta range of -60oC ≤ Ta ≤ +55oC and T85oC for dust
Warning – Cable temperature can reach 85oC
Note
The ambient temperature range identified on the certification label refers to the enclosure and the terminals
fitted within. It does not necessarily refer to the permitted temperature range of any cable entry devices that may
be fitted. The user must check that the cable entry devices fitted are suitable for the lowest ambient temperature
marked on the certification label and for the maximum permitted operating temperature (T6 shown, may be T4).
The IP rating identified on the certification label refers only to the enclosure. The user must ensure that the
cable entry devices fitted provide an equivalent degree of protection when installed with their manufacturer’s
instructions.
Installation
These instructions assume that the required cable entries have been pre-drilled. Cable entries may be
threaded.
1) Using the mounting dimensions data provided, either in the product catalogue data sheets or on the
drawings supplied, (as part of the project documentation), mark out the positions for the mounting holes on
the surface where installation is required.
2) Drill the mounting holes for M4 fixing studs (for size BPG1 to BPG5) or for M6 fixing studs (for size BPG6 to
BPG15) as applicable.
3) Tap thread into mounting holes if required.
4) Place a mounting screw through one mounting hole in the box so that the thread of the screw protrudes
from the back of the box. Lift the box into place, using such assistance as may be necessary to avoid
personal injury and:-
a) If clearance mounting holes are used, insert the protruding thread through the appropriate clearance
hole and secure with a nut on the other side of the mounting surface.
Or
b) If threaded holes are used, locate the end of the mounting screw over the threaded hole and, using an
appropriate screwdriver tighten the screw.
1/3
A B Controls & Technology
Sanderson Street, Lower Don Valley, Sheffield S9 2UA
ABTQ-34 rev 10
5) Rotate the box to line up the remaining mountings and repeat (4) above until all mounting screws have
been fitted.
6) Install and secure the cable entry devices, cable glands and blanking plugs in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Ensure that the torque applied during the installation of these devices does not
exceed 20 Nm.
7) Pull the cables into the box, leaving trailing leads of a length specified by site practice or the site engineer
and secure any cable armour in accordance with site practice.
8) Where slotted trunking has been supplied (solid trunking is not permitted) ensure that it is suitable for the
proposed T classification of the final certified product. Where the T6 is the proposed rating and no windows
are fitted any polymeric or metallic slotted trunking may be used. For other T classifications and where a
window is fitted metallic slotted trunking must be used. Trunking may be mounted in any orientation in the
box, vertically, horizontally or diagonally.
9) When laying cables into trunking; No more than 50% of the trunking internal area shall be occupied by
conductors, when instrumentation currents of 1A or less are carried. All cabling used must be capable of
carrying a minimum of 3A.
10) For cables carrying more than 1A - No more than 25% of the trunking internal area shall be occupied by
conductors, these shall be de-rated to a maximum of 4A /sq mm. All cabling used must be capable of
carrying a minimum of 10% higher current than the rating required.
11) No more than 50% of the trunking internal area shall be occupied by conductors, when instrumentation
currents of 1A or less are carried. All cabling used must be capable of carrying a minimum of 3A.
12) For cables carrying more than 1A - No more than 25% of the trunking internal area shall be occupied by
conductors, these shall be de-rated to a maximum of 4A /sq mm. All cabling used must be capable of
carrying a minimum of 10% higher current than the rating required.
13) Terminate the cables in the terminals provided in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 60079-14.
Consideration must be given to any use limitations or special conditions detailed on the certificates for the
terminals fitted.
14) Secure the lid by closing the lid and tightening the lid fixing screws.
NOTE: If the terminals provided with the enclosure are changed either in type or in quantity the terminal box
certification may become invalid. Advice from ABTECH is recommended before any changes are made.
Earthing/Grounding
The enclosure may be provided with an external earth/ground connection. If such a connection is provided it
must be connected to the appropriate earth bonding circuit before electrical power is connected to the contents
of the enclosure.
When the box is provided with an internal earth continuity plate any metal cable glands must be secured using a
vibration resistant washer and a locknut.
Operation
1. The lid must be secured using all of the lid screws provided in order to maintain the IP rating.
2. No attempt must be made to remove the enclosure lid whilst electrical power is connected to the contents of
the enclosure.
3. If the enclosure if fitted with an external earth/ground facility it must be connected to the earth bonding
circuit at all times when power is connected to the enclosure contents.
Maintenance
Routine maintenance is likely to be a requirement of local Health and Safety legislation. The laws of the
applicable country must be considered and maintenance checks carried out accordingly
Additional periodic checks that are advisable to ensure the efficiency of ABTECH range enclosures are:-
Activity Frequency
1 Check that the lid seal is in place and not damaged Each time the enclosure is opened
2 Check that all lid fixing screws are in place and secured Each time the enclosure is closed
3 Check that the mounting bolts are tight and free of corrosion Every 3 years
4 Check the security of all cable glands and entry devices Every 3 years
5 Check that all screw clamp terminals are secure As manufacturers
recommendations
6 Check enclosure for damage Every 3 years
2/3
ABTQ-34 rev 10
Chemical attack
The ABTECH BPG range of enclosures are manufactured using the following materials:-glass reinforced
polyester resin, (with or without carbon loading),
neoprene or silicone rubber,
316 stainless steel
Brass
Consideration should be given to the environment in which these enclosures are to be used to determine the
suitability of these materials to withstand any corrosive agents that may be present.
Static hazard
Glass reinforced polyester resin has a surface resistance greater than 10E9 Ohms. They can present a hazard
from static electricity and may not be cleaned except with a damp cloth.
Carbon loaded glass reinforced, identified by the suffix ‘C’, (e.g. BPGC9), have a surface resistance between
10E6 and 10E9 Ohms. They do not present a hazard from static electricity.
Vibration
BPG range terminal boxes are designed for use in areas subject to normal industrial levels of vibration. They
are not designed for use in areas subject to intentional or extreme conditions of vibration.
Protection From Foreseeable Faults

Circuits connected in the enclosure must be externally protected using suitable circuit interruption devices to
prevent overloading. Provided the enclosure is correctly installed, there should be no foreseeable faults.
3/3
NOV PART NO.:

10057555-001
CERTIFICATE NO.:
BASEEFA 06
ATEX0056X

















TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 02
Page: 1

Section
1 3.4 Performance Data

(Section Not Applicable)
www.nov.com


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
1 4 Vendor Documentation
(Chapter Not Applicable)
www.nov.com

National Oilwell Varco Brands
Advanced Wirecloth Mission Downhole Solutions

Aktro Molde
Alberta Instrument Mono
Albin’s Enterprises Monoflo
AmClyde National
Baylor National Oilwell
Best Flow Products
BLM
Norson
Oil Tools Solutions Drilling Solutions
Bowen Oilwell
Brandt Omega Pumps
Cabot Pacific Inspection
Cardwell PCE
Chimo Equipment Peck-O-Matic
Continental Emsco PEP Engineering and Project Management
Cooper Procon As
Crestex Quality Tubing Solutions
Custom Die & Insert Rebound Rig
DELCO Retsco
Corporate Dreco RMI (Rig Manufacturing International)
Headquarters DSS (Drilling Support Services) Roberds Johnson
Eastern Oil Tools ROSS HILL
7909 Parkwood Circle Elmar Rucker Lifting and Handling Solutions
Drive EMD (Electro Motive Division) Russell Subservice
Houston, Texas 77036 Fibercast Sauerman
United States Fidmash Shaffer
Phone: +1 713 375 3700 Flanagan Ironworks Shearer
Phone: +1 1 888 262 8645 Franks Skytop Brewster
Gardner Denver (Hoisting) Smith Fiberglass Production Solutions
Gator Hawk Specialty
Gregory SSR
Griffith Stålprodukter
HALCO Star Fiberglass
Harrisburg Tech Power
Hepburn TEM (Tulsa Equipment Manufacturing)
HITEC Texas Oil Tools Supply Chain Solutions
Houston Scientific TS&M
Hydra Rig Tuboscope
Ideco Turner Oilfield Service
IPS (Integrated Power Systems) UNIFLEX
IRI International Unit (Cranes)
Koomey Universal Tubular and Corrosion Control
Kremco USF (Utility Steel Fabricators)
LOIS ALLIS Varco Solutions
Lucker Vector
M&W Versatech
M/D Totco Western Oilfield Engineering
Mathey Wheatley Gaso
MATTCO Wildcat Services
McElroy Marine Machinery Wilson Well Service and Completion Solutions
Miller Oilfield Woolley
www.nov.com
©National Oilwell Varco

16625195-FDDRev02 (MANUAL)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

16625195-FDDRev02 (MANUAL)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Printed By: parambahk Printed On: 2016-07-31 01:11:56 GMT-0500

Driller's Wrap Around Console

National Oilwell Varco References:

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document number 16625195-FDD

02 24.06.2016 For information S. Peoples K. Martinez B. Fisher

Revision Change Description

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document Number: 16625195-FDD TOC

Vol. Chapter/ Title Remarks

1 1 General Information (Chapter Not Applicable)

1 2 Installation, Operation, & Maintenance

1 2.2 Spare Parts List

1 3 Technical Documents & Drawings

1 3.1 General / Mechanical Drawings

1 3.2 System / Process Diagrams (Section Not Applicable)

1 3.3 Electrical / Instrument

1 3.4 Performance Data (Section Not Applicable)

1 4 Vendor Documentation (Chapter Not Applicable)

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document Number: 16625195-FDD TOC 1

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document Number: 16625195-FDD TOC 2

Vol. Chapter/ Title

1 2 Installation, Operation, & Maintenance

1 2.2 Spare Parts List

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document Number: 16625195-FDD TOC 2.1

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

Operation Manual - Drawworks & Cathead Controls 16595463-MAN 01

Operation & Maintenance Manual – KDC 23, 28, 29 & 30 16599963-MAN 01

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document number 16599964-SHP

01 05.02.2016 For Information JMD MEC MEC

Revision Change description

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document number 16599964-SHP

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document number 16599964-SHP

1.2 Reference documents

 16542223-GAD KDC 23 Console GAD

This procedure covers handling of the driller’s console.

It is the shipping clerks responsibility to ensure that safe handling is performed by

4 HANDLING OF DRILLER’S CONSOLE

5 CHECK LISTS FOR SAFE HANDLING

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document number 16599964-SHP

5.1 Before lifting

5.2 During lifting/lowering

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document number 16599968-PRO

01 05.02.2016 For Information JMD MEC MEC

Revision Change description

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document number 16599968-PRO

TC Number: 16625195-FDD Printed REV: 02 Latest REV: 02

Document number 16599968-PRO

 Preservation applied upon completion of fabrication before transport from the